Fujitsu Dx410 S2 Dx440 Users Manual ETERNUS Web GUI User's Guide DX80 S2/DX90 S2, S2/DX440 DX8100 S2/DX8700

2015-01-25

: Fujitsu Fujitsu-Dx410-S2-Dx440-S2-Users-Manual-218439 fujitsu-dx410-s2-dx440-s2-users-manual-218439 fujitsu pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1066 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Cover
Preface
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Chapter 1 Outline
- 1.1 Outline
- 1.2 Features
- 1.3 Operating Environment
- 1.4 User Management
- 1.5 Screen Operations
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
- 2.1 Startup of GUI
- 2.2 Login
- 2.3 Logout
- 2.4 Exit
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
- 3.1 Initial Setup 1
- 3.2 Initial Setup 2
Chapter 4 Configuration Settings
- 4.1 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings)
  - 4.1.1 When Creating Host Groups (when Using the [Add Host Group] Function)
  - 4.1.2 When Host Groups are not Created (when Using the [Add Host] Function)
- 4.2 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings, Previously Referred to as LUN Mapping)
  - 4.2.1 When Allocating the CA port Group to the LUN Group
  - 4.2.2 When Allocating the CA port to the LUN Group
- 4.3 Configuration Settings for Using Thin Provisioning Functions
Chapter 5 Volume Management
- 5.1 Volume Status
- 5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume
Chapter 6 RAID Group Management
- 6.1 RAID Group Status
- 6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group
Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management
- 7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status
- 7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning
Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management
- 8.1 Advanced Copy Status
- 8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy
Chapter 9 Connectivity Management
- 9.1 Connectivity Status
- 9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity
Chapter 10 Component Management
- 10.1 Component Status
- 10.2 Functions in the Action Area for Component
Chapter 11 System Management
- 11.1 System Status
- 11.2 Functions in the Action Area for System
Appendix A User Roles and Policies
- A.1 Roles
- A.2 Availability of Functions for each Policy
Appendix B Status List
- B.1 Device General Status
  - B.1.1 Device General Status (Detail)
- B.2 Volume Status
- B.3 RAID Group Status
- B.4 Thin Provisioning Pool Status
- B.5 Component Status
  - B.5.1 Drive Status
- B.6 Key Status
- B.7 Key Server Status
Appendix C Installing the Security Certificate
- C.1 For Internet Explorer
- C.2 For Firefox
Appendix D Naming Conventions of Volumes and Hosts
- D.1 Naming Convention of Volumes
- D.2 Naming Convention of Hosts
Appendix E Basic Size and MWC Input Condition for RAID Groups
- E.1 Basic Size for each RAID Group
- E.2 Input Conditions for MWC
  - E.2.1 Allowed Input for the MWC When Using the Default Stripe Depth Value
  - E.2.2 Allowed Input for the MWC when Performance is Tuned
Appendix F Automatic Controlling CM-CPU Setting
Appendix G Using RADIUS Authentication
- G.1 Using RADIUS Authentication to Access the ETERNUS DX Disk Storage System
- G.2 Notes when Using RADIUS Authentication for GUI
- G.3 Setting Up the RADIUS Server
Appendix H Estimated Advanced Copy Source Capacity
Appendix I Storage Migration Setting Files
- I.1 Template File for Storage Migration Settings
- I.2 Coding Conventions for the Storage Migration Setting File
- I.3 Setting Example of the Storage Migration Setting File
Appendix J Factory Default List
- J.1 Advanced Copy
- J.2 Connectivity
- J.3 System
Appendix K Error Code
Colophon

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

P2X0-1090-10ENZ0

ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2,

ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2,

ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2

This page is intentionally left blank.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Preface

This manual provides a variety of basic information about Web GUI for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the

ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2. It should be referred to when setting

up and maintaining the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and the ETERNUS

DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 Disk storage systems.

Knowledge of UNIX or Windows® system management is required.

This manual is written for controller firmware version V10L50 or later. Some of the functions herein may not

be supported for firmware version V10L4x or earlier.

Tenth Edition

June 2013

Structure of This Manual

This manual consists of the following 11 chapters and ten appendices.

●Chapter 1 Outline

This chapter describes the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and the ETERNUS

DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 Web GUI outlines, features, operation environment, user management function,

and operation screens for Web GUI.

●Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown

This chapter describes how to start, exit, log in and log out from Web GUI.

●Chapter 3 Initial Setup

This chapter describes the initial settings for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440

S2, and the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2.

●Chapter 4 Configuration Settings

This chapter describes the configuration settings for using Standard volumes and Thin Provisioning

functions.

●Chapter 5 Volume Management

This chapter describes volume status and management.

●Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

This chapter describes RAID group status and management.

●Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

This chapter describes Thin Provisioning Pool status and management.

Preface

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

●Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

This chapter describes Advanced Copy status and management.

●Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

This chapter describes connectivity settings between the host and the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the

ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2.

●Chapter 10 Component Management

This chapter describes component status in the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440

S2, and the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 and hardware maintenance.

●Chapter 11 System Management

This chapter describes system status and management.

The following items are provided in the appendices.

•User Roles and Policies

•Status List

•Installing the Security Certificate

•Naming Conventions of Volumes and Hosts

•Basic Size and MWC Input Condition for RAID Groups

•Automatic Controlling CM-CPU Setting

•Using RADIUS Authentication

•Estimated Advanced Copy Source Capacity

•Storage Migration Setting Files

•Factory Default List

•Error Code

Latest Information

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice for functionality expansion and

improvement of the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and the ETERNUS DX8100

S2/DX8700 S2 Disk storage systems. The latest version of this manual and the latest information of the ETER-

NUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 Disk stor-

age systems are released in the following web-site. Access the following address if needed.

http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/storage/eternus/documentation/

Preface

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Category

Main

Action

Header

Navigation

Bread crumb list

Chapter 1 Outline

1.5 Screen Operations

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

■Category

The subordinate items are displayed for an item that is clicked in the navigation. The category directory is

used for switching the contents that are displayed in the Main screen. Click the item for the function that is to

be used. The horizontal width of the category area can be changed.

■Main

A list of items is displayed for an item that is clicked on the navigation or in the category.

The filter setting area may also be displayed for some lists.

•Filter setting

Filter setting is a function used to display a list of only the items meeting all the specified conditions. The

conditions that are available depend on the function. No filtering is set by default.

■Action

Only the available functions for the selected items from the navigation or in the category are displayed. Click

the function that is to be used to display the wizard screen.

Click the [>>] button to switch the display of the action area.

The number of operation targets that is selected in the Main area is displayed in the "Target:" field. When no

selections are made, "0" is displayed.

1.5.3 List Screen/Detailed Screen

There are two types of main screens; a list screen and a detailed screen.

The header, bread crumb list, and navigation areas are not included in the screen shots in this section.

■List screen

A list of the items that were clicked on the navigation or in the category is displayed. For items with detailed

information, links to the detailed screens are displayed.

Links to detailed screen

Chapter 1 Outline

1.5 Screen Operations

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

■Detailed screen

Click the link for each item in the list screen to display a detailed screen. Click the tabs that are displayed to

switch the display.

1.5.4 Basic Operation

Select the desired item and execute the selected operation.

For some items, the same information may be displayed for the list screen and the detailed screen. From

Chapter 5 onward, only the information for items in the detailed screen that is different from the list screen is

described.

Tabs to change detailed screens

Filter setting

Sorting criteria

Select All checkbox

Page specification

Number of target items

Chapter 1 Outline

1.5 Screen Operations

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

■Selecting an operation

When an item in the navigation or category is clicked, a list items for the selected item is displayed. Select the

checkbox or checkboxes of the listed items for the desired operation. Note that some operations, such as

creating new volumes, do not require the item to be selected.

The following operations are available in the list screen:

•Filter setting

Filter setting is a function used to display a list of only the items that meet all the specified conditions. The

settings that can be specified vary depending on the function that is selected. No filtering is set by default.

•Number of target items

The number of operation target items that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is dis-

played.

•Page specification

Page specification is a function used to display the specified page. This setting is available when lists are

displayed on multiple pages. The total number of pages and the current page number is displayed.

-Click the [<<] button to display the first page.

-Click the [<] button to display the previous page.

-Click the [>] button to display the next page.

-Click the [>>] button to display the last page.

When specifying the page that is to be displayed, input the numeric character in the page specification

spin box and click the [Go] button. A list for the specified page is displayed.

•Sort

Sorting is a function that rearranges the order of the display items in ascending order (A - Z or 0 - 9), in

descending order (Z - A or 9 - 0), or in a specific order. Click the sorting criteria to change the order. The

item that is furthest to the left is displayed in ascending order by default.

•Select All checkbox

The "Select All" checkbox is the first item in the left of the item field. Click this checkbox to select all of the

checkboxes that are listed. This checkbox is left clear by default.

■Executing an operation

Select the desired operation item from the navigation or category, and then select the function that is to be

executed in the Action field.

Only the available functions for the displayed item are displayed in the Action field.

Some functions in the Action field require one target item from the list to be selected, some functions require

multiple target items to be selected, and other functions can be performed without selecting any items.

•[Cancel] button

Deletes the newly added or changed information, and then returns to the previous screen. Or cancels the

current operation, and then returns to the previous screen.

The header, bread crumb list, and navigation areas are not included in the screen shots in the following

chapters and sections.

Chapter 1 Outline

1.5 Screen Operations

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

■Updating the screen display

When the [ ] icon in the global header is clicked or a category, a navigation, or an action is selected, the

most recently updated screen is obtained. If a tab is clicked, the screen is not updated. Note that only the

[Overview] screen automatically updates periodically according to the specified update interval.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Chapter 2

Startup and Shutdown

This chapter describes how to start, exit, log in, and log out from GUI.

2.1 Startup of GUI

Startup the login screen for GUI.

Connect the PC and the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system using a LAN cable, and display the login screen via

the web browser.

The procedure to start up the login screen for GUI is as follows:

Procedure

1Directly connect the PC and MNT port of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system via LAN cable.

2Set the IP address and subnet mask for the PC to match the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

network settings.

3Enter "http://IP address of the storage system/" to the address bar in the web browser

(Default IP address is "192.168.1.1").

→The login screen for GUI is displayed. Refer to "2.2 Login" (page 34) for detailed procedure to login.

•When using SSL (https), the "SSL server certificate" or the "self-signed SSL certificate" must be

registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system in advance.

-When registering "SSL server certificate"

a Send the CSR that is downloaded using the procedure in "11.2.3.16 Create Key/CSR" (page 790)

to the certification authority and obtain the "SSL server certificate".

b Register the obtained "SSL server certificate" by using the procedure in "11.2.3.17 Register SSL

Certificate" (page 795).

-When registering "self-signed SSL certificate"

a Create the "self-signed SSL certificate" using the procedure in "11.2.3.15 Create Self-signed SSL

Certificate" (page 787).

b Register the created "self-signed SSL certificate" in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system as

described in "Appendix C Installing the Security Certificate" (page 981).

•If Firefox 3.6.x is used for connecting to the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system via "https", a

communication error may occur. This error can be avoided by connecting via "http" or by using

"Internet Explorer".

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown

2.1 Startup of GUI

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

End of procedure

•Refer to "11.2.3.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 745) for procedure to set the IP address of the

MNT port.

•The default number of port that is used for http connection is "80".

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown

2.2 Login

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2.2 Login

The menu that is displayed depends on the role that is applied for the user account.

The procedure for logging in is as follows:

Procedure

1Click the [Option] button in the login screen, and select the language (English or Japanese).

2Enter the User ID and Password, and click the [Login] button.

The User ID and the Password vary depending on which account is being used to log in.

•User ID

root

•Password

root (Default)

→The operation screen appears.

If a login is attempted while 16 users are already logged in to the GUI, an error screen appears. When this

occurs, note the error message and try logging in again after completing the required operation.

•Refer to "11.2.7 Define Role" (page 853) for user accounts.

•If the input error occurs, enter the User ID and Password again to log in to the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system.

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown

2.2 Login

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

End of procedure

Up to 16 users can be logged in concurrently from the GUI (the number of users that are logged from

CLI is not included). Logging in 17 or more users is not allowed.

Also note that when another user is already logged in and performing one of the following

operations, a warning message appears and some functions cannot be used. Confirm the current GUI

usage state and start operation.

•When applying controller firmware

•When applying disk firmware

•During the RAID group diagnosis

•During the disk diagnosis

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown

2.3 Logout

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2.3 Logout

Log out from GUI to finish the operation.

The procedure for logging out is as follows:

Procedure

1Click the [Logout] link on the top right of the screen.

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→This completes the logging out process.

The login screen appears.

End of procedure

A logout is performed automatically under the following conditions:

•When a different user executes a forcible logout (*1)

•When the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is turned off

•When no operation is performed for 60 minutes or longer after logging in

*1: When the user name is the same as a user who is already logged in, the user who was previously logged in is

forcibly logged out.

Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown

2.4 Exit

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2.4 Exit

Exit from GUI.

The procedure to exit is as follows:

Procedure

1Click the [Close] button for the web browser.

→Exit from GUI.

The login screen does not appear.

End of procedure

Make sure to perform "2.3 Logout" (page 36) operation before exiting GUI.

If exiting GUI without logging out, the login status is not released.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Chapter 3

Initial Setup

This chapter describes the Initial Setup function for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

This function performs the required initial settings that must be set before operating the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system on a series of wizard screens.

Initial Setup is divided into "Initial Setup 1" and "Initial Setup 2".

•Initial Setup 1

Performs the minimum settings required before using the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•Initial Setup 2

Makes the reporting settings for when an error occurs in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. The settings

can be omitted if the reporting function will not be used.

If the browser is shut down during execution of Initial Setup, other functions will no longer be available. If

this case, forcibly log in using the same user name, and perform Initial Setup 1 again from the beginning.

However, if you have already reached Initial Setup 2, the wizard is executed from the beginning of Initial

Setup 2.

The settings made in the Initial Setup can be changed individually later.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.1 Initial Setup 1

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3.1 Initial Setup 1

The flow of wizard operations in Initial Setup 1 is shown below.

(1)Set Storage Name

"11.2.13.1 Modify Storage System Name" (page 927) for details.

(2)Set Date and Time

Set the date/time and time zone (storage system location) of the internal clock in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system. Refer to "11.2.13.2 Modify Date and Time" (page 929) for details.

(3)Change Password

Change the password for the default account that is currently logged in before starting to use the ETERNUS

DX Disk storage system. Refer to "11.2.1 Change User Password" (page 742) for details.

(4)Register Thin Provisioning License

If using the Thin Provisioning function, register the license here. Refer to "7.2.10 Register Thin Provisioning

License" (page 245) for details.

(5)Register Copy License

If using the Advanced Copy function, register the license here. Refer to "8.2.4 Register Advanced Copy

License" (page 295) for details.

(6)Register SED Authentication Key

Refer to "11.2.13.7 Register SED Authentication Key" (page 944) for details

(7)Set Network Environment

Set the environment for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to communicate on the network such as IP

address and subnet mask. Refer to "11.2.3.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 745) for details.

Log out when the settings are complete. Log in again, and then proceed to "3.2 Initial Setup 2" (page 49).

If SED has been installed before registering the SED authentication key, reboot the ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system before logging in again.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.1 Initial Setup 1

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

The procedure to perform Initial Setup 1 is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Start Initial Setup] in [Action].

2Click the [Next >>] button.

→Initial Setup starts.

The [Start Initial Setup] screen is displayed after logging in for the first time.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.1 Initial Setup 1

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3Proceed to [Set Storage System Name].

3-1 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >>] button.

-Name

-Installation Location

-Administrator

-Description

→A confirmation screen appears.

3-2 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the storage system name starts.

3-3 Click the [Done] button.

•If logging in for the first time, be sure to set the name of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•If not logging in for the first time, click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without

setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.1 Initial Setup 1

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4Proceed to [Set Date and Time].

4-1 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >>] button.

-Date/Time Information

-Time Zone

-Daylight Saving Time

-NTP Service

→A confirmation screen appears.

4-2 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the Date/time starts.

4-3 Click the [Done] button.

Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

If "NTP enabled" is selected for "NTP server" when there is no NTP server connection or when

communication with the NTP server is unstable, the required time for the date and time setting

may take longer. Wait until the screen is updated. Even if connection to the NTP server fails, the

date and time setting appear as though they have completed. To confirm that the ETERNUS DX

Disk storage system is successfully connected to the NTP server, use the procedure in "11.2.13.2

Modify Date and Time" (page 929) and check "Access Status" in the "NTP Service" field.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.1 Initial Setup 1

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5Proceed to [Change Password].

5-1 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >>] button.

-Old Password

-New Password

-Confirm New Password

→A confirmation screen appears.

5-2 Click the [OK] button.

→Changing of the password starts.

5-3 Click the [Done] button.

Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.1 Initial Setup 1

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6Proceed to [Register Thin Provisioning License].

6-1 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >>] button.

-License Key (if not already registered)

→A confirmation screen appears.

6-2 Click the [OK] button.

→Thin Provisioning license is registered.

6-3 Click the [Done] button.

•If the Thin Provisioning license key is already registered, proceed to [Register Copy License].

•Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.1 Initial Setup 1

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7Proceed to [Register Copy License].

7-1 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >>] button.

-Registration Method

-License Key

→A confirmation screen appears.

7-2 Click the [OK] button.

→The Advanced Copy license registration is executed.

7-3 Click the [Done] button.

•When using ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager or ETERNUS SF Express, perform the required

settings described in the documents that are supplied with ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy

Manager or ETERNUS SF Express.

•If a Advanced Copy license (trial license) is already registered, the paid license can be

registered. Input the license key.

•If the Advanced Copy license key (paid license) is already registered, proceed to [Register SED

Authentication Key].

•Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.1 Initial Setup 1

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8Proceed to [Register SED Authentication Key].

8-1 Click the [Next >>] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

8-2 Click the [OK] button.

→SED Authentication Key registration starts.

8-3 Click the [Done] button.

•If the SED Authentication Key is already registered, proceed to [Set Network Environment].

•Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.1 Initial Setup 1

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9Proceed to [Set Network Environment].

9-1 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >>] button.

-Select Network Port

-Interface

-DNS

-LAN (only for IPv4)

-Allowed IP List

→A confirmation screen appears.

9-2 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the network environment starts.

9-3 Click the [Finish] button.

→A completed screen appears.

Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.1 Initial Setup 1

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10 Click the [Close] button.

→The browser is closed, and Initial Setup 1 is complete.

End of procedure

•Follow the on-screen instructions to reboot the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system if needed.

•Restart the browser, and wait a few minutes before logging into the GUI again. After logging in

again, continue with the initial setup. Proceed to Initial Setup 2.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3.2 Initial Setup 2

This sets the various reports that are generated when an error occurs in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

If monitoring the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, use this wizard to build an environment.

The flow of wizard operations in Initial Setup 2 is shown below.

(1)Set SNMP Agent Basic

Set up the SNMP Agent basic interface in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. Refer to "11.2.3.3 Setup

SNMP Agent Basic Interface" (page 761) for details.

(2)Set SNMP Manager

Specify the IP address of the SNMP Manager. Refer to "11.2.3.4 Setup SNMP Manager" (page 763) for

details.

(3)Set SNMP Agent MIB Access View

Set the MIB View of the SNMP Agent. Refer to "11.2.3.5 Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View" (page 766) for

details.

(4)Set SNMP Agent User

Set up the SNMP Agent User.

Set the security levels and the MIB access view for each user. Refer to "11.2.3.6 Setup SNMP Agent User"

(page 768) for details.

(5)Set SNMP Agent Community

Set up the SNMP Agent Community. Refer to "11.2.3.7 Setup SNMP Agent Community" (page 771) for

details.

(6)Set SNMP Agent Trap

Set up the environment to send notification of events that occur in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to

the SNMP Manager by an SNMP Trap. Refer to "11.2.3.8 Setup SNMP Agent Trap" (page 774) for details.

(7)Set E-Mail Notification

Set the E-mail notification for events that occur in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. Refer to "11.2.3.12

Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 781) for details.

(8)Set Syslog Notification

Set up external servers (Syslog server) for sending logs of events that are detected by the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system. Refer to "11.2.3.13 Setup Syslog" (page 783) for details.

Some functions do not need to be specified depending on the SNMP version.

This setting is not required when SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is used for SNMP communication.

This setting is not required when SNMPv3 is used for SNMP communication.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

The procedure to perform Initial Setup 2 is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Start Initial Setup] in [Action].

2Click the [Next >>] button.

→Initial Setup restarts.

•When logging in again after Initial Setup 1 is complete, the [Initial Setup 2] screen appears.

•If all of the settings of Initial Setup 2 are not performed, click the [All Skip] button to exit the Initial

Setup wizard.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3Proceed to [Set SNMP Agent Basic].

3-1 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >>] button.

-SNMP Function

-LAN Port used for SNMP

-Authentication Failure

-Engine ID

-MIB-II RFC Version

→A confirmation screen appears.

3-2 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the SNMP Agent basic starts.

3-3 Click the [Done] button.

Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4Proceed to [Set SNMP Manager].

4-1 Click the [Add] button.

4-2 Specify the following items, and click the [OK] button.

-IP Version

-Manager IP Address (IPv4)

-Manager IP Address (IPv6)

→Returns to the original screen.

4-3 Repeat Step 4-1 and Step 4-2 to configure multiple IP addresses.

Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4-4 When the IP addresses are set, click the [Next >>] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

4-5 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the SNMP Manager starts.

4-6 Click the [Done] button.

5Proceed to [Set SNMP Agent MIB Access View].

5-1 Click the [Add] button.

Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5-2 Specify the following items, and click the [OK] button.

-View Name

-Subtree

→Returns to the original screen.

5-3 Repeat Step 5-1 and Step 5-2 to configure multiple MIB Access Views.

5-4 When the setting of the MIB Access Views is complete, click the [Next >>] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

5-5 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the SNMP Agent MIB Access View starts.

5-6 Click the [Done] button.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6Proceed to [Set SNMP Agent User].

6-1 Click the [Add] button.

The [Set SNMP Agent User] function must be set when using SNMPv3 in SNMP communication

between the SNMP Agent and SNMP Manager.

Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6-2 Specify the following items, and click the [OK] button.

-User Name

-MIB View Setting

-Authentication

-Authentication Method

-Authentication Password

-Retype Authentication Password

-Encryption

-Encryption Password

-Retype Encryption Password

→Returns to the original screen.

6-3 Repeat Step 6-1 and Step 6-2 to configure information for multiple users.

6-4 When the setting of the user information is complete, click the [Next >>] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6-5 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the SNMP Agent User starts.

6-6 Click the [Done] button.

7Proceed to [Set SNMP Agent Community].

7-1 Click the [Add] button.

The [Set SNMP Agent Community] function must be set when using SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c in SNMP

communication between the SNMP Agent and SNMP Manager. The SNMP Agent Community

setting is not necessary when using SNMPv3 only.

Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7-2 Specify the following items, and click the [OK] button.

-Community Name

-View Name

-Allowed SNMP Manager List

→Returns to the original screen.

7-3 Repeat Step 7-1 and Step 7-2 to configure multiple communities.

7-4 When the setting of the community is complete, click the [Next >>] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

7-5 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the SNMP Agent Community starts.

7-6 Click the [Done] button.

8Proceed to [Set SNMP Agent Trap].

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8-1 Click the [Add] button.

8-2 Specify the following items, and click the [OK] button.

-Manager No.

-SNMP Version

-Community Name

-User Name

-Port No.

→Returns to the original screen.

8-3 Repeat Step 8-1 and Step 8-2 to configure information for multiple traps.

Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8-4 When the setting of the trap information is complete, click the [Next >>] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

8-5 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the SNMP Agent Trap starts.

8-6 Click the [Done] button.

9Proceed to [Set E-Mail Notification].

9-1 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >>] button.

-Notification E-Mail

-Mail Server Settings

-Retry Setting

→A confirmation screen appears.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9-2 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the E-Mail Notification starts.

9-3 Click the [Done] button.

10 Proceed to [Set Syslog Notification].

10-1 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >>] button.

-Send Log

-Domain Name / IP Address

-Port No.

-LAN Port

→A confirmation screen appears.

10-2 Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the Syslog starts.

10-3 Click the [Done] button.

→A completed screen appears.

Click the [Skip] button to proceed to the next screen without setting.

Chapter 3 Initial Setup

3.2 Initial Setup 2

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11 Click the [Finish] button.

→Initial Setup 2 is complete, and the [Overview] screen appears.

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Chapter 4

Configuration Settings

This chapter describes the following configuration settings:

•Configuration settings for using Standard volumes (when using host affinity settings)

•Configuration settings for using Standard volumes (when using host affinity settings, previously referred to

as LUN mapping)

•Configuration settings for using Thin Provisioning functions

4.1 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When

Using Host Affinity Settings)

There are two methods to set the host affinity; one method creates a host group and sets the host affinity (by

using the [Add Host Group] function). The other method sets the host affinity without creating a host group

(by using the [Add Host] function). Use the procedure that does not create a host group only if the previous

procedure for registering hosts in older storage systems (such as the ETERNUS DX410/DX440 or the ETERNUS

DX8100/DX8400/DX8700) is used.

4.1.1 When Creating Host Groups (when Using the [Add Host Group] Function)

The following section describes the series of settings when creating host groups and using Standard volumes.

Not only can new RAID groups be created, adding or changing volumes that are registered in existing RAID

groups can also be performed.

Create RAID Group

Create a RAID group (a group of drives that configures the RAID in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system).

Refer to:

-Create RAID Group

Chapter 4 Configuration Settings

4.1 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings)

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Create Volume

Create a volume (drive area in the RAID group). A volume is a structural unit of RAID that can be

recognized from the server. Select "Standard" for "Type".

Refer to:

-Create Volume

Add Host Group

Add the information of any server that accesses the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system via the

ports. When adding a server, create a host group (a host (HBA) group that accesses the same

LUN group). Assign a host response when creating a host group.

When creating new host groups, refer to:

-Add FC/FCoE Host Group

-Add iSCSI Host Group

-Add SAS Host Group

When adding hosts to existing host groups, refer to:

-Modify Host Group

Create CA Port Group

Create a CA port group (a group of CA ports that are connected to the specified host group) that

is used for the server to access the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

Refer to:

-Create FC Port Group

-Create iSCSI Port Group

-Create SAS Port Group

-Create FCoE Port Group

The concept of host connection settings are described in "Chapter 9 Connectivity

Management" (page 367). Refer to "Structures for Host Connection" (page 368)

for details.

Chapter 4 Configuration Settings

4.1 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings)

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Add LUN Group

Create a LUN group (a group of volumes that are recognized from the server, which is

conventionally referred to as an "affinity group").

Correspond the volume number to the Logical Unit Number (LUN) that can be recognized by the

host for each LUN group.

LUN groups are recognized from the server by the host affinity setting that allocates the CA port

groups and the LUN groups to the host group.

Refer to:

-Add LUN Group

Create Host Affinity

To recognize the LUN group from the server, allocate the host groups with the CA port groups

and the LUN groups.

Refer to:

-Create Host Affinity

Chapter 4 Configuration Settings

4.1 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings)

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4.1.2 When Host Groups are not Created (when Using the [Add Host] Function)

The following section describes the series of settings when using Standard volumes without creating host

groups.

Not only can new RAID groups be created, adding or changing volumes that are registered in existing RAID

groups can also be performed.

Create RAID Group

Create a RAID group (a group of drives that configures the RAID in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system).

Refer to:

-Create RAID Group

Create Volume

Create a volume (drive area in the RAID group). A volume is a structural unit of RAID that can be

recognized from the server. Select "Standard" for "Type".

Refer to:

-Create Volume

Add Host

Add the information of any server that accesses the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system via the

ports. When adding a server, register a new host. Assign a host response when registering a

host.

Refer to:

-Add FC/FCoE Host

-Add iSCSI Host

-Add SAS Host

The "Add Host" functions are only displayed when the "Use "Add Host"" checkbox

is selected for the "Function to Add Host" field in "Web GUI Settings". This item is

not selected (not displayed) by default. Refer to "11.2.13.4 Setup Subsystem

Parameters" (page 935) for details.

Chapter 4 Configuration Settings

4.1 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings)

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Add LUN Group

Create a LUN group (a group of volumes that are recognized from the server, which is

conventionally referred to as an "affinity group").

Correspond the volume number to the Logical Unit Number (LUN) that can be recognized by the

host for each LUN group.

LUN groups are recognized from the server by the host affinity setting that allocates the CA

ports and the LUN groups to the host.

Refer to:

-Add LUN Group

Create Host Affinity

To recognize the LUN group from the server, allocate the host with the CA ports and LUN groups.

Refer to:

-Create Host Affinity

Chapter 4 Configuration Settings

4.2 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings, Previously Referred to as LUN Mapping)

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4.2 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When

Using Host Affinity Settings, Previously Referred to as LUN

Mapping)

LUNs can be allocated to either CA port groups or CA ports.

4.2.1 When Allocating the CA port Group to the LUN Group

The following section describes the series of settings when creating CA port groups and using Standard

volumes.

Not only can new RAID groups be created, adding or changing volumes that are registered in existing RAID

groups can also be performed.

Create RAID Group

Create a RAID group (a group of drives that configures the RAID in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system).

Refer to:

-Create RAID Group

Create Volume

Create a volume (drive area in the RAID group). A volume is a structural unit of RAID that can be

recognized from the server. Select "Standard" for "Type".

Refer to:

-Create Volume

Chapter 4 Configuration Settings

4.2 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings, Previously Referred to as LUN Mapping)

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Create CA Port Group

Create a CA port group (a group of CA ports that are connected to the specified host group) that

is used for the server to access the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

Refer to:

-Create FC Port Group

-Create iSCSI Port Group

-Create SAS Port Group

-Create FCoE Port Group

Add LUN Group

Create a LUN group (a group of volumes that are recognized from the server, which is

conventionally referred to as an "affinity group").

Correspond the volume number to the Logical Unit Number (LUN) that can be recognized by the

host for each LUN group.

LUN groups are recognized from the server by the host affinity setting that allocates the CA port

groups to the LUN groups.

Refer to:

-Add LUN Group

Create Host Affinity

To recognize the LUN group from the server, select "All" for the host group and allocate the CA

port group and the LUN group.

Refer to:

-Create Host Affinity

The concept of host connection settings are described in "Chapter 9 Connectivity

Management" (page 367). Refer to "Structures for Host Connection" (page 368)

for details.

Chapter 4 Configuration Settings

4.2 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings, Previously Referred to as LUN Mapping)

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4.2.2 When Allocating the CA port to the LUN Group

The following section describes the series of settings when using Standard volumes without creating CA port

groups.

Not only can new RAID groups be created, adding or changing volumes that are registered in existing RAID

groups can also be performed.

Create RAID Group

Create a RAID group (a group of drives that configures the RAID in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system).

Refer to:

-Create RAID Group

Create Volume

Create a volume (drive area in the RAID group). A volume is a structural unit of RAID that can be

recognized from the server. Select "Standard" for "Type".

Refer to:

-Create Volume

Add LUN Group

Create a LUN group (a group of volumes that are recognized from the server, which is

conventionally referred to as an "affinity group").

Correspond the volume number to the Logical Unit Number (LUN) that can be recognized by the

host for each LUN group.

LUN groups are recognized from the server by the host affinity setting that allocates the CA

ports to the LUN groups.

Refer to:

-Add LUN Group

Create Host Affinity

To recognize the LUN group from the server, select "All" for the host and allocate the CA port

and the LUN group.

Refer to:

-Create Host Affinity

Chapter 4 Configuration Settings

4.3 Configuration Settings for Using Thin Provisioning Functions

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4.3 Configuration Settings for Using Thin Provisioning Functions

The following section shows the series of settings that need to be performed to use Thin Provisioning

functions.

Not only can new Thin Provisioning Pool be created, adding or changing volumes that are registered in the

existing Thin Provisioning Pools can also be performed.

Refer to:

-Register Thin Provisioning License

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

Create a Thin Provisioning Pool (groups of drives (which are configured in RAID groups) that

configure a Thin Provisioning Pool).

Refer to:

-Create Thin Provisioning Pool

Create Volume

Create a volume (physical drive area in the Thin Provisioning Pool). A volume is a structural unit

of a Thin Provisioning Pool that can be recognized from the server. Select "Thin Provisioning" for

"Type".

Refer to:

-Create Volume

Add Host

Recognize the volume from the server.

Refer to:

Refer to Step 3 onward in one of the following sections:

-"4.1 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings)"

(page 63)

-"4.2 Configuration Settings for Using Standard Volumes (When Using Host Affinity Settings,

Previously Referred to as LUN Mapping)" (page 68)

Chapter 4 Configuration Settings

4.3 Configuration Settings for Using Thin Provisioning Functions

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

When using Thin Provisioning functions, monitoring of Thin Provisioning Pool usage is important. Make sure

that the Thin Provisioning Pool usage does not exceed the threshold. Refer to "7.1.1 Thin Provisioning Pool

(Basic Information)" (page 200) for details.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Chapter 5

Volume Management

This chapter describes volume management.

5.1 Volume Status

Volume status displays the status information of volumes.

Volume status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Detailed information of the volumes can be displayed from the following screens:

•Volume Detail (Basic)

•Volume Detail (Reservation)

•Volume Detail (Pinned Data)

•Volume Detail (Balancing TPV)

•Volume Detail (LUN Concatenation)

•Volume Detail (WSV Concatenation)

Volume status screen Category

Volume (Basic Information) Volume

Performance (Host I/O) Performance (Host I/O)

Performance (Advanced Copy) Performance (Advanced Copy)

LUN Group LUN Group

Reservation Reservation

Pinned Data Pinned Data

Bad Sector Bad Sector

Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5.1.1 Volume (Basic Information)

This function displays the basic information of volumes.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The volume number is displayed.

During volume creation, the volume number can be allocated automatically or specified manually. When

the volume number is allocated automatically, the volume number is allocated from the smallest unused

decimal number in ascending order.

Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen. Refer to "5.1.9 Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 88) for

display items.

•Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen. Refer to "5.1.9 Volume

Detail (Basic)" (page 88) for display items.

•Status

The volume status is displayed. When the volume status is normal, " Available" is displayed. Refer to

"B.2 Volume Status" (page 974) for detailed information of volume status.

•Type

The volume type is displayed.

-Standard

Standard volume or volume that is used for general operations

-WSV

Wide Striping Volume that is configured by multiple RAID groups that are concatenated with striping to

improve performance

-TPV

Thin Provisioning Volume

-FTV

Flexible Tier Volume

-SDV

Snap Data Volume

-SDPV

Snap Data Pool Volume

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

-Temporary

A migration source volume that failed to delete after RAID migration is complete, a work volume that

failed to delete after TPV balancing is complete, or a work volume that failed to delete after FTRP bal-

ancing is complete.

•Capacity

The volume capacity is displayed.

The capacity is displayed in units of "MB", "GB", or "TB". Even when volumes are created in units of "MB", if

the volume capacity exceeds 1023.99MB, the capacity is displayed in units of "GB". If the volume capacity

exceeds 1023.99GB, the capacity is displayed in units of "TB". The capacity is rounded off to two decimal

places. To check the volume capacity in units of "MB", use CLI.

•RAID Group/TPP/FRTP No.

The following number is displayed:

-If the type is "WSV"

The RAID group number to which the representative volume (*1) belongs is displayed.

*1: A volume for WSV, which is created by concatenating multiple RAID groups with striping, that belongs to the

RAID group that is first in the concatenation order.

-If the type is "TPV"

The Thin Provisioning Pool (TPP) number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

-If the type is "FTV"

The Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP) number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

-If the type is not one of the types listed above

The RAID group number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

•RAID Group/TPP/FTRP Name

The following name is displayed:

-If the type is "WSV"

The RAID group name to which the representative volume belongs is displayed.

-If the type is "TPV"

The Thin Provisioning Pool (TPP) name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

-If the type is "FTV"

The Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP) name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

-If the type is not one of the types listed above

The RAID group name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

•Encryption

The encryption status is displayed.

-CM

A volume that is encrypted by CM

-"-" (hyphen)

A volume that is not encrypted (plain text volume)

-SED

A volume that is encrypted by SED

•UID

The Universal Identifier (UID) is displayed.

The UID is an identifier (storage system name) to specify a volume from the open system server. A UID is

created from the WWN of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system and a volume number.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

•Process

A process that is being performed for the volume is displayed.

If multiple processes are being performed, the processes are separated with a ": (colon)" and displayed

using ("xx:yy"). "Encrypting", "Formatting", "Migrating", or "Balancing" is displayed as "xx". "Zero Reclaim-

ing" or "Reserved Zero Reclaim" is displayed as "yy".

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Encrypting

Volume encryption is being performed.

-Formatting

Formatting is being performed.

-Migrating

RAID migration is being performed.

-Balancing

TPV balancing or FTRP balancing is being performed.

-Zero Reclaiming

Zero Reclamation (*1) is being performed for a TPV or an FTV.

-Reserved Zero Reclaim

A TPV or an FTV is reserved for Zero Reclamation (*2).

*1: "Zero Reclamation" is a function that releases the allocated physical area when data in the physical area that

is allocated to a TPV or an FTV is filled with zeros.

*2: When "Start Zero Reclamation after migration" is enabled for RAID migration, the source volume will be

reserved for Zero Reclamation.

•Forbid Advanced Copy

The protection status of the volume or the volume attribute (such as mirroring reservation) is displayed.

-Yes

The volume is protected. The volume cannot be used as a copy destination volume.

-No

The volume is not protected. The volume can be used as a copy destination volume.

-DLM (Dynamic LUN Mirroring)

An attribute that is to be set to a volume being created as the REC copy destination by the Dynamic LUN

Mirroring function regardless of whether the volume is protected. If this attribute is displayed, the

volume might be the one that is left in the storage system due to unsuccessful creation.

-ODX (Offloaded Data Transfer)

An ODX Buffer volume. ODX Buffer volumes cannot be protected.

Filter setting

Filter Description

Name Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Status Select the volume status that is to be displayed.

Type Select the volume type that is to be displayed.

Encryption Select the encryption status of the volume that is to be displayed.

Process Select which current process for the volume is to be displayed.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5.1.2 Performance (Host I/O)

This function displays the performance information of the volumes for Host I/O.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

•Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

•Type

The volume type is displayed.

-Standard

-WSV

-TPV

-FTV

-SDV

-SDPV

•Read IOPS

The read count per second is displayed.

•Write IOPS

The write count per second is displayed.

•Read Throughput

The amount of transferred data that is read per second is displayed.

•Performance information is obtained when performance monitoring is operated from GUI, CLI, or any

other monitoring software. Refer to "11.2.12.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring" (page 925) for details

on how to start performance monitoring with GUI.

•The interval for acquiring performance information can be specified when starting the monitoring. When

using GUI, the default interval is 30 seconds.

•The average performance values during the specified interval are displayed.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

•Write Throughput

The amount of transferred data that is written per second is displayed.

•Read Response Time

The average response time (for read) per millisecond is displayed.

•Write Response Time

The average response time (for write) per millisecond is displayed.

•Read Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for read) is displayed.

•Write Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for write) is displayed.

•Prefetch Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for prefetch) is displayed.

•Cache Page Capacity

The cache page capacity is displayed.

When the cache page capacity is "-" (hyphen), there is no limit for the cache capacity.

•PL

The prefetch limit is displayed. If PL is "0", prefetch is not performed.

•FP

The selected usage for the Force Prefetch Mode, which performs forcible prefetching for cache, is displayed.

-ON

Perform prefetch even if the sequential characteristics of the data access is not detected.

-OFF

Perform prefetch only when the sequential characteristics of the data access is detected.

•MWC

The value of the Multi Write back Count is displayed.

•PSDC

The number of times that sequentiality of data access (Read I/O) is detected (value of the Prefetch

Sequential Detect Count) is displayed. If any sequential data is accessed for the number of times specified

for PSDC, such access is determined as sequential access and prefetch is performed.

•SDDC

The number of times that sequentiality of data access (Write I/O) is detected (value of the Sequential Dirty

Detect Count) is displayed. If any sequential data is accessed for the number of times specified for SDDC,

such access is determined as sequential access and prefetch is performed.

•SS

The value of the parameter (Sequential Slope) to determine the sequentiality of data access (Read I/O) is

displayed. If the difference in addresses between the end LBA of the previous I/O and the start LBA of the

current I/O is within (SS setting + 1), it is determined as sequential data.

•SDS

The value of the parameter (Sequential Dirty Slope) to determine the sequentiality of data access (Write I/

O) is displayed. If the difference in addresses between the end LBA of the previous I/O and the start LBA of

the current I/O is within (SDS setting + 1), it is determined as sequential data.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Filter setting

5.1.3 Performance (Advanced Copy)

This function displays the performance information of the volumes for Advanced Copy.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

•Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

•Type

The volume type is displayed.

-Standard

-WSV

-TPV

-FTV

-SDV

-SDPV

Filter Description

Name Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Type Select the volume type that is to be displayed.

•Performance information is obtained when performance monitoring is operated from GUI, CLI, or any

other monitoring software. Refer to "11.2.12.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring" (page 925) for details

on how to start performance monitoring with GUI.

•The interval for acquiring performance information can be specified when starting the monitoring. When

using GUI, the default interval is 30 seconds.

•The average performance values during the specified interval are displayed.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

•Read IOPS

The read count per second is displayed.

•Write IOPS

The write count per second is displayed.

•Read Throughput

The amount of transferred data that is read per second is displayed.

•Write Throughput

The amount of transferred data that is written per second is displayed.

•Read Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for read) is displayed.

•Write Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for write) is displayed.

•Prefetch Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for prefetch) is displayed.

Filter setting

5.1.4 LUN Group

This function displays the LUN groups of each volume.

A LUN group is a group of Logical Unit Numbers (LUNs), which can be recognized by the host. The allocation

information of LUNs and volumes in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are configured to the LUN group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The volume number is displayed.

Filter Description

Name Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Type Select the volume type that is to be displayed.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

•Name

The volume name is displayed.

•LUN Group Count

The total number of LUN groups for the volume and the number of ports to which the volume is allocated is

displayed.

•LUN Group

The LUN group names of the volume are displayed. If the host, ports, and LUNs are allocated without

specifying a host group or CA port group, the location information of the ports is displayed.

If the volume is registered in multiple LUN groups or the volume is allocated to multiple ports, the display

contents vary depending on the number of LUN groups and the number of ports. When there are two

display targets (the LUN group name and the port location information), the items are separated with a ",

(comma)" and displayed. When there are three or more display targets (the LUN group name and the port

location information), the first two items and a [more...] link are displayed.

When the volume does not belong to any LUN groups, or the volume is not allocated to any ports, the field

is blank.

-LUN group name

-CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

Filter setting

5.1.5 Reservation

This function displays the reservation status of the volumes that are specified by a host.

Filter Description

Name Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

LUN Group Input the LUN group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the LUN group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "5.1.10 Volume Detail (Reservation)" (page 90) for display items.

•Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "5.1.10 Volume Detail (Reservation)" (page 90) for display items.

•LUN Group

When the host affinity setting is specified for a host that reserves the volume, the LUN group name is

displayed. If the host, ports, and LUNs are directly allocated (mapped), the location information of the

ports is displayed.

When the volume is not reserved, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-LUN group name

-CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

•Host LUN

The logical unit number that is allocated to the relevant volume is displayed.

When the volume is not reserved, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Registrant Count

The number of reservation keys registered in the volume is displayed.

•Reservation Type

When the volume is in persistent reservation status, one of the following persistent reservation types is

displayed. When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status, or when the

volume is not reserved, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-WE (Write Exclusive)

-EA (Exclusive Access)

-WE_RO (Write Exclusive-Registrants Only)

-EA_RO (Exclusive Access-Registrants Only)

-WE_AR (Write Exclusive-All Registrants)

-EA_AR (Exclusive Access-All Registrants)

•Reservation Status

The volume reservation status is displayed.

-Yes

In persistent reservation status

-No

In reservation status, but not in persistent reservation status

-"-" (hyphen)

Not in reservation status

•APTPL (*1)

Whether or not persistent reservation information is kept after the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system has

been shutdown/rebooted is displayed. When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent

reservation status, "No" is displayed. When the volume is not reserved, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

*1: Activate Persist Through Power Loss

-Yes

The persistent reservation information is kept.

-No

The persistent reservation information is not kept.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Filter setting

5.1.6 Pinned Data

Volumes including pinned data are displayed.

"Pinned data" is the data left in the cache memory due to unsuccessful write-back to the volume from the

cache memory.

Filter Description

Name Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

LUN Group

Input the LUN group name or the port location information that is to be displayed.

When not using the LUN group name or port location information for filtering, leave this

item blank.

Bottom of Registrant Count Input the minimum number of reservation keys for the volume that is to be displayed.

When not using the bottom of the registrant count, leave this item blank.

Reservation Type Select the reservation type that is to be displayed.

Reservation Status Select the status of reservations that is to be displayed.

APTPL Select the APTPL that is to be displayed.

When a system message that indicates the detection of pinned data is displayed in the [Overview] screen, or

when a "Pinned data" event is notified by Host Sense or SNMP Trap, use this function to check the detected

pinned data.

Use the [Setup Event Notification] function to specify whether to perform event notification when pinned

data is detected. Refer to "11.2.9.1 Setup Event Notification" (page 880) for details. Note that writing back,

deleting, and saving pinned data can be performed by a maintenance engineer who has the "Maintenance

Operation" policy.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "5.1.11 Volume Detail (Pinned Data)" (page 91) for display items.

•Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "5.1.11 Volume Detail (Pinned Data)" (page 91) for display items.

•Pinned Data Count

The number of pinned data is displayed.

•Type

The volume type is displayed.

-Standard

-WSV

-TPV

-FTV

-SDV

-SDPV

-Temporary

•RAID Group/TPP/FRTP No.

The following number is displayed:

-If the type is "WSV"

The RAID group number to which the representative volume (*1) belongs is displayed.

*1: A volume for WSV, which is created by concatenating multiple RAID groups with striping, that belongs to the

RAID group that is first in the concatenation order.

-If the type is "TPV"

The Thin Provisioning Pool (TPP) number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

-If the type is "FTV"

The Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP) number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

-If the type is not one of the types listed above

The RAID group number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

•RAID Group/TPP/FTRP Name

The following name is displayed:

-If the type is "WSV"

The RAID group name to which the representative volume belongs is displayed.

-If the type is "TPV"

The Thin Provisioning Pool (TPP) name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

-If the type is "FTV"

The Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP) name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

-If the type is not one of the types listed above

The RAID group name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

•Controlling CM

The controlling CM and the CPU of the volume are displayed.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5.1.7 Bad Sector

The bad sector information is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The volume number is displayed.

•Name

The volume name is displayed.

When the volume type is WSV or when the volume is concatenated by LUN concatenation, "Volume name

(n/m)" (n: nth volume in the concatenation order, m: number of concatenated volumes) is displayed.

Drives are not monitored for bad sectors when the drives configure the REC Disk Buffer.

•When data for rebuild, copyback, or redundant copy is not read normally, bad sector information is

recorded.

•When a system message that indicates the detection of bad sector is displayed in the [Overview] screen

or when a "Bad data" event is notified by Host Sense or an SNMP Trap, use this screen to check the

detected bad sector.

Use the [Setup Event Notification] function to specify whether to perform event notification when a bad

sector is detected. Refer to "11.2.9.1 Setup Event Notification" (page 880) for details. Note that the

deletion of bad sector can be performed by a maintenance engineer who has the "Maintenance

Operation" policy.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

•Type

The volume type is displayed.

-Standard

-WSV

-TPV

-FTV

-SDV

-SDPV

-Temporary

•Error LBA

The start position of the bad sector information in the volume is displayed using the Logical Block Address

(LBA).

-When bad sector information is detected in the TPV or the FTV: "-" (hyphen)

-When the "Error Type" is "Dispersion": "-" (hyphen)

•Error LBA Count

The number of LBAs from Error LBA of the bad sector information in the volume is displayed.

-When bad sector information is detected in the TPV or the FTV: "-" (hyphen)

-When the "Error Type" is "Dispersion": "-" (hyphen)

•Error Type

The number of bad sector information in the volume is displayed.

-When one bad sector information exists in the volume: "Contiguity"

-When multiple number of bad sector information exist in the volume: "Dispersion"

-For TPV or FTV, "Dispersion" is displayed regardless of the number of bad sector information.

5.1.8 Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

This function displays the information of balancing Thin Provisioning Volumes (TPVs).

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "5.1.12 Volume Detail (Balancing TPV)" (page 92) for display items.

•Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "5.1.12 Volume Detail (Balancing TPV)" (page 92) for display items.

•Status

The volume status is displayed. Refer to "B.2 Volume Status" (page 974) for detailed information of volume

status.

•Type

The volume type (fixed to "TPV") is displayed.

•Capacity

The total volume capacity is displayed.

•Balancing Level

The balancing level of the volume is displayed.

-When the volume is balanced: High

-When the volume is almost balanced: Middle

-When the volume is not balancing well: Low

-When the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is abnormal: "-" (hyphen)

•Process

A process that is being performed for the volume is displayed.

If multiple processes are being performed, the processes are separated with a ": (colon)" and displayed

using ("xx:yy"). "Encrypting", "Formatting", "Migrating", or "Balancing" is displayed as "xx". "Zero Reclaim-

ing" or "Reserved Zero Reclaim" is displayed as "yy".

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Balancing

TPV balancing is being performed

-Formatting

Formatting is being performed

-Migrating

RAID migration is being performed

-Zero Reclaiming

Zero Reclamation (*1) is being performed for a TPV or an FTV.

-Reserved Zero Reclaim

A TPV or an FTV is reserved for Zero Reclamation (*2).

*1: "Zero Reclamation" is a function that releases the allocated physical area when data in the physical area that

is allocated to a TPV or an FTV is filled with zeros.

*2: When "Start Zero Reclamation after migration" is enabled for RAID migration, the source volume will be

reserved for Zero Reclamation.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

•Balancing Process

When "Process" is not "Balancing", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Status

The status of TPV balancing is displayed.

•Active

Running normally

•Error

Stopped due to an error

-Progress

The progress of TPV balancing is displayed.

-Work Vol. No.

The volume number undergoing TPV balancing is displayed.

-Work Vol. Name

The volume name undergoing TPV balancing is displayed.

-Error Code

The error code of TPV balancing is displayed when an error occurs.

-Elapsed Time

The elapsed time of TPV balancing is displayed.

The displayed time is the elapsed time at the point when this screen is displayed.

Filter setting

5.1.9 Volume Detail (Basic)

The detail information of the volume is displayed.

Filter Description

Name Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Status Select the volume status that is to be displayed.

Balancing Level Select the volume type that is to be displayed.

Process Select which current process for the volume is to be displayed.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Status

The volume status is displayed.

When the volume status is normal, " Available" is displayed.

Refer to "B.2 Volume Status" (page 974) for detailed information of RAID group status.

•Capacity

The volume capacity is displayed.

•Used Capacity

The used capacity of volume is displayed.

This item is not displayed when the volume type is other than "TPV" or "FTV".

•RAID Group No.

The RAID group number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "WSV", the RAID group number to which the representative volume belongs is displayed.

This item is not displayed when the volume type is "TPV" or "FTV".

•RAID Group Name

The RAID group name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "WSV", the RAID group name to which the representative volume belongs is displayed.

This item is not displayed when the volume type is "TPV" or "FTV".

•Thin Provisioning Pool No.

The TPP number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

This item is not displayed when the volume type is other than "TPV".

•Thin Provisioning Pool Name

The TPP name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

This item is not displayed when the volume type is other than "TPV".

•FTRP No.

The FTRP name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

This item is not displayed when the volume type is other than "FTV".

•FTRP Name

The FTRP name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

This item is not displayed when the volume type is other than "FTV".

•Encryption

The encryption status is displayed.

-CM

The volume that is encrypted by CM.

-"-" (hyphen)

The volume that is not encrypted.

-SED

The volume that is encrypted by SED.

•Wide Stripe Size

The Wide Stripe Size is displayed.

"Wide Stripe Size" is the size of the WSV Unit that is allocated to each RAID group in series. A "-" (hyphen) is

displayed when the volume type is other than "WSV".

-Normal

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID type (*1). The maximum size is 16MB or smaller.

-Small

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID type (*1). The maximum size is 2MB or smaller.

Note that when the basic size for a RAID group is larger than 2MB, the basic size is specified.

*1: The basic size (stripe size) when creating a volume. Refer to "E.1 Basic Size for each RAID Group" (page 995)

for details.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

•Reserved Deletion

The "Reserved Deletion" status of the SDPV is displayed.

If the SDPV is currently being used, the target SDPV status is changed to "Reserved Deletion". A "-"

(hyphen) is displayed when the volume type is other than "SDPV". Refer to "5.2.11 Delete Snap Data Pool

Volume" (page 141) for details.

-Yes

SDPVs are in "Reserved Deletion" status.

-No

SDPVs are not in "Reserved Deletion" status.

•UID

The UID is displayed.

•Process

A process that is being performed for the volume is displayed.

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If multiple processes are being performed, the processes are separated with a ": (colon)" and displayed

using ("xx:yy"). "Encrypting", "Formatting", "Migrating", or "Balancing" is displayed as "xx". "Zero Reclaim-

ing" or "Reserved Zero Reclaim" is displayed as "yy".

-Encrypting

-Formatting

-Migrating

-Balancing

-Zero Reclaiming

-Reserved Zero Reclaim

•Progress

The progress of a process that is being performed for the volume is displayed.

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Zero Reclamation Progress

The progress of a Zero Reclamation (*1) process that is being performed for the volume is displayed.

When Zero Reclamation is not being executed, a "- " (hyphen) is displayed.

When the storage system status is "Not Ready", the field is blank.

*1: "Zero Reclamation" is a function that releases the allocated physical area when data in the physical area that is

allocated to a TPV or an FTV filled with zeros.

5.1.10 Volume Detail (Reservation)

The detailed information of reservation volume is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Host WWN/iSCSI Name

The WWN or the iSCSI name of the host that can access the volume is displayed.

•CA Port

The location information of the CA port that connects to the host is displayed.

-CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

•Reservation Key

The reservation key that is used for persistent reservation of the volume is displayed.

When no reservation keys exist, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

•Hold Reservation

Whether the target reservation key is used for persistent reservation is displayed.

When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status, "No" is displayed.

-Yes

In persistent reservation status

-No

Not in persistent reservation status

5.1.11 Volume Detail (Pinned Data)

The detailed information of pinned data is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•LBA

The location of the pinned data in the volume is displayed using the Logical Block Address (LBA).

•RC

The reason (Reason Code) that created the pinned data is displayed.

•SK

The Sense Key (SK) part is displayed from the sense information that is output when the pinned data is

created.

•ASC

Additional Sense Code (ASC) part is displayed from the sense information that is output when the pinned

data is created.

•ASCQ

Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ) part is displayed from the sense information that is output when

the pinned data is created.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Filter setting

5.1.12 Volume Detail (Balancing TPV)

The detailed information of TPV balancing is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The number of the RAID group that allocates the physical capacity to the target TPV is displayed.

•RAID Group

The name of the RAID group that allocates the physical capacity to the target TPV is displayed.

•Used Capacity

The capacity for each RAID group that allocates the physical capacity to the target TPV is displayed.

This is the capacity that is available when balancing of the target TPV is started.

Note that it is not the capacity after re-allocating the physical capacity in the relevant TPV to the RAID

groups in the TPP.

Filter Description

LBA Input the LBA that is to be displayed.

When not using the LBA for filtering, leave this item blank.

RC Input the RC that is to be displayed.

When not using the RC for filtering, leave this item blank.

SK Input the SK that is to be displayed.

When not using the SK for filtering, leave this item blank.

ASC Input the ASC that is to be displayed.

When not using the ASC for filtering, leave this item blank.

ASCQ Input the ASCQ that is to be displayed.

When not using the ASCQ for filtering, leave this item blank.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5.1.13 Volume Detail (LUN Concatenation)

The detailed information of LUN Concatenation is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Concatenation No.

The concatenation number of the volume is displayed.

•Capacity

The capacity of the volume that is concatenated to the target volume is displayed.

•RAID Group

The RAID group name in which the volume that is concatenated to the target volume belongs is displayed.

5.1.14 Volume Detail (WSV Concatenation)

The detailed information of WSV Concatenation is displayed.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.1 Volume Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Concatenation No.

The concatenation number of the WSV (the order for allocating WSV Units to RAID groups) is displayed

between 1 and 64.

•RAID Group Name

The RAID group name to which the concatenated WSV Unit belongs is displayed.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in

the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for Volume can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for Volume Display function

Create Volume •Volume (Basic Information)

Delete Volume

Rename Volume

Format Volume

Expand Volume

Expand Thin Provisioning Volume

Start RAID Migration

Stop RAID Migration

Start Zero Reclamation

Stop Zero Reclamation

Delete Snap Data Pool Volume

Force Delete Snap Data Pool Volume

Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Volume

Initialize Snap Data Volume

Encrypt Volume

Forbid Advanced Copy

Permit Advanced Copy

Modify Cache Parameters •Performance (Host I/O)

Export Cache Parameters

Export Performance Information

Release Reservation •Reservation

Start Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume •Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

Stop Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5.2.1 Create Volume

This function creates new volumes in the existing RAID group or Thin Provisioning Pool (TPP). Standard

volumes, Wide Striping Volumes (WSV), Thin Provisioning Volumes (TPV), Snap Data Volumes (SDV), and Snap

Data Pool Volumes (SDPV) can be created. Volumes are formatted automatically when they are created.

Standard, WSV, TPV, and SDV can be accessed from the host when host affinity is set after volume creation.

Note that SDPVs can be used after volume creation is complete and formatting is started.

•If a Thin Provisioning license is not registered, TPV cannot be created.

•If an Advanced Copy license is not registered, SDV and SDPV cannot be created. However, when using the

ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, a free license is registered by default and SDVs and SDPVs can be created.

•When encryption mode is disabled, volumes encrypted by CM cannot be created. Note that when SEDs

are not installed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, volumes encrypted by SEDs cannot be created.

•The following shows the maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model.

-ETERNUS DX80 S2: 2048

-ETERNUS DX90 S2: 4096

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 16384

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 16384

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 65535

•The following shows the maximum capacity of TPV that can be created for each model.

-ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2: 128TB

-ETERNUS DX410 S2: 384TB

-ETERNUS DX440 S2: 768TB

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 768TB

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 1024TB

•The following shows the conditions for creating SDPVs.

-The volume capacity must be 2TB or less

-The volume capacity must be a multiple of SDPE capacity (1GB/2GB/4GB).

•When creating an SDV, the capacity setting is not required. 24 (MB) + "Capacity of source volume (only

SDV)" × 0.1% of the copy source volume capacity is automatically secured in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system. "24MB" is the smallest volume capacity. "Capacity of source volume (only SDV)" × 0.1% is the

capacity that is used for the controlling information area in the SDV. When using SnapOPC or SnapOPC+,

make sure to create an SDV and SDPVs. An SDPV is a volume that configures an SDP. The SDP allocates

free space when SDV capacity is insufficient.

•The maximum number of volumes that can be created is reduced in the following conditions:

-When TPPs exist in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When concatenated volumes exist in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When REC Disk Buffers exist in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When volumes undergoing RAID migration exist

-When volumes undergoing balancing TPV exist

-When "Enable" is selected for the Flexible Tier function mode

•The following restrictions apply to WSVs:

-Volume capacity expansion is not available (LUN concatenation cannot be performed)

-RAID group capacity expansion for RAID groups which configure WSVs is not available (LDE cannot be

performed)

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

■When creating Standard, TPV, SDV, or SDPV type volumes

There are two methods to create a volume: automatic drive selection and manual drive selection.

When selecting "Automatic"

The procedure to create a volume by selecting drives automatically is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Create] in [Action].

2Select "Automatic" for "RAID Group/TPP Selection".

3Specify the volume detailed information, and click the [Create] button.

•Name

Specify the volume name. An existing volume name cannot be specified. When creating multiple

volumes at the same time, the new volumes are named automatically. Refer to "Naming

conventions for creating volumes" (page 993) for details.

The following input condition applies:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•If an area with the necessary capacity cannot be acquired from the free space available, use the LUN

Concatenation function to concatenate multiple space into a volume.

•Creating SDPVs in RAID groups with the same RAID type, drive type, number of drives is recommended.

•WSVs are volumes that are created by concatenating multiple RAID groups with striping. Use RAID

migration to add or reduce the number of concatenated RAID groups. The RAID migration function can

also be used to expand WSV capacity. Refer to "5.2.7 Start RAID Migration" (page 123) for details.

•This function cannot be used to create an ODX Buffer volume. Refer to "8.2.10 Create ODX Buffer Volume"

(page 311) for details.

•When manually selecting drives to create a volume (*1), the volume number can be specified. Note that

volumes have to be created one at a time. Multiple volumes cannot be created when specifying the

volume number for a new volume. When "Automatic" is selected to create a volume or when "Manual" is

selected but a volume number is not specified, the volume number is allocated when a volume is created

from the smallest unused decimal number in ascending order.

*1: Select "Manual" to create WSVs or to create TPVs, SDVs, SDPVs, or Standard type volumes by specifying the drives

manually. Refer to "When creating Standard, TPV, SDV, or SDPV type volumes" (page 97) or "When creating WSV

type volumes" (page 105) for details.

•When "Manual" is selected, the specified number of volumes by using the maximum free space that is

available in the RAID group can be created. Inputting the volume capacity is not required. "Standard",

"WSV", and "SDPV" type volumes can be created using the maximum free space.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

•Capacity

Specify the volume capacity and select the unit of capacity.

Up to a 15-digit number including the "." (decimal point) can be input. Note that when "MB" is

selected, the specified value is rounded down to the nearest whole number. When "GB" or "TB" is

selected, the specified value is converted to "MB" and rounded down to the nearest whole number.

The following input conditions apply:

-When creating Standard volumes or TPVs: 24MB - 128TB (numeric characters)

-When creating SDPVs: 1GB - 2TB (numeric characters)

-MB/GB/TB

•Type

Specify the volume type. When the [Create Volume] function is selected from the RAID group list,

"Standard", "Snap Data Volume", or "Snap Data Pool Volume" is displayed.

When the [Create Volume] function is selected from the Thin Provisioning Pool list, only "Thin

Provisioning" is displayed.

-Standard

Normal volumes that are created in the RAID group.

-Thin Provisioning

Volumes that are created in Thin Provisioning Pools.

-Snap Data Volume

Copy destination volumes for SnapOPC or SnapOPC+.

-Snap Data Pool Volume

Volumes that are used as expansion areas for SDV.

•Capacity of source volume (only SDV)

Specify the copy source volume capacity and select the unit of capacity. This item can only be

specified when "Snap Data Volume" is selected for "Type".

The following input conditions apply:

-24MB - 128TB

-MB/GB/TB

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers

can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

•When creating an SDV, the capacity setting is not required. 24 (MB) + "Capacity of source vol-

ume (only SDV)" × 0.1% of the copy source volume capacity is automatically secured in the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. When using SnapOPC or SnapOPC+, make sure to create an

SDV and SDPVs.

•When creating multiple volumes in a RAID group, the maximum number of volumes that can

be created for the user capacity may be reduced. To use the entire user capacity, the volume

size must be an exact multiple of the basic size (stripe size). Refer to "E.1 Basic Size for each

RAID Group" (page 995) for details.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

•Disk Type

Specify the drive type.

-Online

-Nearline

-SSD

-SED

•RAID Type

Select the RAID type. The specified volume type and disk type determine the selectable RAID types

that are displayed as options.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Key Group

When creating volumes in a RAID group that is registered in the key group (*1), select "Enable".

When creating volumes in a RAID group that is not registered in the key group, select "Disable".

This item is available only when "Disk Type" is "SED". Only the available setting (Enable or Disable)

is displayed as an option. When the "Disk Type" is not "SED", the field is blank.

*1: The key group combines all of the RAID groups that use the same SED authentication key.

•Number of Volumes

Specify the number of volumes to be created in decimal number.

•Encryption by CM

Select whether to encrypt (On) or not encrypt (Off) the new volumes. When the encryption mode is

disabled, "On" cannot be selected. When "Disk Type" is "SED", "On" cannot be selected.

-When the "Disk Type" is "SED":

Volumes are created in the RAID group or the TPP configured by SEDs.

-When the "Disk Type" is not "SED":

•When "On" is selected:

Volumes that are encrypted by CM are created. When creating a TPV, the volume is created in

the TPP that is encrypted by CM.

•When "Off" is selected:

Volumes that are not encrypted are created. When creating a TPV, the volume is created in

the TPP that is not encrypted.

When using the ETERNUS DX8700 S2, up to 1024 volumes can be created at once.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

100

→A confirmation screen appears.

4Click the [OK] button.

→Volume creation starts.

5Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When a name is not input for "Name"

•When the "Name" overlaps with an existing volume name

•When the "Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the capacity is not specified for "Capacity"

•When the capacity that is specified for "Capacity" exceeds the maximum capacity that can be

created

•When the SDPV capacity that is specified for "Capacity" is not a multiple of the SDPE capacity (1GB/

2GB/4GB)

•When the number of volumes that is specified for "Number of Volumes" exceeds the maximum

number of volumes that can be created

•When free space in the RAID group or TPP is insufficient

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

101

Manually selecting drives to create volumes

The procedure to create a volume by selecting drives manually is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Create] in [Action].

2Select "Manual" for "RAID Group/TPP Selection".

3Specify the detailed information of new volumes and select the RAID group or TPP in which

the volumes are to be created. Click the [Create] button.

•Name

Specify the volume name. An existing volume name cannot be specified. When creating multiple

volumes at the same time, the new volumes are named automatically. Refer to "Naming

conventions for creating volumes" (page 993) for details.

The following input condition applies:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Capacity

Specify the volume capacity and select the unit of capacity.

Up to a 15-digit number including the "." (decimal point) can be input. Note that when "MB" is

selected, the specified value is rounded down to the nearest whole number. When "GB" or "TB" is

selected, the specified value is converted to "MB" and rounded down to the nearest whole number.

The following input conditions apply:

-When creating Standard volumes or TPVs: 24MB - 128TB (numeric characters)

-When creating SDPVs: 1GB - 2TB (numeric characters)

-MB/GB/TB

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers

can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

•If "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected when creating volumes manually, inputting the

capacity is not required. The specified value and unit are not used.

•When creating an SDV, the capacity setting is not required. 24 (MB) + "Capacity of source vol-

ume (only SDV)" × 0.1% of the copy source volume capacity is automatically secured in the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. When using SnapOPC or SnapOPC+, make sure to create an

SDV and SDPVs.

•When creating multiple volumes in a RAID group, the maximum number of volumes that can

be created for the user capacity may be reduced. To use the entire user capacity, the volume

size must be an exact multiple of the basic size (stripe size). Refer to "E.1 Basic Size for each

RAID Group" (page 995) for details.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

102

•Type

Specify the volume type. When the [Create Volume] function is selected from the RAID group list,

"Standard", "Snap Data Volume", or "Snap Data Pool Volume" is displayed.

When the [Create Volume] function is selected from the Thin Provisioning Pool list, only "Thin

Provisioning" is displayed.

-Standard

Normal volumes that are created in the RAID group.

-Thin Provisioning

Volumes that are created in Thin Provisioning Pools.

-Snap Data Volume

Copy destination volumes for SnapOPC or SnapOPC+.

-Snap Data Pool Volume

Volumes that are used as expansion areas for SDV.

•Capacity of source volume (only SDV)

Specify the copy source volume capacity and select the unit of capacity. This item can only be

specified when "Snap Data Volume" is selected for "Type".

The following input conditions apply:

-24MB - 128TB

-MB/GB/TB

•Use all Largest Free Space

Select the "Enable" checkbox to create the specified number of volumes with the largest available

free space in the RAID group. This checkbox can be selected or cleared only when "Type" is "Stan-

dard" or "SDPV".

If "Enable" is selected, the specified number of volumes in the "Number of Volumes" field are cre-

ated in the free space that is displayed as "Largest Free Space" for each RAID group. If "Type" is "Stan-

dard", capacity is allocated almost evenly for the basic size (stripe size) of the RAID group. If "Type" is

"SDPV", a multiple of the SDPE capacity is allocated almost evenly for the basic size (stripe size) of

the RAID group.

•Volume No.

When specifying the volume number for a new volume, select the "Set Value" checkbox and input

the volume number.

The following input condition applies:

-Numeric characters (decimal)

-The following volume numbers can be used for each model:

•ETERNUS DX80 S2: 0 - 2047

•ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 - 4095

•ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 - 16383

•ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 16383

•ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 65534

•When "Enable" is selected, the capacity and the unit that are specified for "New Volume" are

not available.

•The capacity for created volumes is not displayed. Use the [Volume] screen to check the volume

capacity after volume creation is complete.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

103

•Encryption by CM

Select whether to encrypt (On) or not encrypt (Off) the new volumes. When the encryption mode is

disabled, "On" cannot be selected.

•Number of Volumes (When creating volumes other than "TPV")

Specify the number of volumes that is to be created in each RAID group between "1" and "128".

Click the [Recalculation of Max Count] button to display the maximum number of volumes that can

be created in each RAID group with the specified capacity. When the volume capacity is not speci-

fied (including when "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected), the maximum number of volumes

that can be created for each RAID group is displayed. When "Encryption by CM" is "On", volumes can-

not be created in the RAID groups for which "Disk Type" is "SED".

•Number of Volumes (When creating "TPV")

Specify the number of volumes that is to be created in each TPP between "1" and "16384".

→A confirmation screen appears.

An existing volume number cannot be specified.

When creating a volume (when specifying "1" or more for "Number of Volumes") in the RAID group

for which "Disk Type" is "SED", select "Off" for this item.

When volume numbers are manually specified, only one volume can be created at a time. Input

"1" for "Number of Volumes".

•When using the ETERNUS DX8700 S2, up to 1024 volumes can be created at a time.

•When volume numbers are manually specified, only one volume can be created at a time.

Input "1" for "Number of Volumes".

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

104

4Click the [OK] button.

→Volume creation starts.

•When specifying the volume number, select the "Set Value" checkbox and input the volume

number.

•When using the maximum free space in the RAID group to create volumes without specifying the

capacity, select the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space", and then input the number

of volumes. This setting is available for "Standard" and "SDPV" type volumes.

•When creating a "TPV", the "Encryption by CM" setting cannot be changed.

•An error screen appears in the following conditions:

-When a name is not input for "Name"

-When the "Name" overlaps with an existing volume name

-When the "Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

-When the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space" is cleared and "Capacity" is not

input

-When the capacity that is specified for "Capacity" exceeds the maximum capacity that can be

created

-When the SDPV capacity that is specified for "Capacity" is not a multiple of the SDPE capacity

(1GB/2GB/4GB)

-When the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected and the capacity of a

created volume is 23MB or less

-When the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected and the capacity of a

created volume exceeds the maximum capacity

-When the "Set Value" checkbox is selected and "Volume No." is not input

-When the input value of "Volume No." exceeds the settable range

-When the specified "Volume No." is already used

-When "Volume No." is specified and total number of values that are specified to "Number of

Volumes" is not "1"

-When the number of volumes that is specified for "Number of Volumes" exceeds the maximum

number of volumes that can be created

-When free space in the RAID group or TPP is insufficient

-When LDE is being performed in the RAID group

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

105

5Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

■When creating WSV type volumes

WSVs are created by concatenating volumes that are the same size in multiple RAID groups. Input the volume

information for WSVs and the selection information for RAID groups, and specify the RAID groups that are to

be concatenated.

The procedure to create WSV type volumes is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Create] in [Action].

2Input the detailed information of the volumes that are to be created, specify the selection

information of the RAID group, and then click the [Select RAID Groups] button.

●New Volume

•Name

Specify the volume name. An existing volume name cannot be specified. When creating multiple

volumes at the same time, the new volumes are named automatically. Refer to "Naming

conventions for creating volumes" (page 993) for details.

The following input condition applies:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•The conditions for RAID groups to configure WSVs are as follows:

-The RAID type must be the same

-The number of member drives in the RAID group must be the same

-The Stripe Depth value must be the same

-The disk type (Online/Nearline/SSD/SED) must be the same

(since the access performance of WSVs is reduced, do not select "Online/Nearline").

-The disk speed must be the same

(RAID groups configured with different speed drives can be selected. Note that this reduces the access

performance for WSVs. It is recommended to select the same speed disks. The speed of the drives that

configure a RAID group can be checked in the [RAID Group Detail] screen ([Disk] tab).)

-The key group setting is the same as the existing RAID groups

(When "Disk Type" is "SED", RAID groups with the key group setting enabled or disabled can be

selected. Selecting the same key group setting status is recommended. Not doing so reduces the

access performance for WSVs. The key group setting status can be checked with the "Encryption" field

in the [Select RAID Groups] screen.)

-The sequential unused area must be the same size or bigger than the capacity of the volumes that are

to be concatenated

•The number of concatenated RAID groups is from 2 to 64.

•The WSV capacity is from 24MB to 128TB.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

106

•Capacity

Specify the volume capacity and select the unit of capacity.

Up to a 15-digit number including the "." (decimal point) can be input. Note that when "MB" is

selected, the specified value is rounded down to the nearest whole number. When "GB" or "TB" is

selected, the specified value is converted to "MB" and rounded down to the nearest whole number.

The following input conditions apply:

-24MB - 128TB (numeric characters)

-MB/GB/TB

•Type

Select "Wide Striping Volume".

-Wide Striping Volume

Volumes that are configured by multiple RAID groups that are concatenated with striping to

improve performance.

•RAID Group/TPP Selection

"Manual" is selected.

●Volume Information

•Use all Largest Free Space

Select the "Enable" checkbox to create the specified number of WSVs with the largest available free

space in the selected RAID group.

WSVs are created by concatenating spaces with the same capacity in multiple RAID groups. If

"Enable" is selected, the specified number of WSVs in the "Number of Volumes" field are created

using the smallest "Largest Free Space" value in the concatenated RAID groups.

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers

can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

When creating multiple volumes in a RAID group, the maximum number of volumes that can be

created for the user capacity may be reduced. To use the entire user capacity, the volume size must

be an exact multiple of the basic size (stripe size). Refer to "E.1 Basic Size for each RAID Group"

(page 995) for details.

When "Wide Striping Volume" is specified for "Type", "Manual" is selected automatically. Note that

"Automatic" cannot be selected.

•When "Enable" is selected, the capacity and the unit that are specified for "New Volume" are

not available.

•The capacity for created WSVs is not displayed. Use the [Volume] screen to check the volume

capacity after volume creation is complete.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

107

•Number of Volumes

The number of volumes that are to be created is displayed. Note that "1" is displayed when "Manual"

is selected for "Concatenation Order".

•Volume No.

When specifying the volume number for a new volume, select the "Set Value" checkbox and input

the volume number.

The following input condition applies:

-Numeric characters (decimal)

-The following volume numbers can be used for each model:

•ETERNUS DX80 S2: 0 - 2047

•ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 - 4095

•ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 - 16383

•ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 16383

•ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 65534

•Wide Stripe Size

Select the Wide Stripe Size ("Normal" or "Small") for the volumes.

"Wide Stripe Size" is the size of the WSV Unit that is allocated to each RAID group in series. It is not

necessary to change the default setting (Normal) for normal use.

-Normal

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID type (*1). The maximum size is 16MB or

smaller.

The actual size varies according to the RAID group type, the number of member disks, and Stripe

Depth.

Select "Normal" to improve random write access performance.

-Small

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID type. The maximum size is 2MB or smaller.

The actual size varies according to the RAID group type, the number of member disks, and Stripe

Depth.

Note that because the segment size of the volume is small and many host accesses among

multiple RAID groups occur, the performance may be reduced according to the amount of host I/

*1: The basic size (stripe size) when creating a volume. Refer to "E.1 Basic Size for each RAID Group"

(page 995) for details.

When volume numbers are manually specified, only one volume can be created at a time. Input

"1" for "Number of Volumes".

An existing volume number cannot be specified.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

108

•Concatenation Order

Select the concatenation order of RAID groups from "Automatic" or "Manual". It is not necessary to

change the default setting (Automatic) for normal use.

-Automatic

Automatically specify the concatenation order of RAID groups.

If multiple WSVs are already registered, the next available RAID group that enables the

controlling CM allocation to be distributed evenly is selected as 1 for the concatenation order. If

multiple RAID groups satisfy this condition, the RAID group with the smallest RAID group

number is selected as 1 in the concatenation order. RAID groups are concatenated starting from

1 (first) in ascending order. The last RAID group is concatenated to the first RAID group.

Volumes that belong to a RAID group for which the concatenation order is 1 (first) are called

"representative volumes".

-Manual

Manually specify the concatenation order of the RAID group.

•Encryption by CM

Select whether to encrypt (On) or not encrypt (Off) the new volumes. When the encryption mode is

disabled, "On" cannot be selected.

●Select RAID Group Information

•Disk Type

Specify the drive type.

The installed drive determine the selectable disk types that are displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

-Online

-Nearline

-SSD

-SED

-Online/Nearline

-Blank

•If the basic size of the RAID group is 2MB or more, the basic size is specified for Wide Stripe Size

even when "Small" is selected.

•This function cannot be used to change the "Wide Stripe Size" setting after WSVs are created. To

change the "Wide Stripe Size" value, use the [RAID Migration] function. Refer to "5.2.7 Start

RAID Migration" (page 123) for details.

When specifying "SED" for "Disk Type", select "Off" for "Encryption by CM".

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

109

•RAID Type

Select the RAID type.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Number of Member Disks

Select the number of member disks in the RAID group.

The selectable number of member disks, which is determined by the specified RAID type, is

displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32

-High Capacity (RAID5)

3 - 16

-High Reliability (RAID6)

5 - 16

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

2 - 16

•Stripe Depth

Select the Stripe Depth of the RAID group.

The selectable Stripe Depth varies depending on the specified RAID type. Refer to "Available Stripe

Depth value" (page 180) for details.

If "Mirroring (RAID1)" is selected as the RAID type, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

-64 KB

-128 KB

-256 KB

-512 KB

-1024 KB

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

110

→The [Select RAID Groups] screen appears.

3Select the RAID group that is to be concatenated (multiple selections can be made) and click

the [OK] button.

•Checkbox to select RAID groups

Select the checkbox for the RAID group to be selected.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

•When specifying the volume number, select the "Set Value" checkbox and input the volume

number.

•When using the maximum free space in the selected RAID group to create WSVs without specifying

the capacity, select the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space", and then input the

number of WSVs.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

111

4After selecting RAID groups is complete, click the [Create] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

When "Disk Type" is "SED", setting the same "Encryption" settings (the setting status of the key group)

is recommended for all of the RAID groups that configure the WSV.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Name" is not input

•When the name overlaps with an existing volume name for "Name"

•When the "Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space" is cleared and "Capacity" is not input

•When the capacity that is specified for "Capacity" exceeds the maximum capacity that can be

created

•When the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected and the capacity of a

created WSV is 23MB or less

•When the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected and the capacity of a cre-

ated WSV exceeds the maximum capacity

•When the "Set Value" checkbox is selected and "Volume No." is not input

•When the input value of "Volume No." exceeds the settable range

•When the specified "Volume No." is already used

•When "Volume No." is specified and "Number of Volumes" is not "1"

•When the "Number of Concatenation RAID Groups" field is left blank, "1" is specified, or a value

that is "65" or more is specified

•When the maximum free space in the selected RAID group is smaller than the volume size that is

to be concatenated

•When LDE is being performed in the RAID group

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

112

5Click the [OK] button.

→Volume creation starts.

6Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.2 Delete Volume

This function deletes volumes.

Standard volumes, WSVs, TPVs, and SDVs can be deleted.

To change the concatenation order of the RAID groups, select "Manual" for "Concatenation Order" in

the Volume Information field. Click the [Concatenation Order] link to display the [Setting

Concatenation Order] screen. The concatenation order of the RAID groups can be changed in the

[Setting Concatenation Order] screen.

•When a volume is deleted, access to data in the target volume is not allowed.

•The following volumes cannot be deleted:

-Volumes that are registered in a LUN group

-Volumes that are mapped with applications other than GUI

-Volumes undergoing RAID migration

-A copy source volume or a copy destination volume of the Advanced Copy that is being executed

-Volumes undergoing TPV balancing (work volumes and target TPVs for balancing)

-Volumes undergoing FTRP balancing (work volumes)

-Volumes with a Storage Migration path

-An ODX Buffer volume for which Advanced Copy (ODX) is being performed

•By repeating creation and deletion of volumes, free space may be dispersed in the RAID group.

•Up to 128 volumes can be deleted at once.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

113

The procedure to delete a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete] in

[Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Deletion of a volume starts.

•When deleting SDPVs, refer to "5.2.11 Delete Snap Data Pool Volume" (page 141) or "5.2.12 Force Delete

Snap Data Pool Volume" (page 142).

•This function can be used to delete an ODX Buffer volume.

•When volumes are registered in LUN groups, or a message "The specified volumes have already been

mapped. They cannot be deleted." is displayed, use the following procedure to delete the volumes from

LUN groups.

(1)Check all the LUN groups in which volumes are registered in the [LUN Group] screen under the

[Volume] navigation.

(2)Select a LUN group in which the volume is registered in the [LUN Group] screen under the

[Connectivity] navigation, and then click [Modify LUN Group] in [Action].

(3)Delete "allocation information of host LUN and volume number" in the [Modify LUN Group] screen.

(4)When a volume is registered in multiple LUN groups, repeat Step (2) and Step (3).

(LUN groups in which a volume is registered can be checked with the [LUN Group] field in the

[Modify LUN Group] screen in Step (3).)

(5) If the location information of the port (CM#x CA#y Port#z) is displayed in the [LUN Group] field in

Step (1) or Step (3), the volume is mapped with applications other than GUI. Use the relevant

application to delete the volume from the port mapping information.

(6)Confirm that "LUN Group Count" is "0" in the [LUN Group] field under the [Volume] navigation.

(7)Use this function to delete volumes.

It is not necessary to delete a host affinity when deleting volumes with the host affinity setting from a

LUN group. If all of the volumes in a LUN group are not needed, delete the host affinity, and then click the

[Delete LUN Group] button to delete the LUN group with volumes in Step (2).

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

114

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.3 Rename Volume

This function changes the volume name.

The procedure to rename a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume to be renamed (multiple selections can be made) and click [Rename] in

[Action].

2Input the new volume "Name" and the "Start of Suffix" (only when multiple volumes are

selected), and click the [Rename] button.

•Name

Input a new volume name.

The following input condition applies:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Start of Suffix

Input the starting number of the suffix that is to be added to the new volume name. When

changing multiple volume names, the suffix number is added to the volume names with

consecutive numbers in ascending order starting with the entered number. Refer to "Naming

conventions for renaming volumes" (page 993) for details. When changing only one volume name,

the "Start of Suffix" field is not displayed.

The following input conditions apply:

-Numeric characters ("0" - "99999")

-Decimal number

-1 - 5 digits

When a TPV is deleted, the physical allocating capacity of the relevant TPV is formatted. The physical

allocating capacity is released after formatting is complete.

When using the ETERNUS DX8700 S2, up to 1024 volumes can be renamed at once.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

115

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→Renaming of the volume starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the volume name is not input

•When the "Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Name" overlaps with an existing volume name (when selecting a single volume)

•When the "Start of Suffix" is not input (when selecting multiple volumes)

•When the "Start of Suffix" does not satisfy the input conditions (when selecting multiple volumes)

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

116

5.2.4 Format Volume

This function formats the selected volume.

The data stored in the volume will be deleted by formatting.

The procedure to format a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume to be formatted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Format] in

[Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Formatting of a volume starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

•Formatting newly created volumes is not required since these volumes are formatted automatically.

•This function formats "Standard", "WSV", "SDV", "SDPV", "TPV", and "FTV" type volumes.

•When formatting a TPV, the physical allocating area that is used by the target TPV is released.

•This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

-When a RAID group diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When a disk diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

•The following volumes cannot be formatted:

-Volumes for which "Status" is " Broken", " Data Lost", or " Not Ready"

-Volumes undergoing RAID migration

-A copy source volume or a copy destination volume of an Advanced Copy (local/remote) that is being

performed

-Volumes registered in a RAID group undergoing Logical Device Expansion (LDE)

-An ODX Buffer volume for which Advanced Copy (ODX) is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

•Do not format the volumes with Storage Migration paths.

•When using the ETERNUS DX8700 S2, up to 1024 volumes can be formatted at a single operation.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

117

5.2.5 Expand Volume

This function concatenates a new volume to the selected volume by using the LUN Concatenation function to

expand the volume capacity that can be used from the server.

Volume expansion provides the following features:

•Volume capacity can be expanded by using the free space in an existing RAID group.

•Free space that is 1GB or more can be concatenated.

•A volume with a maximum capacity of 128TB can be created. (The maximum capacity of ODX Buffer

volume is 1TB.)

•Concatenation can be performed among multiple RAID groups.

•Any RAID type can be applied for a concatenation source volume and a concatenation destination volume.

Concatenation can be performed regardless of the RAID type for the concatenation source volume and the

concatenation destination volume.

•Data can be accessed from the host in the same way regardless of the concatenation status (before,

during, or after concatenation).

•When the number of volumes in a concatenated volume is 15 or less, volumes can be added to the existing

concatenated volume.

Requirements for concatenating a volume

•The "Type" is "Standard"

•The "Status" is not " Broken", " Data Lost", " Not Ready", or " Readying"

•The volume capacity is 1GB or larger

•When the concatenation source volume is a concatenated volume, the volume must satisfy the following

requirements:

-The number of volumes in the concatenated volume must be 15 or less

-The capacity of the concatenated volume must be less than 128TB

(If the concatenated volume is configured with an ODX Buffer volume, the volume must be less than

1TB)

•RAID migration is not being performed (the target volume is not used as a migration source or a migration

destination)

•There are no Advanced Copy sessions (local or remote) for which the copy range is "Totally" (*1)

•LDE is not being performed for the RAID group to which the target volume belongs

•Encryption is not being performed for the target volume

•A Storage Migration path is not created in the target volume

•The "Cache Page Capacity" must not be limited (*2)

*1: "Totally" is specified for the copy range in the following conditions:

•When performing a LUN to LUN copy session with the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopyManager Copy Control Module

(CCM)

•When performing a copy session with ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopyManager Adapter for VMware Site Recovery

Manager

•When performing a copy session with ETERNUS VSS Hardware Provider

•When performing a SnapOPC+ session that is specified with GUI or CLI

*2: A "-" (hyphen) is specified for "Cache Page Capacity" by using the procedure in "5.2.18 Modify Cache Parameters"

(page 148). Note that "-" (hyphen) is the default value.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

118

Requirements to obtain free space from RAID groups

•The "Status" is not " Broken"

•The RAID group must satisfy the following requirements:

-The RAID group must contain Standard type volumes, WSVs, SDVs, or SDPVs

If this is not the case, the RAID group must not contain any volumes

-The RAID group must not belong to a TPP

-The RAID group must not belong to an FTRP

-The RAID group must not be registered as an REC Disk Buffer

•The number of volumes registered in the target RAID group is 127 or less

•The free space for the RAID group is 1GB or larger

•The RAID group must not be blocked

•LDE is not being performed in the target RAID group

•When the disk type of the RAID group to which the concatenation source volume belongs is "SSD", the

concatenation destination RAID group must be configured with "SSD"

•When the disk type of the RAID group to which the concatenation source volume belongs is "SED", the

concatenation destination RAID group must be configured with "SED"

•Backing up the data before performing volume expansion is recommended.

•This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

-When the maximum number of volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When switching firmware in hot mode in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When a RAID group diagnosis or a disk diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system

•Expanded volume capacity must be recognized by server.

•The same RAID type and drive speed is recommended for the RAID group to which the concatenation

volume belongs and the RAID group after concatenation.

•The encryption status of volumes after concatenation is the same as the concatenation source volume.

•Concatenated volumes are formatted automatically. Refer to the [Volumes] screen for format progress.

•To expand the TPV capacity, refer to "5.2.6 Expand Thin Provisioning Volume" (page 121).

•Volume expansion (LUN concatenation) can be performed even when the concatenation source volume

is being formatted.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

119

The procedure to expand volume capacity is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume to be expanded and click [Expand Volume] in [Action].

2Click the [Add] button.

→The [Add Capacity] screen is displayed.

3Select the RAID group to obtain the free space from, specify the capacity to be concatenated,

and click the [OK] button.

•Capacity

Input the capacity that is to be concatenated and select the units of capacity (MB/GB/TB).

Up to a 15-digit number including the "." (decimal point) can be input. Note that when "MB" is

selected, the specified value is rounded down to the nearest whole number. When "GB" or "TB" is

selected, the specified value is converted to "MB" and rounded down to the nearest whole number.

•Select RAID Group

Select the radio button of the RAID group to obtain free space from.

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers

can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

When "Disk Type" is "SED", selecting a RAID group with the same key group setting (Enabled Key

Group/Disabled Key Group) as the RAID group to which the concatenation source volume belongs

is recommended.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

120

→Returns to the [Expand Volume] screen.

4Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 to select RAID groups and specify the capacity. After completing

these settings, click the [Expand] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

5Click the [OK] button.

→Expansion of a volume starts.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

121

6Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.6 Expand Thin Provisioning Volume

This function expands the capacity of Thin Provisioning Volumes.

Requirements for expanding a TPV

•The capacity is not 128TB or more (for ODX Buffer volumes, the capacity must not be 1TB or more)

•There are no Advanced Copy sessions for which the copy range is "Totally" (*1)

*1: "Totally" is specified for the copy range in the following conditions:

•When performing a LUN to LUN copy session with the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopyManager Copy Control Module

(CCM)

•When performing a copy session with ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopyManager Adapter for VMware Site Recovery

Manager

•When performing a copy session with ETERNUS VSS Hardware Provider

•When performing a SnapOPC+ session that is specified with GUI or CLI

•Balancing is not being performed in the TPV

•RAID migration is not being performed in the TPV

•A Storage Migration path is not created in the TPV

The maximum capacity of Thin Provisioning Pool for each model

Model Maximum TPP Capacity (TB)

ETERNUS DX80 S2 128

ETERNUS DX90 S2 128

ETERNUS DX410 S2 384

ETERNUS DX440 S2 768

ETERNUS DX8100 S2 768

ETERNUS DX8700 S2 1024

•This function cannot be performed when there are no TPVs in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•The total capacity of TPVs must be smaller than the maximum capacity of TPP.

•The ODX Buffer volume capacity must not exceed 1TB.

•This function cannot be performed when there is no free space for expansion in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system.

•Expanded TPV capacity must be recognized by server.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

122

The procedure to expand Thin Provisioning Volume capacity is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPV to be expanded and click [Expand TPV] in [Action].

2Input the TPV capacity after expansion, and click the [Expand] button.

•Volume Capacity after expand

Input the TPV capacity after expansion and select the units of capacity (MB/GB/TB).

Up to a 15-digit number including the "." (decimal point) can be input. Note that when "MB" is

selected, the specified value is rounded down to the nearest whole number. When "GB" or "TB" is

selected, the specified value is converted to "MB" and rounded down to the nearest whole number.

The following input conditions apply:

-25MB - 128TB (for volumes other than ODX)

-1025MB - 1TB (for ODX Buffer volumes)

-Capacity after expansion must be larger than the current capacity

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→Expansion of a TPV starts.

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers

can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

123

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.7 Start RAID Migration

RAID migration (hereinafter also referred to as migration) moves an existing volume in a RAID group, TPP, or

FTRP to a free space in another RAID group, TPP, or FTRP. After migration is complete, the migration source

volume is automatically deleted. This function can also be used to change the number of concatenations for

Wide Striping Volumes (WSV).

Migration provides the following features:

•Load balancing of host access.

•Volume capacity expansion is available when migrating volumes. (only when the volume type is

"Standard" or "WSV")

•The RAID type of the volume can be changed.

•The number of concatenations for WSVs can be increased or reduced.

•The Wide Stripe Size for WSVs can be changed.

•Because creation and format of new volumes and host interface establishment are automatically

performed, users are allowed to access the data anytime without being affected by the migration.

Migration type

The combinations of volume types that can be migrated are as follows:

Available: Migration is available

N/A: Migration is not available

*1: When migration from "Standard" or "WSV" to "TPV" or "FTV" is performed, 100% of the logical capacity of the "Stan-

dard" or "WSV" is allocated as the physical capacity for the "TPV" or "FTV". When "Start Zero Reclamation after migra-

tion" is enabled, the physical area that is filled with zeros can be released after the migration is complete.

*2: When migration from "TPV" or "FTV" to "Standard" or "WSV" is performed, 100% of the logical capacity of the "TPV" or

"FTV" is allocated as the logical capacity for "Standard" or "WSV".

Migration source

volume

Migration destination volume

Standard

(LUN

Concatenation)

WSV TPV FTV

Standard Available N/A Available Available (*1) Available (*1)

Standard

(LUN Concatenation)

Available N/A Available Available (*1) Available (*1)

WSV Available N/A Available Available (*1) Available (*1)

TPV Available (*2) N/A Available (*2) Available Available

FTV Available (*2) N/A Available (*2) Available Available

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

124

Combinations of Volume Types for which Capacity Expansion is Available

The combinations of volume types for which capacity expansion can be performed are shown in the following

table.

Available: Capacity expansion is available

N/A: Capacity expansion is not available

–: Migration is not available

Combinations of Encryption Conditions for which Migration is Available

The combinations of encryption conditions for which migration can be performed are shown in the following

table.

Available: Migration is available

N/A: Migration is not available

*1: When the encryption mode is disabled, "by CM" cannot be selected.

*2: SEDs that are managed by the common key (the RAID groups are not registered in the key group).

*3: SEDs for which the SED authentication key is managed by the key server (the RAID groups are registered in the key

group). In this case, only RAID groups can be selected as the migration destination. Note that TPPs and FTRPs cannot

be selected.

*4: If a user without the "Security Setting" policy logs into GUI, migration to reduce the security level cannot be

performed.

Migration source

volume

Migration destination volume

Standard

(LUN

Concatenation)

WSV TPV FTV

Standard Available – Available N/A N/A

Standard

(LUN Concatenation)

Available – Available N/A N/A

WSV Available – Available N/A N/A

TPV N/A – N/A N/A N/A

FTV N/A – N/A N/A N/A

Security

priority

Encryption setting for the

migration source volume

Encryption setting for the migration destination volume

None by CM (*1) use SED (Disabled Key

Group) (*2)

use SED (Enabled Key

Group) (*3)

Yes None Available Available Available Available

by CM Available Available Available Available

use SED

(Disabled Key Group)

Available Available Available Available

use SED

(Enabled Key Group)

Available Available Available Available

No (*4) None Available Available Available Available

by CM N/A Available Available Available

use SED

(Disabled Key Group)

N/A Available Available Available

use SED

(Enabled Key Group)

N/A N/A N/A Available

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

125

Requirements for a migration source volume:

•The "Type" is "Standard", "WSV", "TPV", or "FTV"

•The "Status" is not " Broken"

•Formatting is not being performed (only when the volume type is "Standard" or "WSV")

•Migration is not being performed (the target volume is not used as a migration source or a migration

destination)

•TPV balancing is not being performed

•FTRP balancing is not being performed (*1)

•LDE is not being performed for the RAID group to which the target volume belongs

•Encryption is not being performed for the target volume

•A Storage Migration path is not created in the target volume

*1: When the FTRP balancing is performed, the FTV balancing process starts in the FTSP. Refer to "7.2.12 Start Balancing

Flexible Tier Pool" (page 248) for details.

Requirements for a migration destination RAID group:

•The maximum number of volumes are not set in the destination RAID group

Migration creates new volumes. The maximum number of volumes that can be created depends on the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system model.

•"Standard", "WSV", "Snap Data Volume (SDV)", or "Snap Data Pool Volume (SDPV)" is registered in the RAID

group or the RAID group is not being used

•The "Status" of the RAID group is " Available"

•The free space of the RAID group is more than the capacity of the migration source volume (*1)

•The RAID group does not belong to a TPP

•The RAID group does not belong to an FTRP

•The RAID group is not registered as an REC Disk Buffer

•The RAID group is not blocked

•The free space of the RAID group is more than the capacity of the migration source volume (*1)

•The RAID group is not the same RAID group as the RAID group to which the migration source volume

belongs

•LDE is not being performed in the target RAID group

*1: When the migration source is a TPV or an FTV, the capacity of the migration source volume indicates the logical

capacity of the TPV or the FTV.

Model per RAID group per ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system

ETERNUS DX80 S2

Up to 128

Up to 2048

ETERNUS DX90 S2 Up to 4096

ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 Up to 16384

ETERNUS DX8100 S2 Up to 16384

ETERNUS DX8700 S2 Up to 65535

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

126

Requirements for RAID groups that configure a migration destination WSV

•"Standard", "WSV", "SDV", or "SDPV" is registered in the RAID group or the RAID group is not being used

•The "Status" of the RAID group is " Available"

•The maximum number of volumes are not created in the RAID group (*1)

•The RAID group does not belong to a TPP

•The RAID group does not belong to an FTRP

•The RAID group is not registered as an REC Disk Buffer

•The RAID group is not blocked

•LDE is not being performed in the target RAID group

•When using existing RAID groups (RAID groups configure the migration source WSV) to increase the

number of concatenations, the RAID groups that are added must satisfy the following conditions:

-The RAID group is the same RAID type as the existing RAID groups

-The number of member drives in the RAID group is the same as the existing RAID groups

-The Stripe Depth value is the same as the existing RAID groups

-The disk type is the same as the existing RAID groups

-The disk speed is the same as the existing RAID groups (recommended)

-The key group setting is the same as the existing RAID groups (recommended)

•When using existing RAID groups to increase the number of concatenations, all of the RAID groups,

including the existing RAID groups, must have sequential free capacity to migrate volumes (*2)

•When reducing the number of concatenations, all of the RAID groups that configure a WSV must have

sequential free capacity to migrate volumes (*2)

•The number of concatenations for RAID group must be 2 - 64

*1: When the migration destination is a WSV, one volume for each RAID group that configures striping is required (the

same number of volumes as the number of RAID groups in total).

*2: Because the volume (a part of the WSV that is striped by each RAID group) is moved into the free area in the same

RAID group when migration is performed, another sequential free area is required as a migration destination in

addition to the currently used area in the RAID group.

Requirements for a migration destination TPP:

•The "Status" is " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

•The capacity of the TPP is more than the capacity of the migration source volume (*1)

•The capacity of the migration source volume is less than the maximum TPP capacity (*2) for each model

•The TPP is not the same as the TPP to which the migration source volume belongs

*1: When the migration source is a TPV or an FTV, the capacity indicates used capacity (the physical capacity that is

allocated from a TPP or an FTRP).

*2: The maximum TPP capacity is the total sum of the TPP capacity and the FTRP capacity in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system. Refer to "7.2.1 Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 219) for details.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

127

Requirements for a migration destination FTRP:

•The "Status" is " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

•The capacity of the FTRP is more than the capacity of the migration source volume (*1)

•The capacity of the migration source volume is less than the maximum TPP capacity (*2) for each model

•The FTRP is not the same as the FTRP to which the migration source volume belongs

*1: When the migration source is a TPV or an FTV, the capacity indicates used capacity (the physical capacity that is

allocated from a TPP or an FTRP).

*2: The maximum TPP capacity is the total sum of the TPP capacity and the FTRP capacity in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system. Refer to "7.2.1 Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 219) for details.

•Migration cannot be performed under the following conditions:

-When the maximum number of volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When a RAID group diagnosis or a disk diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system

-When the RAID group to which the migration source volume belongs is blocked or failed

-When Advanced Copy is being performed by specifying the whole volume in the migration source

volume and the settings for the volume capacity that is to be expanded are performed before and

after migration

-When the total number of migration, TPV balancing, and FTRP balancing (*1) processes that are

running in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system exceed 32

-When the total capacity of the migration, TPV balancing, and FTRP balancing (*1) processes that are

running in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system exceeds 128TB

*1: When the FTRP balancing is performed, the FTV balancing process starts in the FTSP. Refer to "7.2.12 Start

Balancing Flexible Tier Pool" (page 248) for details.

•A volume cannot be expanded when the type of migration source volume is "TPV" or the type of migration

destination is "TPP".

•A volume cannot be expanded when the type of migration source volume is "FTV" or the type of migration

destination is "FTRP".

•Even if the volume type is "Standard", the maximum ODX Buffer volume capacity is 1TB.

•A migration source volume and a migration destination volume that are undergoing migration cannot be

deleted.

•When performing migration for volumes for which "Cache Page Capacity" is changed using the procedure

in "5.2.18 Modify Cache Parameters" (page 148), the "Cache Page Capacity" setting is reset to the initial

value (unlimited).

•When the destination volume capacity is expanded by migration, the expanded volume capacity must be

recognized by the server after migration. Refer to the manuals of each OS or file system for information

about server operation.

•When " Attention" or " Warning" is displayed in the "Used Status" field for the migration destination

TPP after migration, the used capacity of the relevant TPP is exceeding the threshold. In this case, expand

TPP capacity by using the procedure in "7.2.4 Expand Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 231). Refer to "7.1.1

Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 200) for TPP usage.

•When " Attention" or " Warning" is displayed in the "Used Status" field for the migration destination

FTRP after migration, the used capacity of the relevant FTRP is exceeding the threshold. Use ETERNUS SF

Storage Cruiser to expand the capacity of the appropriate FTSP (for which expansion is determined to be

necessary based upon the performance and usage). Refer to "7.1.5 Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)"

(page 207) for FTRP usage.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

128

■When the migration destination volume type is "Standard", "TPV", or "FTV"

The procedure to start a migration is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume that to be migrated and click [Start RAID Migration] in [Action].

2Select "RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool / Flexible Tier Pool" for "Destination Migration".

Set the volume information after migration, select the destination RAID group, the TPP, or

the FTRP, and then click the [Start] button.

•Volume Capacity

The capacity of the migration source volume is displayed as the initial state.

When expanding the volume capacity after migration, specify the volume capacity and select the

unit of capacity (MB/GB/TB).

Up to a 15-digit number including the "." (decimal point) can be input. Note that when "MB" is

selected, the specified value is rounded down to the nearest whole number. When "GB" or "TB" is

selected, the specified value is converted to "MB" and rounded down to the nearest whole number.

•Progress of migration can be checked on the [Volume Detail] screen (Basic). Refer to "5.1.9 Volume Detail

(Basic)" (page 88) for details.

•If the migration source and migration destination are both "WSV", not only can the migration of a WSV to

other multiple RAID groups be performed, but also the number of concatenations for the existing RAID

group can be changed.

•When Zero Reclamation is reserved after migrating from "Standard" to "TPV" or from "Standard" to "FTV",

the physical area that is filled with zeros is released and the Thin Provisioning function can be used

efficiently. For volumes that are reserved for Zero Reclamation, "Reserved Zero Reclaim" is displayed in

the "Process" field on the [Volume] screen. When Zero Reclamation is performed after the migration is

complete, the progress of Zero Reclamation can be checked with "Zero Reclamation Progress" on the

[Volume Detail] screen (Basic). Refer to "5.1.9 Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 88) for details.

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers

can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

Volume capacity cannot be expanded in the following conditions:

•When "TPV" or "FTV" is selected as the migration source volume

•When "Thin Provisioning Pool" or "Flexible Tier Pool" is selected as the migration destination

Migration source volume capacity ≤Volume capacity ≤The maximum free capacity in the

migration destination

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

129

•FTSP Priority

Select either "Auto" or the FTSP number that belongs to the migration destination FTRP for the FTSP

number to which priority is given.

When FTRP is not selected from the migration destination list, only "Auto" is displayed as the

available option. If FTRP is specified, "Auto" and the FTSP numbers that belong to the migration

destination FTRP are displayed. If "FTSP number" is selected and the specified FTRP is changed, the

"FTSP Priority" setting returns to the default value ("Auto").

"FTSP Priority" indicates the FTSP number to which priority is given for allocating physical capacity as

the volume migration destination when multiple FTSPs exists in the migration destination FTRP.

When "Auto" is selected, the physical area is allocated to an FTSP for which the disk type is "Online".

If no free space exists in "Online" type disks and migration is not available, the physical area is

allocated to an FTSP for which the disk type is "Nearline". If "Nearline" is also not available for

migration, the physical area is allocated to an FTSP for which the disk type is "SSD". Migration to an

FTRP cannot be performed if "SSD" is not available for migration. "SED" type FTSPs are used as

"Online" type FTSPs.

When "FTSP number" is selected, the physical area is allocated to the selected FTSP. If there is no

free space in the selected FTSP and migration is not available, the migration destination FTSP

number is determined as having the same priority ("Online" → "Nearline" → "SSD") as when "Auto"

is selected.

The disk type for FTSPs can be checked from the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail] screen (Flexible Tier Sub

Pool). Refer to "7.1.8 Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)" (page 214) for details.

•Encryption

The encryption status of the migration source volume is displayed as the initial state.

Select the encryption status of the volume after migration. There are no limitations for the encryp-

tion status of migration source and destination volumes. Note that when migrating an encrypted

volume to an unencrypted volume, the user must have the "Security Setting" policy.

Refer to "Combinations of Encryption Conditions for which Migration is Available" (page 124) for

details.

-None

-by CM

-use SED (Disabled Key Group)

-use SED (Enabled Key Group)

•Start Zero Reclamation after migration

Select "Enable" or "Disable" for the Zero Reclamation of source volumes after migration is complete.

When Zero Reclamation after migration is enabled, the source volume will be reserved for Zero

Reclamation.

"Zero Reclamation" is a function that releases the allocated physical area when data in the physical

area that is allocated to a TPV or an FTV is filled with zeros.

This item is available only when the migration destination is "Thin Provisioning Pool" or "Flexible

Tier Pool".

•When "use SED (Disabled Key Group)" or "use SED (Enabled Key Group)" is selected for

"Encryption", use an SED for the migration destination.

•When "None" or "by CM" is selected for "Encryption", do not use SEDs for the migration

destination. Use other type of disks.

•When the encryption mode is disabled, "by CM" cannot be selected.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

130

•Select Destination Migration

Specify the destination RAID group, the TPP, or the FTRP with the radio button. The RAID groups,

TPPs, or FTRPs that can be used for migration are displayed (this is determined by the volume

capacity and the encryption status).

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→Migration starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

•If the migration source is an ODX Buffer volume, select "RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool /

Flexible Tier Pool" for "Destination Migration".

•An error screen appears in the following conditions:

-When the "Volume Capacity" is not input

-When "Volume Capacity" does not satisfy the input conditions

-When "Enable" is selected for "Start Zero Reclamation after migration" while Zero Reclamation

is being performed in a migration source volume

-When the migration source is an ODX Buffer volume and "Enable" is selected for "Start Zero

Reclamation after migration"

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

131

■When the migration destination volume is "WSV"

The procedure to start a migration is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume that to be migrated and click [Start RAID Migration] in [Action].

When changing the number of concatenations for a WSV, check "Wide Stripe Size" for the WSV, the

specifications of the existing RAID groups (RAID type, Stripe Depth, disk type, disk speed, and number of

member drives), and the name of all the concatenated RAID groups. The following describes how to check

the specifications.

(1)Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link of the migration source WSV in the volume list.

(2)A detailed information screen for the WSV is displayed. Check "Wide Stripe Size" in the [Basic] tab

screen.

(3)Click the [WSV Concatenation] tab to display the concatenation information of the WSV. Check "RAID

Group Name" and "Concatenation Order" that are configured for the WSV.

(4) Filter the RAID group list by the RAID group name that configures a WSV, and then click the [No.]

link or the [Name] link of the RAID group. Any RAID group can be specified because the RAID groups

in the WSV have the same specifications.

(5)A detailed information screen for the RAID group is displayed. Check "RAID Type" and "Wide Stripe

Size" in the [Basic] tab screen.

(6)Click the [Disk] tab to display the information of the drives that are configured for the RAID group.

Check "Disk Type", "Speed", and "Number of Member Disks". For "Number of Member Disks", use the

displayed number of drives.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

132

2Select "Wide Striping Volume" for "Destination Migration". Input the volume capacity, the

encryption status, the detailed information of volumes, and the selection information for

the RAID groups, and click the [Select RAID Groups] button.

●Setting Volume

•Volume Capacity

The capacity of the migration source volume is displayed as the initial state.

When expanding the volume capacity after migration, enter the volume capacity and select the unit

of capacity (MB/GB/TB).

Up to a 15-digit number including the "." (decimal point) can be input. Note that when "MB" is

selected, the specified value is rounded down to the nearest whole number. When "GB" or "TB" is

selected, the specified value is converted to "MB" and rounded down to the nearest whole number.

•Encryption

The encryption status of the migration source volume is displayed as the initial state.

Select the encryption status of the volume after migration. There are no limitations for the encryp-

tion status of migration source and destination volumes. Note that when migrating an encrypted

volume to an unencrypted volume, the user must have the "Security Setting" policy. Refer to

"Combinations of Encryption Conditions for which Migration is Available" (page 124) for details.

-None

-by CM

-use SED (Disabled Key Group)

-use SED (Enabled Key Group)

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers

can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

When "TPV" or "FTV" is selected as the migration source volume, volume expansion is not

available.

Migration source volume capacity ≤Volume capacity

•When "use SED (Disabled Key Group)" or "use SED (Enabled Key Group)" is selected for

"Encryption", use an SED for the migration destination.

•When "None" or "by CM" is selected for "Encryption", do not use SEDs for the migration

destination. Use other type of disks.

•When the encryption mode is disabled, "by CM" cannot be selected.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

133

●Wide Striping Volume Setting

WSVs are created by concatenating volumes that are the same size in multiple RAID groups. Input

the volume information for the migration destination WSV and the selection information for the

RAID groups, and then specify the RAID groups that are to be concatenated.

●Volume Information

Input the volume information of the migration destination WSV.

•Wide Stripe Size

Select the Wide Stripe Size ("Normal" or "Small") for the volumes.

"Wide Stripe Size" is the size of the WSV Unit that is allocated to each RAID group in series. It is not

necessary to change the default setting (Normal) for normal use.

-Normal

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID group (*1). The maximum size is 16MB or

smaller.

The actual size varies according to the RAID group type, the number of member disks, and Stripe

Depth.

Select "Normal" to improve random write access performance.

-Small

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID group. The maximum size is 2MB or smaller.

The actual size varies according to the RAID group type, the number of member disks, and Stripe

Depth.

Note that because the segment size of the volume is small and many host accesses among

multiple RAID groups occur, the performance may be reduced.

•The conditions for RAID groups to configure WSVs are as follows:

-The RAID type must be the same

-The number of member drives in the RAID group must be the same

-The Stripe Depth value must be the same

-The disk type (Online/Nearline/SSD/SED) must be the same

(since the access performance of WSVs is reduced, do not select "Online/Nearline".)

-The disk speed must be the same

(RAID groups configured with different speed drives can be selected. Note that this reduces

the access performance for WSVs. It is recommended to select the same speed disks. The

speed of the drives that configure a RAID group can be checked in the [RAID Group Detail]

screen ([Disk] tab).)

-The key group setting is the same as the existing RAID groups

(When "Disk Type" is "SED", RAID groups with the key group setting enabled or disabled can

be selected. Selecting the same key group setting status is recommended. Not doing so

reduces the access performance for WSVs. The key group setting status can be checked with

the "Encryption" field in the [Select RAID Groups] screen.)

-The sequential unused area must be the same size or bigger than the capacity of the

volumes that are to be concatenated

•The number of concatenated RAID groups is from 2 to 64.

•The WSV capacity is from 24MB to 128TB.

•When changing the number of concatenations for a WSV, specifying the existing RAID groups is

required. For the details, refer to "Remarks" in "When the migration destination volume is

"WSV"" (page 131).

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

134

*1: The basic size (stripe size) when creating a volume. Refer to "E.1 Basic Size for each RAID Group" (page

995) for details.

•Concatenation Order

Select the concatenation order of RAID groups from "Automatic" or "Manual". It is not necessary to

change the default setting (Automatic) for normal use.

-Automatic

Automatically specify the concatenation order of RAID groups.

If multiple WSVs are already registered, the next available RAID group that enables the

controlling CM allocation to be distributed evenly is selected as [1] for the concatenation order.

If multiple RAID groups satisfy this condition, the RAID group with the smallest RAID group

number is selected as [1] in the concatenation order. RAID groups are concatenated starting

from [1] (first) in ascending order. The last RAID group is concatenated to the first RAID group.

Volumes that belong to the RAID group that is first in the concatenation order are called

"representative volumes".

-Manual

Manually specify the concatenation order of the RAID group.

●Select RAID Group Information

Input information for the RAID group that configures the migration destination WSV.

•If the basic size of the RAID group is 2MB or more, the basic size is specified for Wide Stripe Size

even when "Small" is selected.

•When changing the number of concatenations for a WSV, select the same "Wide Stripe Size" as

the migration source WSV. Refer to "When the migration destination volume is "WSV"" (page

131) for procedure to check "Wide Stripe Size" for the destination source WSV.

"Wide Stripe Size" for an existing WSV can be changed by using the migration function.

When changing the number of concatenations for a WSV, specify the same concatenation order

as the migration source WSV. Refer to "Remarks" in "When the migration destination volume is

"WSV"" (page 131) for the procedure to check the concatenation order of migration source

WSVs. When "Manual" is selected for "Concatenation Order", the concatenation order can be

changed. It is not necessary to change the default setting (Automatic) if the concatenation

order after migration can be changed.

When changing the number of concatenations for a WSV, select the same "Disk Type", "RAID Type",

"Number of Member Disks", and "Stripe Depth" as the migration source WSV. Refer to "Remarks" in

"When the migration destination volume is "WSV"" (page 131) for the procedure to check the

specifications of an existing RAID group.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

135

•Disk Type

Specify the drive type.

The installed drive determine the selectable disk types that are displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

-Online

-Nearline

-SSD

-SED

-Online/Nearline

•RAID Type

Select the RAID type.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Number of Member Disks

Select the number of member disks in the RAID group.

The selectable number of member disks, which is determined by the specified RAID type, is

displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32

-High Capacity (RAID5)

3 - 16

-High Reliability (RAID6)

5 - 16

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

2 - 16

•Stripe Depth

Select the Stripe Depth of the RAID group.

The selectable Stripe Depth varies depending on the specified RAID type. Refer to "Available Stripe

Depth value" (page 180) for details.

If "Mirroring (RAID1)" is selected as the RAID type, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

-64 KB

-128 KB

-256 KB

-512 KB

-1024 KB

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

136

→The [Select RAID Groups screen] screen appears.

3Select the RAID group that is to be concatenated (multiple selections can be made) and click

the [OK] button.

•Select RAID Groups

Select the checkbox for the RAID group that is to be concatenated.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

•When increasing the number of concatenations for a WSV, select all of the existing RAID groups for

concatenation and the new RAID groups. When reducing the number of concatenations for a WSV,

select the RAID groups that will remain for concatenation from the existing RAID group list. For the

details, refer to "Remarks" in "When the migration destination volume is "WSV"" (page 131).

•When "Disk Type" is "SED", setting the same "Encryption" settings (the setting status of the key

group) is recommended for all of the RAID groups that configure the WSV.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

137

4After selecting RAID groups is complete, click the [Start] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

5Click the [OK] button.

→Migration starts.

6Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

In the following cases, an error screen appears:

•When the capacity is not specified for "Volume Capacity"

•When "Volume Capacity" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Number of Concatenation RAID Groups" field is left blank, "1" is specified, or a value

that is "65" or more is specified

•When the maximum free space in the selected RAID group is smaller than the volume size that is

to be concatenated

•When an ODX Buffer volume is selected as a migration source volume

To change the concatenation order of the RAID groups, select "Manual" for "Concatenation Order" in

the Volume Information field. Click the [Concatenation Order] link to display the [Setting

Concatenation Order] screen. The concatenation order of the RAID groups can be changed in the

[Setting Concatenation Order] screen.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

138

5.2.8 Stop RAID Migration

This function stops RAID migration.

The procedure to stop migration is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume for which migration is to be stopped (multiple selections can be made)

and click [Stop RAID Migration] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→The stop migration process starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

This function cannot be executed when migration is not being performed for the selected volume.

•If migration is canceled, the reservation for Zero Reclamation is released.

•When migration is stopped, data in the migration source volume can be accessed normally.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

139

5.2.9 Start Zero Reclamation

"Zero Reclamation" is a function that releases the allocated physical area when data in the physical area that

is allocated to a TPV or an FTV is filled with zeros.

This function starts Zero Reclamation.

Volume requirements for starting Zero Reclamation:

•Volumes for which "Type" is "TPV" or "FTV"

•Volumes without " Readying" status, " Not Ready" status, or " Broken" status

•Volumes that are not undergoing Zero Reclaiming or volumes that are not reserved for Zero Reclamation

•Volumes that are not ODX Buffer volumes

•Volumes that are not undergoing RAID migration

•Volumes that are not undergoing TPV balancing

•FTVs that are not undergoing FTRP balancing

The procedure to start Zero Reclamation is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume to start Zero Reclamation (multiple selections can be made), and click

[Start Zero Reclamation] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

This function cannot be performed when the storage system status is "Not Ready".

•The Thin Provisioning function and the Flexible Tier (automatic storage layering) function can be

effectively used by using Zero Reclamation when system configurations or system environment

modifications are performed. Examples of when to use Zero Reclamation are as follows:

-After the initialization of the OS or the file system (such as writing 0 data to all the volumes) is

complete

-After RAID migration from "Standard" to "TPV" is complete

-After RAID migration from "Standard" to "FTV" is complete

•The progress of Zero Reclamation can be checked with "Zero Reclamation Progress" on the [Volume

Detail] screen (Basic). Refer to "5.1.9 Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 88) for details.

•Zero Reclamation can be reserved for the destination volume of the RAID migration. Refer to "5.2.7 Start

RAID Migration" (page 123) for details.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When switching controller firmware is being performed

•When the concurrent firmware upgrade is being performed

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

140

2Click the [OK] button.

→Zero Reclamation starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.10 Stop Zero Reclamation

This function stops Zero Reclamation.

The procedure to stop Zero Reclamation is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume to stop Zero Reclamation (multiple selections can be made), and click

[Stop Zero Reclamation] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

•Zero Reclamation cannot be suspended and restarted (restarting Zero Reclamation from where it was

stopped). If Zero Reclamation is stopped and then started again, the Zero Reclamation process starts

from the first volume at the top again.

•This function cannot release the volumes that are reserved for Zero Reclamation. The reservation status

of Zero Reclamation is released only when RAID migration is stopped.

•This function cannot be performed when the storage system status is "Not Ready".

The progress of Zero Reclamation can be checked with "Process" on the [Volume] screen. Refer to "5.1.1

Volume (Basic Information)" (page 74) for details.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

141

2Click the [OK] button.

→Zero Reclamation stops.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.11 Delete Snap Data Pool Volume

An SDPV is a logical volume that is created in the SDP.

This function deletes SDPVs to reduce SDP capacity.

The procedure to delete an SDPV is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the SDPV to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete SDPV] in

[Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Deletion of SDPV starts.

If the target SDPV is currently being used, it will be deleted after the SDPV is released.

If the SDPV is currently being used, the target SDPV status is changed to "Reserved Deletion". The

"Reserved Deletion" status can be checked in the [Volume (Basic)] screen.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

142

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.12 Force Delete Snap Data Pool Volume

An SDPV is a logical volume that is created in the SDP.

This function forcibly deletes an SDPV regardless of whether it being used or not to reduce SDP capacity.

The procedure to forcibly delete an SDPV is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the SDPV to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Force Delete

SDPV] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Deletion of SDPV starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

•If the target SDPV is being used by a copy session, an error stops the copy session, and then the SDPV is

deleted.

•A SDPV that is in "Reserved Deletion" status can be deleted.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

143

5.2.13 Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Volume

This function changes the threshold for monitoring the used capacity of Thin Provisioning Volume. There is an

"Attention" threshold.

The procedure to change the threshold of Thin Provisioning Volume is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPV for which the threshold is to be changed (multiple selections can be made)

and click [Modify Threshold] in [Action].

2Specify the new threshold, and click the [Change] button.

•Attention

Select between 1 and 200 [%] for the Attention threshold for monitoring the used capacity of the

Thin Provisioning Volume. The default value is 10 [%].

The Attention threshold is determined by the ratio of "Free space in the TPP to which the TPV

belongs" to "Non-allocated TPV capacity".

→A confirmation screen appears.

This function cannot be performed when there are no TPVs in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•This function changes the threshold of a TPV that is created by using the procedure in "5.2.1 Create

Volume" (page 96).

•The same threshold can be applied for multiple TPVs in a single operation.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

144

3Click the [OK] button.

→Thin Provisioning threshold modification starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.14 Initialize Snap Data Volume

This function initializes an SDV.

An SDV is a copy destination volume for SnapOPC and SnapOPC+ that includes a data area and a copy control

information area. SDV initialization is performed when the capacity that can be used for the data area is

insufficient due to a large amount of writing being requested from the host to an SDV for any reason (such as

an operation mistake). SDV initialization is also performed when no more writing is allowed due to a

notification being reported to the host for a writing request that exceeds the SDV capacity.

•After initializing an SDV, any data that is stored in the SDV cannot be accessed. Make sure to backup the

required data.

•This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

-When the target volume is not an SDV

-When LDE is being performed in the RAID group to which the target volume belongs

-When the target volume status is not " Available"

-When Advanced Copy is being performed in the target volume

When an SDV is initialized, the area that is allocated from the SDPV to the SDV is released.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

145

The procedure to initialize an SDV is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the SDV to be initialized (multiple selections can be made) and click [Initialize SDV]

in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Initialization of the SDV starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.15 Encrypt Volume

This function encrypts existing volumes.

•When using this function, enable the encryption mode. Refer to "11.2.13.5 Setup Encryption Mode" (page

941) for details.

•This function is used to prevent data leakage due to removal of disks, and cannot prevent data leakage

caused by server access.

•Encrypted volumes cannot be changed to non-encrypted volumes.

•"Standard", "WSV", and "SDV" type volumes can be encrypted.

•Canceling volume encryption is not possible.

•This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

-When a RAID group diagnosis is being performed

-When a disk diagnosis is being performed

-When firmware is being switched in hot mode

-When disk firmware is being applied

-When the status of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is other than "Normal"

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

146

The procedure to encrypt a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume to be encrypted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Encrypt

Volume] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Encryption of the volume starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

•The following volumes cannot be encrypted:

-Volumes without " Available" status

-Volumes undergoing RAID migration

-Volumes undergoing encryption

-Volumes undergoing formatting or LUN Concatenation

-Volumes registered in a RAID group undergoing LDE

-Volumes in which the drives that configure the RAID group are undergoing rebuild, copyback, or

redundant copy

-Volumes in which the drives that configure the RAID group are "SED"

-Volumes which belong to a RAID group for which the Stripe Depth value is changed (*1)

*1: A RAID group for which the Stripe Depth value is 128KB or more. Note that the Stripe Depth value for RAID1

cannot be changed. Refer to "6.1.5 RAID Group (Basic)" (page 169) for details.

-Volumes with Storage Migration paths

•The following performance may be reduced for encrypted volumes compared with non-encrypted

volumes:

-Access to the encrypted volumes

-Copy transfer of encrypted volumes

•Up to 64 volumes can be encrypted at the same time. Note that if concatenated volumes are selected, the

maximum number of volumes that can be encrypted is less than 64.

TPVs cannot be encrypted with this function. TPVs that are created in an encrypted TPP are encrypted.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

147

5.2.16 Forbid Advanced Copy

This function protects a volume so that the volume cannot be registered as the copy destination volume of

Advanced Copy.

The [Forbid Advanced Copy] is a function that protects the data in the selected volumes by forbidding the

volume to be the copy destination of the Advanced Copy sessions or restoration setting. When the Advanced

Copy function is used by multiple software, the same volumes may be used by multiple software, resulting in

unexpected data corruption. This function is available to protect the data in the copy source from being

deleted.

The procedure to protect a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume to be protected (multiple selections can be made) and click [Forbid

Advanced Copy] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the copy destination protect starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

•If an Advanced Copy license is not registered, volume protection is not enabled. However, when using the

ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, a free license is registered by default and volumes can be protected.

•"Standard", "TPV", "WSV", and "FTV" type volumes can be protected. Note that the ODX Buffer volumes can-

not be protected even when the volume type is "Standard", "TPV" or "FTV".

•This function cannot be used for volumes that are already protected.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

148

5.2.17 Permit Advanced Copy

This function releases the protected volumes.

Released volumes can be used as the copy destination volume.

The procedure to release a volume protection is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the protected volume to be released (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Permit Advanced Copy] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Releasing copy destination protect starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.18 Modify Cache Parameters

This function changes the cache parameters of each volume.

Performance of the storage system varies depending on the cache hit ratio. The ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system detects sequentiality when a host requests Read/Write. If sequentiality is detected when a Read

request is issued, the cache hit ratio is improved by reading the sequential data into the cache memory in

advance. The characteristics of Read/Write requests from the host depends on the system. Performance of the

storage system may improve by specifying a cache parameter that is suitable for the system that is being

used.

The following parameters can be specified:

•Cache Page Capacity

Specify the cache capacity that is used by volumes.

•Prefetch Limit (PL)

Specify the value to calculate the amount of data that is to be read from the drive in advance (amount of

data to prefetch from the disk) when the cache detects the sequentiality of data access (Read IO).

•Force Prefetch Mode (FP)

Specify whether to perform prefetch even if the sequentiality of data access (Read IO) is not detected.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

149

•Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

Specify the number of processes that can be written back at the same time.

•Prefetch Sequential Detect Count (PSDC)

Specify the number of times for sequential data detection to determine the sequentiality of data access

(Read IO).

•Sequential Dirty Detect Count (SDDC)

Specify the number of times for sequential data detection to determine the sequentiality of data access

(Write I/O).

•Sequential Slope (SS)

A parameter to determine the sequentiality of data access (Read I/O). Specify the number of LBAs by which

the previous I/O and the current I/O are considered as sequential data.

•Sequential Dirty Slope (SDS)

A parameter to determine the sequentiality of data access (Write I/O). Specify the number of LBAs by which

the previous I/O and the current I/O are considered as sequential data.

The procedure to modify cache parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1Select which volume to change the cache parameters for (multiple selections can be made)

and click [Modify Cache Parameters] in [Action].

2Change the cache parameters and click the [Modify] button.

Refer to " Volume types for which Cache Parameters are available" (page 153) for the volume types for

which the parameters can be specified.

•Cache Page Capacity

Specify the cache capacity that is used by volumes.

-"-" (hyphen)

-32.50 MB

-65.00 MB

-130.00 MB

-260.00 MB

-520.00 MB

-1040.00 MB

-2080.00 MB (Not available for the ETERNUS DX80 S2)

•For TPVs, specify the MWC for each TPP. Refer to "7.2.8 Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

(page 241) for details.

•Cache parameters cannot be changed when pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

The same cache parameter can be applied for multiple volumes in a single operation.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

150

When "-" (hyphen) is selected, the cache capacity is not limited. It is not necessary to change the

default setting for normal use. If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify

Cache Parameters] is clicked, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the field.

Data in low I/O load volumes may not be stored in the cache memory if volumes with a high I/O load

exist. This reduces the cache hit ratio for the low I/O load volumes. By limiting the cache capacity

that is used by high I/O load volumes, a reduction in performance when low I/O load volumes are

accessed can be prevented. However, the cache hit ratio for high I/O load volumes is lowered and

the access performance for the volumes may reduced.

•Prefetch Limit (PL)

Specify the Prefetch Limit of the volume between "0" and "64". The default value is "8".

If "0" is specified for the "Prefetch Limit (PL)", data prefetch is not performed. It is not necessary to

change the default setting for normal use. If multiple volumes with different settings are selected

and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

When specifying a larger "Prefetch Limit", the amount of data that is read from a disk for a single

read process is increased. As a result, the number of times that data needs to be read (Staging)

from the disk is reduced. However, the amount of data that is read from the disk for a single read

process increases and requested data may not be read before the next read or write request from

the host is issued. In this case, the waiting time for Staging may increase.

•Force Prefetch Mode (FP)

Select whether to enable ("ON") or disable ("OFF") the Force Prefetch Mode to forcibly read to the

cache. The default setting is "OFF". It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use. If

multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked,

"OFF" is selected for the field.

This setting is required to improve the sequential read access performance.

When a number of sequential accesses are performed for one volume, the ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system may determine that random accesses have occurred. By selecting "ON" for "Force Prefetch

Mode", prefetching is forcibly performed in such a case.

However, for random read access, unnecessary data is read from the disk and random read access

performance may be reduced.

•Note that this parameter is not used to specify the capacity of dedicated cache for the relevant

volume. This parameter limits the cache capacity that can be used for the relevant volume.

Although a volume with this parameter cannot use a cache memory that exceeds the specified

value, other volumes can use the entire cache, which includes the specified capacity.

•The cache page capacity must be changed when the I/O load of the volume is low.

•When selecting volumes that cannot use this parameter as the target of this function, the

"Cache Page Capacity" setting is not displayed on the screen.

•If write data exceeds the specified cache page capacity for a volume that is stored in the cache

memory, the cache page capacity cannot be changed.

•The cache page capacity cannot be changed for concatenated volumes that are created by the

LUN concatenation function.

•For the ETERNUS DX80 S2, "2080.00 MB" cannot be selected as the cache page capacity.

•The specified cache page capacity includes the mirror area. Note that the maximum cache

capacity used by read I/O is a half the specified value.

•When the cache page capacity is limited, the capacity cannot be expanded for the relevant

volume. Reset the cache page capacity to the default value before expanding the volume

capacity.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

151

•Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

Specify the Multi Writeback Count between "1" and "16". It is not necessary to change the default

setting for normal use. If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache

Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

The Multi Writeback Count cannot be specified for volumes that are concatenated by the LUN

concatenation function.

When specifying a larger "Multi Writeback Count" value, sequential write access performance is

improved. Note that this is not effective when a number of random write accesses occur. Depending

on the ratio of read access and write access, read access performance may be reduced.

•Prefetch Sequential Detect Count (PSDC)

Specify the Prefetch Sequential Detect Count between "1" and "255". The default value is "3". It is not

necessary to change the default setting for normal use. If multiple volumes with different settings

are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

If the host splits data into multiple pieces and performs read access in succession, the access may

be determined as sequential access even if it is actually random access. When specifying a larger

"Prefetch Sequential Detect Count", the required number to detect sequential data for determining

sequential data access is increased and a reduction in performance due to incorrect prefetch can be

avoided. Depending on the amount of sequential data, a high PSDC value slows the determination

of sequential data access and performance may be reduced.

•Sequential Dirty Detect Count (SDDC)

Specify the value of the Sequential Dirty Detect Count between "1" and "255". The default value is

"3". It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use. If multiple volumes with differ-

ent settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

If the host splits data into multiple pieces and performs write access in succession, the access may

be determined as sequential access even if it is actually random access. When specifying larger

"Sequential Dirty Detect Count", the required number to detect sequential data for determining

sequential data access is increased and a reduction in performance due to incorrect prefetch can be

avoided.

Depending on the amount of sequential data, a high SDDC value slows the determination of

sequential data access and performance may be reduced.

•Sequential Slope (SS)

Specify the value of the Sequential Slope between "0" and "4096". If the following equation is true

for sequential data access (Read I/O), the access is determined as sequential access. The default

value is "0". It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use. If multiple volumes

with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

The following can be also determined as sequential access.

-A sequential access that does not have successive Logical Block Addresses (LBAs) and skips

some addresses

-A sequential access that issues multiple host I/Os at the same time and is unable to be received

in the order of LBAs

A high SS value may cause random access to be determined as sequential access, resulting in

reduced performance due to incorrect prefetching.

•Sequential Dirty Slope (SDS)

Specify the value of the Sequential Dirty Slope between "0" and "4096". If the following equation is

true for sequential data access (Write I/O), the access is determined as sequential access. The

default value is "0". It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use.

If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked,

the field is blank.

(End LBA of the previous I/O + 1) + SS (Sequential Slope) ⊇ Start LBA of the current I/O

(End LBA of the previous I/O + 1) + SDS (Sequential Dirty Slope) ⊇ Start LBA of the current I/O

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

152

The following can be also determined as sequential access:

-A sequential access that does not have successive LBAs and skips some addresses

-A sequential access that issues multiple host I/Os at the same time and is unable to be received

in the order of LBAs

A larger SDS may cause random access to be determined as sequential access, resulting in reduced

performance due to incorrect prefetching.

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→The cache parameter modification starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1.

End of procedure

The setting values that are available for Multi Writeback Count vary depending on the RAID type

and drive configuration. Refer to "E.2 Input Conditions for MWC" (page 1007) for details.

If the [Default] button is clicked before the [Modify] button, the default cache parameters are

restored.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

153

Volume types for which Cache Parameters are available

Available: The parameter can be specified.

N/A: The parameter cannot be specified.

*1: The cache parameter is specified for each TPP. Refer to "7.2.8 Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

(page 241) for details.

5.2.19 Export Cache Parameters

This function downloads the setting information of the cache parameters for all the volumes at the same

time.

Item

Volume type

Standard SDV SDPV Standard (LUN

concatenation) TPV FTV WSV

Cache Page

Capacity

Available Available Available N/A N/A N/A N/A

Prefetch Limit (PL) Available Available Available Available Available N/A Available

Force Prefetch

Mode (FP)

Available Available Available Available Available N/A Available

Multi Writeback

Count (MWC)

Available Available Available N/A (*1) N/A Available

Prefetch

Sequential Detect

Count (PSDC)

Available Available Available Available Available N/A Available

Sequential Dirty

Detect Count

(SDDC)

Available Available Available Available Available N/A Available

Sequential Slope

(SS)

Available Available Available Available Available N/A Available

Sequential Dirty

Slope (SDS)

Available Available Available Available Available N/A Available

•"Cache Page Capacity", "Prefetch Limit (PL)", "Force Prefetch Mode (FP)", "Multi Writeback Count (MWC)",

"Prefetch Sequential Detect Count (PSDC)", "Sequential Dirty Detect Count (SDDC)", "Sequential Slope

(SS)", and "Sequential Dirty Slope (SDS)" can be downloaded as cache parameters.

•Cache parameters can be downloaded from "Standard", "WSV", "TPV", "FTV", "SDV", and "SDPV" type

volumes. Note that "Cache Page Capacity" cannot be downloaded from "WSV", "TPV", and "FTV" type

volumes.

•"MWC" for each TPP can be downloaded.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

154

The procedure to export cache parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Export Cache Parameters] in [Action].

2Click the [Create Data] button.

→Exporting of the cache parameters is executed.

After the cache parameters are exported, a dialog box to download the file appears.

3Click the [Download] button.

→A dialog box to download the file appears.

4Save the setting information file of the cache parameter.

The default file name is "CacheParam_serial number for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system_YYYY-

MM-DD_hh-mm-ss.txt".

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen (Step 3) is displayed.)

→The cache parameter download starts.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

155

5Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1.

End of procedure

5.2.20 Export Performance Information

This function exports the following performance information in a single operation and saves it as a text file.

•Performance (Host I/O)

•Performance (Advanced Copy)

•Performance (CA)

•Performance (CM)

•Performance (Drive)

The procedure to download the performance information is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Export Performance Info] in [Action].

2Click the [Create Data] button.

→The registered performance information in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is exported.

After the performance information export is finished, a screen to execute downloading the file is

displayed.

•"Performance (Host I/O)" is the performance information of volumes for Host I/O.

•"Performance (Advanced Copy)" is the performance information of volumes for Advanced Copy.

•The target CA for exporting information of "Performance (CA)" is FC, iSCSI, FCoE, and SAS (for ETERNUS

DX80 S2/DX90 S2). Note that performance information for FC port which port mode is "Initiator" cannot be

obtained.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

156

3Click the [Download] button.

→A dialog box to download the file appears.

4Save the downloaded performance information file.

The default file name is "Perform_serial number for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system_YYYY-MM-

DD_hh-mm-ss.txt".

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen (Step 3) is displayed.)

→Downloading the performance information file starts.

5Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1.

End of procedure

5.2.21 Release Reservation

This function releases the reservation status of volumes that are specified by the host.

Reservation and release reservation of a volume is normally performed from the host. This function must be

used only when a reservation of a volume cannot be released due to errors in the host.

This function provides the following features:

•Releasing the volume reservation status

•Releasing the volume persistent reservation status

•Deleting all the reservation keys that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

Be sure to pay attention when releasing reserve status as it may cause data corruption. Check the status of

the target volume before using this function.

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

157

The procedure to release the reservation status is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volumes to release the reservation (multiple selections can be made), and click

[Release Reservation] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Releasing volume reservation status starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

5.2.22 Start Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

This function relocates the physical allocating area of the TPV to make the physical area of TPV is allocated

equally among the RAID Groups that configure the TPP.

When multiple TPVs in the same TPP are accessed, the physical area is allocated by using the RAID groups of

the TPP one by one in the access order. Therefore the physical area of TPVs may be unequally allocated among

the RAID groups. This phenomenon also occurs when expanding the capacity of a TPP. In this case, the

physical area is allocated unevenly among the newly added and existing RAID groups. This function is to solve

the unequal allocation among RAID groups, and balance the physical allocating area in each RAID group. I/O

load is dispersed among the RAID groups in the TPP and access performance may be improved.

Requirements for a TPV to be balanced:

•The "Type" is "TPV"

•The "Status" is " Available"

•RAID migration is not being performed (the target volume is not used as a migration source or a migration

destination)

•An Advanced Copy is not being performed (the target volume is not being used as a copy source or a copy

destination)

•A Remote Advanced Copy is not being performed (the target volume is not being used as a copy source or

a copy destination)

•An Advanced Copy (ODX) is not being performed

•TPV balancing is not being performed

•Zero Reclamation is not being performed

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

158

Requirements for a TPP in which the target TPV is registered:

•The "Status" is " Available"

•The free space in the TPP is larger than the capacity of the TPV that is to be balanced

The procedure to start balancing TPVs is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPV to be balanced and click [Start Balancing] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→TPV balancing starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume] screen.

End of procedure

•If a Thin Provisioning license is not registered, this function cannot be used.

•The TPV balancing cannot be performed in the following conditions:

-When the maximum number of volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When the total number of TPV balancing, RAID migration, and FTV balancing (*1) processes that are

performed at the same time is 32

-When the total capacity for the TPV balancing, RAID migration, and FTV balancing (*1) processes that

are performed at the same time is 128TB

-When the TPP capacity that can be registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is insufficient

*1: When the FTRP balancing is performed, the FTV balancing process starts in the FTSP. Refer to "7.2.12 Start

Balancing Flexible Tier Pool" (page 248) for details.

•This function balances the physical allocating area of the TPV among RAID groups of the TPP to which the

TPV belongs. It is not able to balance TPV by RAID migration of the TPV to other TPPs.

•TPV balancing can be performed during the work I/O.

•To check the balancing progress of a TPV, refer to "5.1.8 Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume" (page 86).

Chapter 5 Volume Management

5.2 Functions in the Action Area for Volume

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

159

5.2.23 Stop Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

This function stops TPV balancing

The procedure to stop balancing of the Thin Provisioning Volume is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the volume for which balancing is to be stopped and click [Stop Balancing] in

[Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→TPV balancing stops.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume] screen.

End of procedure

•This function cannot be used when balancing is not being performed for a TPV.

•This function cannot be used when the specified TPV balancing is already complete.

When TPV balancing is stopped, data in volumes that are not balanced yet can be accessed normally.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

160

Chapter 6

RAID Group Management

This chapter describes RAID group management.

6.1 RAID Group Status

RAID group status displays the status information of volumes.

RAID group status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Detailed information of the RAID groups can be displayed from the following screens:

•RAID Group (Basic)

•RAID Group (Volume Layout)

•RAID Group Detail (Disk)

RAID group status screen Category

RAID Group (Basic Information) RAID Group

Tuning Tuning

ECO Mode Schedule (RAID Group) ECO Mode Schedule

SED Key Group SED Key Group

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

161

6.1.1 RAID Group (Basic Information)

This function displays the basic information of RAID groups.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The RAID group number is displayed. Click this item to display "6.1.5 RAID Group (Basic)" (page 169).

The RAID group number is allocated when a volume is created from the smallest unused decimal number

in ascending order.

•Name

The RAID group name is displayed. Click this item to display "6.1.5 RAID Group (Basic)" (page 169).

•Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to "B.3 RAID Group Status" (page 975) for detailed information of

RAID group status.

•Usage

The usage of the RAID group is displayed.

-Standard

A RAID group that is used for creating "Standard", "SDV", or "SDPV" type volumes

-Standard / WSV

A RAID group that is used for creating "Standard", "WSV", "SDV", or "SDPV" type volumes

-WSV

A RAID group that is used for creating "WSV" type volumes

-TPP

A RAID group that belongs to a TPP

-FTRP

A RAID group that belongs to a Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP)

-RDB

A RAID group that is registered as an REC Disk Buffer

-Temporary

A RAID group that is temporarily created while LDE is being performed

-"-" (hyphen)

A RAID group that is not used

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

162

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

The capacity is displayed in units of "GB" or "TB". Even when volumes are created in units of "GB", if the

volume capacity exceeds 1023.99GB, the capacity is displayed in units of "TB". The capacity is rounded off

to two decimal places.

•Total Free Space

The total free space in the RAID group is displayed.

If the total free capacity exceeds 1023.99MB, the capacity is displayed in units of "GB". If the total free

capacity exceeds 1023.99GB, the capacity is displayed in units of "TB". The capacity is rounded off to two

decimal places.

"Free space" means an area in the RAID group where no volume is created, and dispersed areas which

became free by creating and deleting a volume.

•Controlling CM

The controlling CM and CPU of the RAID group are displayed.

-CM#x CPU#y (x: CM number, y: CPU number)

•Process

A process that is being performed for the RAID group is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

-Recovering

Rebuild, copyback, redundant copy, or RAID group recovery is being performed.

-Expanding

Expansion of the RAID group by LDE is being performed.

-Formatting

Formatting of the RAID group is being performed.

Filter setting

Filter Description

Name Input the RAID group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the RAID group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Status Select the RAID group status that is to be displayed.

RAID Type Select the RAID type that is to be displayed.

Bottom of Total Free Space

Input the minimum capacity of unused free space for the RAID groups that are to be

displayed and select the units of capacity.

When the minimum free space of the RAID group is not used for filtering, specify "0MB".

Process Select which current process for the RAID group is to be displayed.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

163

6.1.2 Tuning

The RAID group tuning information is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The RAID group number is displayed. Click this item to display "6.1.5 RAID Group (Basic)" (page 169).

•Name

The RAID group name is displayed. Click this item to display "6.1.5 RAID Group (Basic)" (page 169).

•Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to "B.3 RAID Group Status" (page 975) for detailed information of

RAID group status.

•Usage

The usage of the RAID group is displayed.

-Standard

A RAID group that is used for creating "Standard", "SDV", or "SDPV" type volumes

-Standard / WSV

A RAID group that is used for creating "Standard", "WSV", "SDV", or "SDPV" type volumes

-WSV

A RAID group that is used for creating "WSV" type volumes

-TPP

A RAID group that belongs to a TPP

-FTRP

A RAID group that belongs to an FTRP

-RDB

A RAID group that is registered as an REC Disk Buffer

-"-" (hyphen)

A RAID group that is not used

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

164

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

•DCMF

The Drive Command Multiplying Factor (DCMF) is displayed.

If the DCMF is changed, the number of commands issued to the drive is increased in multiples of the DCMF

set value (if DCMF is "2", it is double).

•Rebuild Priority

The rebuild priority of the RAID group is displayed.

When the Rebuild Priority is "Low", give priority to host access.

When the Rebuild Priority is "Middle", give the same priority as the host access to rebuild, copyback, and

redundant copy.

When the Rebuild Priority is "High", give priority to rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy.

•Throttle

The throttle value is displayed.

Throttle is the proportion of the number of commands that are issued to a drive at the same time to the

maximum number of commands that can be issued. When the throttle value is "100%", the maximum

number of commands specified for each drive (the default number of commands) are issued.

When "Disk Tuning Parameter Setting" of the [Modify RAID Group Parameters] function is

disabled, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

When logged in with a user account that has a default "Monitor" role, this item is not displayed.

•Ordered Cut

Ordered Cut is displayed between 0 and 65535.

Ordered Cut is the number of commands for optimizing drive access processing (priority control). When

Ordered Cut is "x", the command to perform the priority control is issued for every x commands issued, and

priority control is performed for the command issued before this command.

When Ordered Cut is "0", the interval for priority control (priority control at every "x" commands") cannot be

specified. All of the commands issued to the drive are processed according to their priority settings.

When "Disk Tuning Parameter Setting" of the [Modify RAID Group Parameters] function is disabled, or the

configuration drive of the RAID group is SSD, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

When logged in with a user account that has a default "Monitor" role, this item is not displayed.

RAID groups in which LDE is being performed are not displayed in the list.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

165

Filter setting

6.1.3 ECO Mode Schedule (RAID Group)

This function displays the setting status of the ECO mode that is applied for the RAID group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The RAID group number is displayed. Click this item to display "6.1.5 RAID Group (Basic)" (page 169).

•Name

The RAID group name is displayed. Click this item to display "6.1.5 RAID Group (Basic)" (page 169).

•Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to "B.3 RAID Group Status" (page 975) for detailed information of

RAID group status.

Filter Description

Name Input the RAID group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the RAID group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Status Select the RAID group status that is to be displayed.

RAID Type Select the RAID type that is to be displayed.

•To use the ECO mode, follow the procedure in "11.2.8.1 Modify ECO Mode General Setting" (page 869)

and "11.2.8.2 Create ECO Mode Schedule" (page 871) to perform the general ECO mode setup and create

an ECO mode schedule.

•To assign the ECO mode to a RAID group, refer to "6.2.7 Assign ECO Mode Schedule (RAID Group)" (page

192).

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

166

•Usage

The usage of the RAID group is displayed.

-Standard

A RAID group that is used for creating "Standard", "SDV", or "SDPV" type volumes

-Standard / WSV

A RAID group that is used for creating "Standard", "WSV", "SDV", or "SDPV" type volumes

-WSV

A RAID group that is used for creating "WSV" type volumes

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

•ECO Mode Schedule

The ECO mode schedule name that is applied for the RAID group is displayed. When the ECO mode

schedule is not applied, the field is blank.

•ECO Mode Action

When the ECO mode is enabled, "ON" is displayed. When the ECO mode is disabled, "OFF" is displayed.

•Motor Status

The disk motor status for the RAID group is displayed.

-Active

The disk motors are activated.

-In the Boot Process

The disk motors are starting up.

-Idle

The disk motors are stopped.

-In the Stop Process

The disk motors are being stopped.

Filter setting

Filter Description

Name Input the RAID group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the RAID group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Status Select the RAID group status that is to be displayed.

RAID Type Select the RAID type that is to be displayed.

ECO Mode Schedule

Input the ECO mode schedule name that is applied to the RAID group that is to be

displayed.

When not using the ECO mode schedule name for filtering, leave this item blank.

ECO Mode Action Select the operating status of the ECO mode that is applied to the RAID group status that

is to be displayed.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

167

6.1.4 SED Key Group

This function displays the key group settings for the RAID groups that are configured with SEDs.

The key group combines all of the RAID groups that use the same SED authentication key.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The RAID group number is displayed. Click this item to display "6.1.5 RAID Group (Basic)" (page 169).

•Name

The RAID group name is displayed. Click this item to display "6.1.5 RAID Group (Basic)" (page 169).

•Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to "B.3 RAID Group Status" (page 975) for detailed information of

RAID group status.

•One key group can be created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•Use the [Key Group] screen to check the SED authentication key information and the SSL/KMIP certificate

information that is used for the key group. Refer to "11.1.5.1 Key Group" (page 723) for details.

•There are two types of SED keys: an SED authentication key that is managed by the key server and a

common key that is stored in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. If a RAID group that is configured with

SEDs is registered in the key group, the relevant RAID group is managed by the SED authentication key. If

the RAID group is not registered in the key group, the relevant RAID group is managed by the common

key.

•RAID groups that are configured with SEDs can be added in the key group or deleted from the key group.

Refer to "6.2.8 Set Key Group (RAID Group)" (page 195) for details.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

168

•Usage

The usage of the RAID group is displayed.

-Standard

A RAID group that is used for creating "Standard", "SDV", or "SDPV" type volumes

-Standard / WSV

A RAID group that is used for creating "Standard", "WSV", "SDV", or "SDPV" type volumes

-WSV

A RAID group that is used for creating "WSV" type volumes

-Temporary

A RAID group that is temporarily created while LDE is being performed

-"-" (hyphen)

A RAID group that is not used

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

•Key Group

The setting status of the key group for the RAID groups is displayed.

-If the relevant RAID group is registered in the key group: "Enable"

-If one of the following conditions applies to the relevant RAID group: "Disable"

•No common key for SEDs is registered

•The relevant RAID group is not registered in the key group

Filter setting

Filter Description

Name Input the RAID group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the RAID group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Status Select the RAID group status that is to be displayed.

RAID Type Select the RAID type that is to be displayed.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

169

6.1.5 RAID Group (Basic)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link in the "6.1.1 RAID Group (Basic Information)" (page 161) to display the

detailed information of the target RAID group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to "B.3 RAID Group Status" (page 975) for detailed information of

RAID group status.

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

•Total Free Space

The total free space in the RAID group is displayed.

"Free space" means an area in the RAID group where no volume is created, and dispersed areas which

became free by creating and deleting a volume.

•Controlling CM

The controlling CM and CPU of the RAID group is displayed.

-CM#x CPU#y (x: CM number, y: CPU number)

•Process

A process that is being performed for the RAID group is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

170

•Stripe Depth

The Stripe Depth (*1) of the RAID group is displayed.

If the RAID type is "Mirroring (RAID1)", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

*1: The number of logical blocks that are assigned to a drive for each stripe when configuring a stripe volume in a

RAID group. Normally, it is 64KB.

-64 KB

-128 KB

-256 KB

-512 KB

-1024 KB

6.1.6 RAID Group (Volume Layout)

Detailed information of the volume layout is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Start LBA

The first Logical Block Address (LBA) of the volume is displayed.

•Capacity

The volume capacity is displayed.

If the volume capacity exceeds 1023.99MB, the capacity is displayed in units of "GB". If the volume capacity

exceeds 1023.99GB, the capacity is displayed in units of "TB". The capacity is rounded off to two decimal

places. To check the volume capacity in units of "MB", use CLI.

•Volume No.

The volume number is displayed. Unused space is displayed as "Free".

•Volume Name

The volume name is displayed.

•Volume Status

The volume status is displayed. Refer to "B.2 Volume Status" (page 974) for detailed information of volume

status.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

171

•Volume Type

The volume type is displayed.

-Standard

-WSV

-SDV

-SDPV

6.1.7 RAID Group Detail (Disk)

Detailed information of disks that configure the RAID group is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Enclosure

The number of the enclosure where the drive is installed is displayed.

•Slot No.

The number of the slot where the drive is installed is displayed.

•Disk Type

The drive type is displayed.

-2.5" Online

2.5-inch SAS disk

-3.5" Online

3.5-inch SAS disk

-2.5" Nearline

2.5-inch Nearline SAS disk

-3.5" Nearline

3.5-inch Nearline SAS disk

-2.5" SSD

2.5-inch SSD

-3.5" SSD

3.5-inch SSD

-2.5" SED

2.5-inch SED

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.1 RAID Group Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

172

•Capacity

The capacity of the drive is displayed.

•Speed

The drive speed is displayed. For SSDs, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Usage

The usage of the drive is displayed.

-Data

A drive that is used for user data or an unused drives

-Global Hot Spare

A drive that is registered as a Global Hot Spare

-Dedicated Hot Spare

A drive that is registered as a Dedicated Hot Spare

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

173

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in

the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for RAID group can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for RAID Group Display function

Create RAID Group •RAID Group (Basic Information)

Delete RAID Group

Rename RAID Group

Change Controlling CM

Expand RAID Group

Modify RAID Group Parameters •Tuning

Assign ECO Mode Schedule (RAID Group) •ECO Mode Schedule (RAID Group)

Set Key Group (RAID Group) •SED Key Group

Recovery SED

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

174

6.2.1 Create RAID Group

This function creates RAID groups.

A RAID group is a group of drives that configure a RAID type.

Features and required number of drives for each RAID type

The following table shows the features and the required number of drives for each RAID type.

Note that "Striping (RAID0)" has no data redundancy.

*1: D: Data drives, M: Mirror drives, P: Parity drives

The maximum number of RAID groups for each model

The maximum number of RAID groups varies depending on each model. The following table shows the

maximum number of RAID groups for each model.

RAID type Feature Required number of drives

High Performance

(RAID1+0)

The high I/O performance of RAID0 (striping) is combined

with the reliability of RAID1 (mirroring). 2D+2M – 16D+16M

High Capacity

(RAID5)

Data divided into units of blocks and allocated across

multiple drives together with parity information created

from the data.

2D+1P – 15D+1P

High Reliability

(RAID6)

The use of double parity allows the full recovery of lost

data even in the event that two of the drives fail. 3D+2P – 14D+2P

Reliability (RAID5+0)

Multiple RAID5 volumes are RAID0 striped. For large

capacity configurations, use of RAID5+0 instead of RAID5

results in enhanced performance, improved reliability,

and shorter rebuilding times.

(2D+1P) × 2 – (15D+1P) × 2

Mirroring (RAID1)

Data is mirrored to two drives.

If one drive fails, the other drive continues operation

(mirroring).

1D+1M

Striping (RAID0)

Data is split in unit of blocks and stored across multiple

drives (striping).

RAID0 has no data redundancy.

2D – 16D

Model The maximum number of RAID

groups

ETERNUS DX80 S2 60

ETERNUS DX90 S2 120

ETERNUS DX410 S2 240

ETERNUS DX440 S2 480

ETERNUS DX8100 S 48

ETERNUS DX8700 S2 1536

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

175

Drive combinations that can configure a RAID group

The following table shows the drive combinations that can configure a RAID group.

There are two methods to create a volume: automatic drive selection and manual drive selection.

■Automatically selecting drives to create RAID groups

The procedure to create a RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Create] in [Action].

2Select "Automatic" for "Create Mode".

3Specify the RAID group detailed information, and click the [Create] button.

•Name

Input a RAID group name that is to be created.

An existing RAID group name cannot be used.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

Online Nearline SSD

Online OK OK NG

Nearline OK OK NG

SSD NG NG OK

•RAID groups can be created when the drives satisfy all of the following conditions:

-The drives are not registered in any RAID group, TPP, FTRP, or REC Disk Buffer

-The drives are not registered as hot spares

-The "Status" is " Present"

•All drives that are selected for creating a RAID group must have the same capacity and the same speed. If

drives of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest capacity becomes the standard, and all

other drives are regarded as having the same capacity as the smallest drive. In this case, the remaining

drive space is not used. In addition, if drives of different speeds exist in a RAID group, the access perfor-

mance of the RAID group is reduced by the slower drives.

•Some combinations of drive types cannot configure a RAID group. Refer to "Drive combinations that can

configure a RAID group" (page 175) for details.

•If both Online disks and Nearline disks are used for a RAID group, the drives in the RAID group will have

different speeds and capacity. In this case, some space cannot be used and the performance is reduced.

•"Striping (RAID0)" has no data redundancy. The use of "High Performance (RAID1+0)", "High Capacity

(RAID5)", "High Reliability (RAID6)", "Reliability (RAID5+0)", or "Mirroring (RAID1)" is recommended.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

176

•Number of RAID Group

Input the number of RAID groups that is to be created.

When creating multiple RAID groups at a time, the new RAID groups are named automatically. Refer

to "Naming conventions for creating volumes" (page 993) for details.

•Disk Type

Select the type of drive that configures a RAID group from the list box.

-Online

-Nearline

-SSD

-SED

•RAID Type

Select the type of RAID group that is to be created from the list box.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•RAID Group Capacity

Input the RAID group capacity that is to be created and select the units of capacity.

A RAID group is automatically created with a capacity of the entered value or higher.

The following input conditions apply:

-Numeric characters

-TB/GB/MB

→A confirmation screen appears.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Name" overlaps with an existing RAID group name

•When the "Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the RAID group that is specified using the automatic setting cannot be created with the

drives that are installed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

177

4Click the [OK] button.

→RAID group creation starts.

5Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

■Manually selecting drives to create RAID groups

Procedure

1Click [Create] in [Action].

2Select "Manual" for "Create Mode".

3Specify the RAID group detailed information, and click the [Create] button.

•Name

Input a RAID group name that is to be created.

An existing RAID group name cannot be used.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

•RAID Type

Select the type of RAID group that is to be created from the list box.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Reliability (RAID5+0)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Controlling CM

Select the controlling CM and CPU of the RAID group that is to be created.

"Automatic" and the installed "CM#x CPU#y" in normal status are displayed as options.

-Automatic

-CM#x CPU#y (x: CM number, y: CPU number)

Select "Automatic" for normal operations. When "Automatic" is selected, the CM-CPU that is to be

assigned is determined by the RAID group number. Refer to "Appendix F Automatic Controlling CM-

CPU Setting" (page 1011) for details.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

178

•RAID Group Capacity

The capacity of RAID group that is to be created is displayed. The "RAID Group Capacity" is

automatically calculated from the selected RAID type and drives.

•Checkbox to select drives

Select the checkbox for the drive that is to be used.

When using the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2, the restrictions that apply to the drive layout for

RAID group configuration vary depending on the RAID type. Refer to "Restrictions of drive layout"

(page 179) for details.

●Advanced Settings

Specify the Stripe Depth only when performing the advanced performance tuning for each RAID

group. It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use.

The higher the Stripe Depth value, the lower the number of drives that access the RAID group. If

"High Performance (RAID1+0)" is used, the number of commands that are issued for the drives is

reduced and access performance for the relevant RAID group is improved. Note that for "High

Capacity (RAID5)", a high Stripe Depth value may reduce the sequential write performance. Also

note that restrictions apply for RAID groups and volumes in the RAID group for which Stripe Depth

value is changed. Refer to "Restrictions for Stripe Depth modification" (page 180) for details.

-Stripe Depth

Select the Stripe Depth of RAID group that is to be created.

When the "RAID Type" is "Mirroring (RAID1)", this setting is not available. When the "RAID Type"

is "Reliability (RAID5+0)" or "High Reliability (RAID6)", the value is fixed to "64KB". Available

Stripe Depth value varies depending on the RAID type. Refer to "Available Stripe Depth value"

(page 180) for details.

→A confirmation screen appears.

Drives can be selected from the list of drives that is displayed for Tabular or from the drive images

that are displayed for Graphic. Click the Tabular tab to display a list of the drives or click the Graphic

tab to display drive images.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

179

4Click the [OK] button.

→RAID group creation starts.

5Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

Restrictions of drive layout

When using the ETERNUS DX8100 S2, the following restrictions for each RAID type apply to the drive layout for

RAID group configuration. A RAID group that does not satisfy the required conditions cannot be created.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Name" overlaps with an existing RAID group name

•When the "Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the conditions described in "Restrictions of drive layout" are not satisfied

•When an invalid Stripe Depth for the RAID type is specified

RAID Type Selection Conditions

High Performance

(RAID1+0)

Required Allocate mirroring pair drives to different DEs.

Recommended Distribute striping drives over as many DEs as possible.

High Capacity (RAID5) Recommended Distribute member drives over as many DEs as possible.

High Reliability (RAID6)

Reliability (RAID5+0) Recommended Distribute member drives over as many DEs as possible.

Mirroring (RAID1) Required Allocate mirroring pair drives to different DEs.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

180

When using the ETERNUS DX8700 S2, the following restrictions for each RAID type apply to the drive layout for

RAID group configuration. A RAID group that does not satisfy the required conditions cannot be created.

*1: The "SAS cascade" indicates the DEs that are connected to a single BRT port.

Same SAS cascade:

DE#x0, DE#x1, DE#x2, DE#x3 (x: 0 - F)

DE#x8, DE#x9, DE#xA, DE#xB (x: 0 - F)

[Example] SAS cascade for Port#0 of the BRT#0/#1: DE#00, DE#01, DE#02, DE#03

[Example] SAS cascade for Port#4 of the BRT#2/#3: DE#48, DE#49, DE#4A, DE#4B

Available Stripe Depth value

The following table shows the available Stripe Depth value for each RAID type.

*1: D: Data drives, M: Mirror drives, P: Parity drives

Restrictions for Stripe Depth modification

The following restrictions are applied for the RAID groups and volumes in the RAID group of which Stripe

Depth value is changed.

•Stripe depth for the existing RAID group cannot be changed.

•When selecting drives automatically to create a RAID group, the Stripe Depth cannot be changed.

•Capacity expansion (Logical Device Expansion) for the RAID group of which Stripe Depth was changed is

not available.

•Encryption of the RAID group of which Stripe Depth was changed is not available.

RAID Type Selection Conditions

High Performance

(RAID1+0)

Required Allocate mirroring pair drives to different SAS cascades (*1).

No restrictions are applied for BRT.

Recommended Distribute striping drives over as many DEs as possible.

High Capacity (RAID5) Required Allocate member drives to different SAS cascades.

No restrictions are applied for BRT.

High Reliability (RAID6)

Required The maximum number of member drives that can be allocated in

the same SAS cascade is two.

No restrictions are applied for BRT.

Recommended Distribute member drives over as many DEs as possible.

Reliability (RAID5+0)

Required The maximum number of member drives that can be allocated in

the same SAS cascade is two.

No restrictions are applied for BRT.

Recommended Distribute member drives over as many DEs as possible.

Mirroring (RAID1) Required Allocate mirroring pair drives to different SAS cascades (*1).

No restrictions are applied for BRT.

RAID type Drive configuration (*1) Available Stripe Depth value

Mirroring (RAID1) 1D+1M –

High Performance (RAID1+0) Any 64KB, 128KB, 256KB, 512KB, 1024KB

Striping (RAID0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

2D+1P – 4D+1P 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB

5D+1P – 8D+1P 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB

9D+1P – 15D+1P 64 KB, 128 KB

Reliability (RAID5+0) Any 64 KB

High Reliability (RAID6)

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

181

6.2.2 Delete RAID Group

This function deletes the registered RAID groups in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

When a RAID group is deleted, the status of the drives that configured the RAID group change to data drives

that are not used by any RAID group.

The procedure to delete a RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the RAID group that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Delete] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→RAID group deletion starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

•RAID groups that have volumes registered cannot be deleted. When deleting a RAID group, delete the

volumes beforehand.

•The RAID group that is registered in the TPP or the FTRP cannot be deleted.

•RAID groups that are registered as REC Disk Buffer cannot be deleted.

•Up to 128 RAID groups can be deleted at once.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

182

6.2.3 Rename RAID Group

This function changes the name of RAID groups that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

Multiple RAID groups can be renamed with a single operation.

The procedure to rename RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the RAID group to be renamed (multiple selections can be made) and click [Rename]

in [Action].

2Input the new "Name" and the "Start of Suffix", and click the [Rename] button.

•Name

Specify a new RAID group name.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

•Start of Suffix

Input the starting number of the suffix that is to be added to the new RAID group name. When

changing multiple RAID group names, the suffix number is added to the RAID group names with

consecutive numbers in ascending order starting with the entered suffix number. Refer to "Naming

conventions for renaming volumes" (page 993) for details. When changing only one RAID Group

name, the "Start of Suffix" field is not displayed.

The following input conditions apply:

-Numeric characters ("0" - "99999")

-Decimal number

-1 - 5 digits

→A confirmation screen appears.

Renaming RAID groups that configure FTRPs is not available.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

183

3Click the [OK] button.

→Changing RAID group name starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When new RAID group name is not input

•When the RAID group name does not satisfy the input conditions

•When inputting the existing RAID group name (when one RAID group is selected)

•When the "Start of Suffix" is not specified (when multiple RAID groups are selected)

•When the value in the "Start of Suffix" does not satisfy the input conditions (when multiple RAID

groups are selected)

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

184

6.2.4 Change Controlling CM

This function changes the controlling CM that is allocated to the RAID group.

Unequal loading between the CMs can be resolved by changing the controlling CM.

The procedure to change controlling CM of the RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the RAID group to change the controlling CM (multiple selections can be made) and

click [Change Controlling CM] in [Action].

•While changing the controlling CM, the storage system status is changed from Write Back mode to Write

Through mode, reducing the I/O performance for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. Perform this

function when there are not many I/O operations. Changing the controlling CM may take up to 20 or 30

minutes.

•Changing the controlling CM for RAID groups that configure FTRPs is not available.

•This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

-When a CM that is not in " Normal" status exists

-When formatting or LUN Concatenation is being performed in the volumes that are registered in the

target RAID group

-When encryption is being performed in the target RAID group

-When the target RAID group status is not " Available"

-When rebuild, copyback, or redundant copy is being performed in the target RAID group

-When LDE is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When RAID migration is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When a RAID group diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When a disk diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When balancing TPV is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When balancing FTRP is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

This function can also be used for changing the controlling CM of the RAID groups that configure a Thin

Provisioning Pool (TPP).

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

185

2Select the controlling CM after changing, and click the [Change] button.

•New Controlling CM

Specify the new controlling CM and CPU.

"Automatic" and the installed "CM#x CPU#y" in normal status are displayed as options.

-Automatic

-CM#x CPU#y (x: CM number, y: CPU number)

Select "Automatic" for normal operations. When "Automatic" is selected, the CM-CPU that is to be

assigned is determined by the RAID group number. Refer to "Appendix F Automatic Controlling CM-

CPU Setting" (page 1011) for details.

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→Changing controlling CM starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

During controlling CM change, the storage system status is changed from Write Back mode to Write

Through mode.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

186

6.2.5 Expand RAID Group

This function adds drives to the existing RAID group by using the Logical Device Expansion (LDE) function to

dynamically expand RAID group capacity. This function can also dynamically change the RAID type of an

existing RAID group.

RAID group expansion provides the following features without stopping the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

operation:

•RAID group expansion add disks to the existing RAID group in units of one drive. This enables capacity

expansion of RAID groups with smaller number of drive expansion.

•RAID groups can be expanded and any existing data in these RAID groups is retained.

Requirements for expanding a RAID group:

•The "Status" is " Available"

•Standard volumes, SDVs, or SDPVs are registered

•Not registered in the TPP

•Not registered in the FTRP

•Not registered as an REC Disk Buffer

•The RAID group is not blocked

•Formatting is not being performed for the volume that is registered in the RAID group

•Encryption is not being performed for the volume that is registered in the RAID group

•Storage Migration paths are not created in the volume that is registered in the RAID group

•The stripe size of the RAID group is not expanded (*1).

*1: A RAID group for which the Stripe Depth value in the [RAID Group (Basic)] screen of the [RAID Group (Basic Infor-

mation)] screen is 128KB or more. Note that the Stripe Depth value for RAID1 cannot be changed. Refer to "6.1.5

RAID Group (Basic)" (page 169) for details.

•Before expanding the RAID group, back up data in all the logical volumes in the target RAID group to a

different location. If not, data cannot be recovered when expansion fails. If expansion fails, data can be

recovered from the backed up data.

•When adding drives, use drives that have the same capacity and speed as the drives that configure the

target RAID group. If drives of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest capacity becomes

the standard for the RAID group after expansion, and all other drives are regarded as having the same

capacity as the smallest drive. In this case, the remaining drive space is not used. In addition, if drives of

different speeds exist in a RAID group, the access performance of the RAID group is reduced by the slower

drives.

•If the drives that configure the target RAID group are SSDs, SSDs must be used when adding drives.

•If the drives that configure the target RAID group are SEDs, SEDs must be used when adding drives.

•RAID group expansion can be performed when the RAID group capacity after expansion is the same or

larger than the current capacity.

•RAID group expansion can only be performed for one RAID group at a time.

•RAID group expansion cannot be suspended.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

187

The procedure to expand RAID group capacity is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the RAID group that is to be expanded and click [Expand] in [Action].

2Select the RAID type after expansion and the drives that are to be used after expansion.

Click the [Expand] button.

•RAID Type after expand

Select the RAID type after expansion is performed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Checkbox to select drives

Select the checkbox for the drive to be used.

When using the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2, the restrictions that apply to the drive layout for

RAID group configuration vary depending on the RAID type. Refer to "Restrictions of drive layout"

(page 179) for details.

•The following functions cannot be used for RAID groups in which RAID group expansion is being

performed:

-Format volume

-Create Volume

-Encrypt Volume

-RAID migration for the volume

-Expand Volume

-Preventive maintenance

-Diagnosis for RAID group

-Diagnosis for disks

•The following RAID type changes cannot be performed:

-Changing the RAID type to "Striping (RAID0)" (changing the RAID type from "Striping (RAID0)" to a dif-

ferently configured "Striping (RAID0)" is available)

-Changing the RAID type to "Reliability (RAID5+0)"

-Changing the RAID type from "Reliability (RAID5+0)"

When expanding the drive capacity that configures a RAID group, use the procedure in "5.2.7 Start RAID

Migration" (page 123) instead of this function.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

188

→A confirmation screen appears.

Requirements for selecting drives when changing the RAID type:

•When the RAID type before and after LDE is not changed, the drives that are used in the RAID

group before LDE was performed cannot be deleted.

•When the RAID type is changed after LDE:

-The number of RAID group data drives (*1) after LDE cannot be less than the number

before LDE.

*1: "Number of data drives" indicates the number of logical drives in RAID groups that contain user

data. This number is different for each RAID type, as shown below:

-Drives that are no longer used in a RAID group after changing the RAID type can be deleted.

However, not all of the drives can be deleted from a RAID group.

Drives can be selected from the list of drives that is displayed for Tabular or from the drive images

that are displayed for Graphic. Click the Tabular tab to display a list of the drives or click the Graphic

tab to display drive images.

*2: D: Data drives, M: Mirror drives, P: Parity drives

RAID type Drive configuration (*2) Number of data drives

High Performance (RAID1+0) nD+nM n

High Capacity (RAID5) nD+1P n

High Reliability (RAID6) nD+2P n

Mirroring (RAID1) 1D+1M 1

Striping (RAID0) nD n

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

189

3Click the [OK] button.

→RAID group expansion starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

6.2.6 Modify RAID Group Parameters

This function tunes the following parameters of each RAID group.

•DCMF

DCMF is a coefficient for the command issuance amount of the drive. Specify this parameter to improve the

sequential writing access performance. The bigger the value is, the more commands issue. Specify the

DCMF according to the RAID group operation.

•Rebuild Priority

Specify the level to give priority to rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy instead of host access. Specifying

a larger "Rebuild Priority" value may improve rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy performance.

•Throttle

Throttle is the proportion of the number of commands that are issued to a drive at the same time to the

maximum number of commands that can be issued. By limiting the number of commands that are issued

at the same time to the drive, the load on the specific RAID group (drive) is reduced.

•Ordered Cut

Ordered Cut is the number of commands for optimizing drive access processing (priority control). By

performing the priority control of commands in increments of the specified number, a long queue time for

low-priority commands can be eliminated.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the drive layout is incorrect

•The number of selected drives exceeds the available maximum number

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

190

The procedure to change the RAID group parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1Select which RAID groups to change the RAID group parameters for (multiple selections can

be made) and click [Modify RAID Group Parameters] in [Action].

2Specify the RAID group parameters, and click the [Modify] button.

•DCMF

Specify the DCMF between 1 - 10. The default value is "1". It is not necessary to change the default

setting for normal use.

The maximum number of commands issued to a drive is changed to a multiple represented by the

specified value. (If "DCMF" is "2", the number of commands is doubled. If "DCMF" is "3", the number

of commands is tripled.) When not changing the DCMF, select "No Change".

The higher the DCMF value is, the more drive throughput is available, improving sequential

performance. Note that high DCMF value may result in a high load on the drive, decreasing

performance.

•Rebuild Priority

Specify the rebuild priority. The default setting is "Low". It is not necessary to change the default set-

ting for normal use.

When not changing the rebuild priority, select "No Change".

When host access is not performed, rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy to RAID groups that is

not registered as REC Disk Buffers are performed with "High" priority regardless of the "Rebuild

Priority" setting.

Rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy performance may be improved by specifying a larger

"Rebuild Priority" value. Note that specifying larger "Rebuild Priority" may cause the degradation of

RAID group performance when performing rebuild, copyback, or redundant copy is performed in the

target RAID group.

•When the "Rebuild Priority" setting is changed, the priority is changed not only for a rebuild, copyback,

and redundant copy that will be performed after the setting is changed, but also for any rebuild,

copyback, and redundant copy operations that are currently being performed.

•When the target RAID group is registered as an REC Disk Buffer, do not select "High" for the "Rebuild

Priority" setting. Even if "High" is selected, rebuilding, copyback, and redundant copy are performed with

"Middle" priority during host access.

•Specify the same RAID group parameters for all of the RAID groups that configure a WSV. If different RAID

group parameters are specified, the host access performance may be reduced.

•When specifying the "Throttle " or "Ordered Cut", enable the "Disk Tuning Parameter Setting" in advance.

•RAID groups that configure a WSV can be checked in the [Volume Detail] screen ([WSV Concatenation]

Tab). Refer to "5.1.14 Volume Detail (WSV Concatenation)" (page 93) for details.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

191

-Low

Perform rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy with a normal priority.

-Middle

Give the same priority as the host access to rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy.

-High

Give priority to rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy over host access.

•Disk Tuning Parameter Setting

Specify whether to enable or disable the following disk tuning parameters.

-Throttle

-Ordered Cut

The default value varies depending on the storage system model. When using the ETERNUS DX80

S2/DX90 S2 or the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, the default setting is "Disable". When using the

ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2, the default setting is "Enable". It is not necessary to change the

default setting for normal use.

When selecting multiple RAID groups as the target of this function, the contents of display vary

depending on the setting (Enable/Disable) for each RAID group. If all the settings point to the same

state, that state is displayed. If not, "Disable" is displayed for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 or the

ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and "Enable" is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2.

•Throttle

When "Disk Tuning Parameter Setting" is enabled, specify the proportion of the number of

commands that is to be issued to a drive at the same time to the maximum number of command

issuance between 100% and 10%. The default throttle value is "100%" (the default number of

command issuance). It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use.

Specifying a low number limits the number of commands that are issued to a drive at the same

time, reducing the load for the specific RAID group (drive). This setting can be used when the

response performance of the specific RAID group (drive) is decreased due to a conflict between host

I/O or batch processes. Note that a low Throttle value decreases the number of commands that are

processed by the drive at the same time to avoid a long queue time.

•Ordered Cut

When "Disk Tuning Parameter Setting" is enabled, specify between 0 and 65535 for the number of

commands to optimize drive access processing (priority control).

The default value varies depending on the model. The default value is "0" for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/

DX90 S2 and the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and "400" for the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2.

When Ordered Cut is "x", the order is changed for every x commands based on the priority settings of

the commands. It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use.

When "Ordered Cut" is "0", the number of commands for controlling the priority cannot be specified.

All of the commands issued to the drive are processed according to their priority settings. The

Ordered Cut value cannot be used for SSDs.

Specifying a low value for Ordered Cut reduces the number of commands for priority control.

Commands with a lower priority are processed without delay. Note that by specifying a low value for

Ordered Cut, the priority control of commands is performed in increments for the specified number,

which might cause a delay in processing commands with a higher priority.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

192

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→The RAID group parameter modification starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

6.2.7 Assign ECO Mode Schedule (RAID Group)

This function applies the ECO mode schedule to the RAID groups and enables the ECO mode setting.

ECO mode is a function to reduce power consumption by stopping motor of disks that configure the RAID

group while the RAID group is not accessed from the host.

When the ECO mode schedule is applied to a RAID group, the ECO mode setting is enabled. When ECO mode is

running, disk motors are activated during the scheduled event term. During times other than the scheduled

time, disk motors are stopped.

If the RAID group is accessed from the host while the disk motors are stopped, the disk motors are activated

and can be accessed within 1 - 5 minutes.

When enabling the "Disk Tuning Parameter Setting", a confirmation screen with a warning message

appears.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

193

ECO Mode Schedule Setting ECO Mode General Setting

Enabled Disabled

Control Status

During scheduled

event term

Disk motor is activated. (ECO mode is

running)

Disk motor runs

regardless of

schedule settings.

(ECO mode is not

running)

Times other than

scheduled event

term

Disk motor is stopped. (ECO mode is

running)

If the RAID group is accessed, disk motors

are activated within 1 - 5 minutes.

OFF The target disk motor is operating

constantly. (ECO mode is not running)

Schedule is not applied Disk motor is operating constantly. (ECO

mode is not running)

Disks not registered in the RAID groups Disk motor is stopped constantly. (ECO

mode is running)

•Before applying ECO mode for RAID groups, use the procedure in "11.2.8.1 Modify ECO Mode General

Setting" (page 869) to enable the ECO mode setting for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•Set the ECO mode schedule using the procedure in "11.2.8.4 Modify ECO Mode Schedule" (page 876).

•ECO mode is not available for the following RAID groups:

-No volumes are created

-A Storage Migration path is created in the volume

-Configured by SSDs

-Registered as an REC Disk Buffer

•RAID groups to which the Snap Data Pool Volumes (SDPVs) belong cannot be selected as the target for

disk motor management by the ECO mode.

•When using ECO mode, make sure to set the time/date correctly. If the time/date of the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system is wrong, processes used for stopping and starting the disk motor cannot be performed

per the ECO mode schedule.

•If any of the following conditions occur even when the disk motor is inactive, the disk motor is activated.

The ECO mode schedule is re-enabled when the conditions listed have finished.

-When the target RAID group status is not " Available"

-When performing functions that change the RAID group or the volume configuration

-When performing rebuild or copyback in the target RAID group

-When LDE is being performed in the RAID group

-When formatting is being performed in the volumes registered in the RAID group

-When RAID migration is being performed in the volumes registered in the RAID group

-When Advanced Copy is being performed in the volume registered in the RAID group (copy session

status is not "Suspend" or "Tracking")

-When encryption is being performed in the volumes registered in the RAID group

-During maintenance

-When performing disk diagnosis, RAID group diagnosis, or when exporting G-List

-Module error related to access path to the Controller Modules and drives is detected

•Specify the same ECO mode schedule for all of the RAID groups that configure a WSV. If a different ECO

mode schedule is specified, activation of a stopped drive is required to accept the host access, and the

performance of the response may be reduced.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

194

The procedure to set ECO mode schedule for the RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the RAID group to apply the ECO mode schedule (multiple selections can be made) to

and click [Assign ECO Mode] in [Action].

2Select the ECO mode schedule that is to be applied, select whether to enable ("ON") or

disable ("OFF") ECO mode, and then click the [Assign] button.

•ECO Mode Schedule

Select the ECO mode schedule that is to be applied.

-No Change

Do not change the current setting.

-Disable

Disable the ECO mode.

-ECO mode schedule name

Apply the selected ECO mode schedule.

•ECO Mode Action

Select whether to enable ("ON") or disable ("OFF") the ECO mode setting. Select "No Change" to use

the current setting.

-No Change

Do not change the current setting.

-ON

Enable the ECO mode.

-OFF

Disable the ECO mode.

→A confirmation screen appears.

•When selecting multiple RAID groups as the target of the ECO mode, the same ECO mode schedule can be

specified for all the selected RAID groups.

•RAID groups that configure a WSV can be checked in the [Volume Detail] screen ([WSV Concatenation]

Tab). Refer to "5.1.14 Volume Detail (WSV Concatenation)" (page 93) for details.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

195

3Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the ECO mode schedule starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

6.2.8 Set Key Group (RAID Group)

This function registers or deletes any RAID groups that are configured with SEDs in the key group.

The key group combines all of the RAID groups that use the same SED authentication key.

RAID groups in the key group are managed by the SED authentication key that is obtained from the key

server. One key group can be created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

If a RAID group is not registered in the key group, the RAID group is managed by the common key.

When registering RAID groups in the key group, perform the following settings:

•Create a key group.

•Allocate the master server or the slave server to the key group.

•Set the key for the key group and confirm that the key status is "Normal".

Refer to "11.2.6.6 Create Key Group" (page 841) and "11.2.6.9 Update SED Authentication Key" (page 849)

for details.

•Information on the RAID groups that are configured by SEDs and registration status to the key group can

be checked in the [SED Key Group] screen. Refer to "6.1.4 SED Key Group" (page 167) for details.

•Use the [Key Group] screen to check the SED authentication key information and the SSL/KMIP certificate

information that is used for the key group. Refer to "11.1.5.1 Key Group" (page 723) for details.

•Even when operations are being performed for volumes that configure a key management target RAID

group, this RAID group can be added to or deleted from the key group.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

196

The procedure to register or delete the RAID groups in the key group is as follows:

Procedure

1Select which RAID group to add to or delete from the key group (multiple selections can be

made), and click [Set Key Group] in [Action].

2Select the key group setting status, and click the [Set] button.

■When adding RAID groups

•Key Group

To add RAID groups, select "Enable".

If multiple RAID groups are selected, all the selected RAID groups are added in a single process.

■When deleting RAID groups

•Key Group

To delete RAID groups, select "Disable".

If multiple RAID groups are selected, all the selected RAID groups are deleted in a single process.

→A confirmation screen appears.

Settings for the selected RAID groups are applied in a single process. To add or delete multiple RAID

groups, only select the RAID groups that are to be added or deleted (do not select all of the RAID

groups).

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

197

3Click the [OK] button.

→Key group setting starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [SED Key Group] screen.

End of procedure

6.2.9 Recovery SED

This function recovers the RAID groups that are in locked status.

"Locked status" indicates that the RAID group is blocked because the SED authentication key could not be

obtained from the key server.

Conditions that can be recovered by using the "Recovery SED" function

•Locked status when enabling or forcibly enabling a disk

•Locked status when forcibly recovering or forcibly enabling a RAID group

•Locked status when recovering from DE failure

•Locked status when applying disk firmware

•Locked status when starting an operation after a disk has been stopped by the ECO mode

•Locked status when communication with the key server failed when starting or rebooting the ETERNUS DX

Disk storage system

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•If there is a RAID group with a status other than " Available"

•If the status of the key in the key group is not "Normal", "Expiration", or "Modifying"

•If "Enable" is selected but no key group has been created

•If no master or slave server is applied to the key group when "Enable" is selected

This function can only be used to recover locked RAID groups. This function cannot be used for recovering

blocked RAID groups that occur due to errors that are not listed above. Recovery operation of RAID groups for

which the status is " Broken" can be performed by using the [Recover RAID Group] function. Note that the

[Recover RAID Group] function can be performed by a maintenance engineer who has the "Maintenance

Operation" policy.

Chapter 6 RAID Group Management

6.2 Functions in the Action Area for RAID Group

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

198

The procedure to recover RAID groups that are in the locked status is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Recovery SED] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Recovery of the SED starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [SED Key Group] screen.

End of procedure

•SED recovery from locked status is performed according to the "Recovery Mode" setting of the key group.

The "Recovery Mode" setting can be checked in the [Key Group] screen. Refer to "11.1.5.1 Key Group"

(page 723) for details.

-When "Recovery Mode" is "Auto", the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system monitors the RAID group

periodically. If a locked RAID group is detected, recovery is performed on the RAID group by the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system automatically.

-When "Recovery Mode" is "Manual", use this function to manually recover the locked RAID group.

•"Recovery Mode" can be specified when creating a key group. Refer to "11.2.6.6 Create Key Group" (page

841) for details.

•This function can be used even if a key group is not created or no locked RAID groups are exist. If there are

no locked RAID groups that can be recovered, this function completes successfully.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

199

Chapter 7

Thin Provisioning Pool Management

This chapter describes Thin Provisioning Pool management.

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pool status displays the status information of volumes.

Thin Provisioning Pool status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Detailed information of the Thin Provisioning Pools can be displayed from the following screen:

•Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)

•Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Basic)

•Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)

•Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Volume)

•Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (Basic)

Thin Provisioning Pool status screen Category

Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information) Thin Provisioning Pools

Threshold (Thin Provisioning Pool) Threshold

ECO Mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool) ECO Mode Schedule

License (Thin Provisioning) License

Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information) Flexible Tier Pools

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

200

7.1.1 Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)

This function shows the list of TPPs.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The TPP number is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "7.1.6 Thin Provisioning Pool

Detail (Basic)" (page 209).

•Name

The TPP name is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "7.1.6 Thin Provisioning Pool

Detail (Basic)" (page 209).

•Registering the license for the Thin Provisioning feature is required to use the Thin Provisioning function.

To check the registration status of the license, refer to "7.1.4 License (Thin Provisioning)" (page 206).

•When " Attention" or " Warning" is displayed in "Used Status" in the TPP list, the TPP used capacity

exceeds the threshold. Add drives immediately to expand the TPP capacity.

•This function displays the TPP basic information, a list of the RAID groups that configure the TPP, and a list

of the TPVs that are registered in the TPP.

•To check the threshold for monitoring the used capacity of a TPP, refer to "7.1.2 Threshold (Thin

Provisioning Pool)" (page 202).

•To check the ECO mode settings of a TPP, refer to "7.1.3 ECO Mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

(page 203).

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

201

•Disk Type

The type of drive that configures the TPP is displayed.

-Online

SAS disks

-Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

-SSD

-SED

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group that configures the TPP is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

• Status

The TPP status is displayed. Refer to "B.4 Thin Provisioning Pool Status" (page 976) for detailed information

of TPP status.

•Used Status

The usage of TPP is displayed.

- Normal

TPP usage does not exceed the "Attention" threshold.

- Attention

TPP usage exceeds the "Attention" threshold but does not exceed the "Warning" threshold.

- Warning

TPP usage exceeds the "Warning" threshold.

•Encryption

The TPP encryption status is displayed.

-CM

The TPP that is encrypted by CM.

-"-" (hyphen)

The TPP that is not encrypted.

-SED

The TPP that is encrypted by SED.

Filter setting

Filter Description

Name Input the TPP name that is to be displayed.

When not using the TPP name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Disk Type Select the disk type that is to be displayed.

RAID Type Select the RAID type that is to be displayed.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

202

7.1.2 Threshold (Thin Provisioning Pool)

This function shows the threshold for monitoring the used capacity of a Thin Provisioning Pool.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The TPP number is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "7.1.6 Thin Provisioning Pool

Detail (Basic)" (page 209).

•Name

The TPP name is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "7.1.6 Thin Provisioning Pool

Detail (Basic)" (page 209).

•Disk Type

The type of drive that configures the TPP is displayed.

-Online

SAS disks

-Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

-SSD

-SED

Registering the license for the Thin Provisioning feature is required to use Thin Provisioning function. To

check the registration status of the license, refer to "7.1.4 License (Thin Provisioning)" (page 206).

•If the TPP used capacity exceeds the threshold, notification is sent to the destination for REMCS (REMote

Customer Support system) center, SNMP Trap, E-Mail or syslog that was specified using the procedure in

"11.2.9.1 Setup Event Notification" (page 880).

•To change the threshold of a TPP, follow the procedure that is provided in "7.2.7 Modify Threshold Thin

Provisioning Pool" (page 239).

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

203

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group that configures the TPP is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Status

The TPP status is displayed. Refer to "B.4 Thin Provisioning Pool Status" (page 976) for detailed information

of TPP status.

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of TPP is displayed.

•Used Capacity

The used capacity of TPP is displayed.

•Warning

The warning threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity is displayed.

•Attention

The attention threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity is displayed. When the "Attention"

threshold is omitted, "0%" is displayed.

•MWC

Multi Writeback Count (MWC) of the TPP is displayed.

Filter setting

7.1.3 ECO Mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

This function displays the ECO mode setting status of the Thin Provisioning Pool.

Filter Description

Name Input the TPP name that is to be displayed.

When not using the TPP name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Disk Type Select the disk type that is to be displayed.

RAID Type Select the RAID type that is to be displayed.

Registering the license for the Thin Provisioning feature is required to use the Thin Provisioning function. To

check the registration status of the license, refer to "7.1.4 License (Thin Provisioning)" (page 206).

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

204

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The TPP number is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "7.1.6 Thin Provisioning Pool

Detail (Basic)" (page 209).

•Name

The TPP name is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "7.1.6 Thin Provisioning Pool

Detail (Basic)" (page 209).

•Disk Type

The type of drive that configures the TPP is displayed.

-Online

SAS disks

-Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

-SED

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group that configures the TPP is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Status

The TPP status is displayed. Refer to "B.4 Thin Provisioning Pool Status" (page 976) for detailed information

of TPP status.

•To use the ECO mode, follow the procedure in "11.2.8.1 Modify ECO Mode General Setting" (page 869)

and "11.2.8.2 Create ECO Mode Schedule" (page 871) to perform the general ECO mode setup and create

an ECO mode schedule.

•To assign the ECO mode to a TPP, refer to "7.2.9 Assign ECO Mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

(page 242).

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

205

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of TPP is displayed.

•ECO Mode Schedule

The ECO mode schedule that is assigned to the TPP is displayed.

If the ECO mode schedule is not assigned, the field is blank.

•ECO Mode Action

When the ECO mode is enabled in TPP, "ON" is displayed. If the ECO mode is disabled, "OFF" is displayed.

If the ECO mode is not assigned, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Motor Status

The disk motor status for the TPP is displayed.

-Active

The disk motors are activated.

-In the Boot Process

The disk motors are starting up.

-Idle

The disk motors are stopped.

-In the Stop Process

The disk motors are being stopped.

Filter setting

Filter Description

Name Input the TPP name that is to be displayed.

When not using the TPP name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Disk Type Select the disk type that is to be displayed.

RAID Type Select the RAID type that is to be displayed.

ECO Mode Schedule Select the ECO mode schedule that is to be displayed.

Action Select the action that is to be displayed.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

206

7.1.4 License (Thin Provisioning)

The registration status of the Thin Provisioning license is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Status

The registration status of the Thin Provisioning license is displayed.

-Registered

-Not Registered

Registering the license for the Thin Provisioning feature is required to use Thin Provisioning function.

Registering or deleting the Thin Provisioning license can be performed depending on the license registration

status. To register the license, refer to "7.2.10 Register Thin Provisioning License" (page 245). To delete the

license, refer to "7.2.11 Delete Thin Provisioning License" (page 247).

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

207

7.1.5 Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)

This function shows the list of Flexible Tier Pools (FTRPs).

•To use the Flexible Tier function (auto storage layering), the following operations are required:

-Registering the license for the Thin Provisioning feature is required to use the Thin Provisioning

function. To check the registration status of the license, refer to "7.1.4 License (Thin Provisioning)"

(page 206).

-Register the Optimization option for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

-Create the Flexible Tier Pools (FTRPs), Flexible Tier Sub Pools (FTSPs), and the Flexible Tier Volumes

(FTVs), using the ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

•When " Attention" or " Warning" is displayed in "Used Status" in the FTRP list, the FTRP used

capacity exceeds the threshold. Immediately add drives and use ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser to expand

the capacity of the appropriate FTSP (for which expansion is determined to be necessary based upon the

performance and used capacity).

•If the target FTRP does not exist when displaying the details screen, a message, " Target is Not Found."

is displayed.

•The required policy for the [Format Flexible Tier Pool (All Area)] function and the [Format Flexible Tier

Pool (Unformatted Area)] function is changed from "RAID Group Management" to "Maintenance

Operation" with controller firmware V10L40. To format the Flexible Tier Pool with an ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system that has controller firmware version V10L40 or later, ask a maintenance engineer who has

the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

This function displays a basic FTRP information, a list of FTSPs which belong to the FTRP, a list of RAID groups

which configure the FTSP, and a list of FTVs which have been registered to the FTRP.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

208

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The FTRP number is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "7.1.7 Flexible Tier Pool Detail

(Basic)" (page 212).

-ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2: 0 - 29

-ETERNUS DX410 S2: 0 - 59

-ETERNUS DX440 S2: 0 - 63

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 11

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 63

•Name

The FTRP name is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "7.1.7 Flexible Tier Pool Detail

(Basic)" (page 212).

• Status

The FTRP status is displayed. Refer to "B.4 Thin Provisioning Pool Status" (page 976) for detailed

information of FTRP status.

•Used Status

The usage of FTRP is displayed.

- Normal

FTRP usage does not exceed the "Attention" threshold.

- Attention

FTRP usage exceeds the "Attention" threshold but does not exceed the "Warning" threshold.

- Warning

FTRP usage exceeds the "Warning" threshold.

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of FTRP is displayed.

•Used Capacity

The used capacity of FTRP is displayed.

•Warning

The warning threshold (%) for monitoring the FTRP used capacity is displayed.

•Attention

The attention threshold (%) for monitoring the FTRP used capacity is displayed. When the "Attention"

threshold is omitted, "0%" is displayed.

•Encryption

The FTRP encryption status is displayed.

-CM

The FTRP that is encrypted by CM.

-"-" (hyphen)

The FTRP that is not encrypted.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

209

•Balancing Level

The balancing level of the FTRP is displayed.

If multiple FTSPs exists in the FTRP, the lowest balancing level among the FTSPs is displayed. A "-" (hyphen)

is displayed when the physically allocated capacity cannot be checked due to the storage system status or

when the balancing level cannot be obtained due to the FTRP status (*1).

-High

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups in the FTSP is equalized.

-Middle

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups in the FTSP is slightly unequal.

-Low

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups in the FTSP is significantly unequal.

•Balancing Process

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when FTRP balancing is not being performed, when the physically allocated

capacity cannot be checked due to the storage system status, or when the balancing level cannot be

obtained due to the FTRP status (*1).

-Status

The balancing status of the FTRP is displayed.

•Active

All of the FTVs in the FTRP are either reserved or operating normally.

•Error

An FTV in error status exists in the FTRP.

-Error Code

The error code of FTRP balancing is displayed when an error occurs.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if no errors occur.

*1: The status of the FTRP is not " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

7.1.6 Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the "7.1.1 Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 200) to

display the corresponding Thin Provisioning Pool Details screen.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

210

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Disk Type

The type of drive that configures the TPP is displayed.

-Online:

SAS disks

-Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

-SSD

-SED

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group that configures the TPP is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Status

The TPP status is displayed. Refer to "B.4 Thin Provisioning Pool Status" (page 976) for detailed information

of TPP status.

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of TPP is displayed.

•Used Capacity

The used capacity of TPP is displayed.

•Used Status

The usage of TPP is displayed.

- Normal

TPP usage does not exceed the "Attention" threshold.

- Attention

TPP usage exceeds the "Attention" threshold but does not exceed the "Warning" threshold.

- Warning

TPP usage exceeds the "Warning" threshold.

•Warning

The TPP physical capacity "xxx", which is converted based on the TPP warning threshold, and the threshold

(yy%) are displayed.

•Attention

The TPP physical capacity "xxx", which is converted based on the TPP attention threshold, and the

threshold (yy%) are displayed.

When the attention threshold is omitted, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

211

•Encryption

The TPP encryption status is displayed.

-CM

The TPP that is encrypted by CM.

-"-" (hyphen)

The TPP that is not encrypted.

-SED

The TPP that is encrypted by SED.

•MWC

Multi Writeback Count (MWC) of the TPP is displayed.

•Usage

"TPV" is displayed when a TPV is registered in the TPP.

If there are no TPVs in the Thin Provisioning Pool, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•ECO Mode Schedule

The ECO mode schedule that is assigned to the TPP is displayed.

If the ECO mode schedule is not specified, the field is blank.

•Process

A process that is being performed for the TPP is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen)

is displayed.

•Progress

The progress rate for the TPP is displayed.

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Stripe Depth

The Stripe Depth value (*1) for the RAID groups that configures the TPP is displayed.

If the RAID type is "Mirroring (RAID1)", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

*1: The number of logical blocks that are assigned to a drive for each stripe when configuring a stripe volume in a

RAID group. Normally, it is 64KB.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

212

7.1.7 Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Basic)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the "7.1.5 Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)" (page 207) to

display the detailed information of the corresponding FTRP.

Click the [Basic] tab on the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail] to display the basic information of the corresponding

FTRP.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Status

The FTRP status is displayed. Refer to "B.4 Thin Provisioning Pool Status" (page 976) for detailed

information of FTRP status.

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of FTRP is displayed.

•Used Capacity

The used capacity of FTRP is displayed.

•Used Status

The usage of FTRP is displayed.

- Normal

FTRP usage does not exceed the "Attention" threshold.

- Attention

FTRP usage exceeds the "Attention" threshold but does not exceed the "Warning" threshold.

- Warning

FTRP usage exceeds the "Warning" threshold.

•Warning

The FTRP physical capacity "xxx", which is converted based on the FTRP warning threshold, and the

threshold (yy%) are displayed.

•Attention

The FTRP physical capacity "xxx", which is converted based on the FTRP attention threshold, and the

threshold (yy%) are displayed.

When the attention threshold is omitted, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

213

•Encryption

The FTRP encryption status is displayed.

-CM

The FTRP that is encrypted by CM.

-"-" (hyphen)

The FTRP that is not encrypted.

•Process

A process that is being performed for the FTRP is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen)

is displayed.

•Progress

The progress rate for the FTRP is displayed.

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Balancing Level

The balancing level of the FTRP is displayed.

If multiple FTSPs exists in the FTRP, the lowest balancing level among the FTSPs is displayed. A "-" (hyphen)

is displayed when the physically allocated capacity cannot be checked due to the storage system status or

when the balancing level cannot be obtained due to the FTRP status (*1).

-High

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups in the FTSP is equalized.

-Middle

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups in the FTSP is slightly unequal.

-Low

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups in the FTSP is significantly unequal.

•Balancing Process

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when FTRP balancing is not being performed, when the physically allocated

capacity cannot be checked due to the storage system status, or when the balancing level cannot be

obtained due to the FTRP status (*1).

-Status

The balancing status of the FTRP is displayed.

•Active

All of the FTVs in the FTRP are either reserved or operating normally

•Error

An FTV in error status exists in the FTRP

-Progress

The lowest progress rate among the FTV balancing sessions that are being performed in the FTRP is

displayed.

-Error Code

The error code of FTRP balancing is displayed when an error occurs.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if no errors occur.

*1: The status of the FTRP is not " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

214

7.1.8 Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the "7.1.5 Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)" (page 207) to

display the corresponding Flexible Tier Pool Details screen.

Click the [Flexible Tier Sub Pool] tab on the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail] to display a list of Flexible Tier Sub Pools

(FTSPs) that are registered in the corresponding FTRP. When no volumes are registered in the FTRP, only the

item name is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The FTSP number is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "7.1.10 Flexible Tier Sub Pool

Detail (Basic)" (page 217).

•Name

The FTSP name is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "7.1.10 Flexible Tier Sub Pool

Detail (Basic)" (page 217).

•Status

The FTSP status is displayed. Refer to "B.4 Thin Provisioning Pool Status" (page 976) for detailed

information of FTSP status.

•Disk Type

The type of drive that configures the FTSP is displayed.

-Online

SAS disks

-Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

-SSD

-SED

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group that configures the FTSP is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

215

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of FTSP is displayed.

•Used Capacity

The used capacity of FTSP is displayed.

•Balancing Level

The balancing level of the FTSP is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the physically allocated capacity cannot be checked due to the storage

system status or when the balancing level cannot be obtained due to the FTRP status (*1).

*1: The status of the FTRP is not " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

-High

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups is equalized.

-Middle

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups is slightly unequal.

-Low

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups is significantly unequal.

7.1.9 Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Volume)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the "7.1.5 Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)" (page 207) to

display the corresponding Flexible Tier Pool Details screen.

Click the [Volume] tab on the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail] to display a list of volumes that are registered in the

corresponding FTRP. Up to 100 volumes are displayed in a page. When no volumes are registered in the FTRP,

only the item name is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•No.

The volume number is displayed.

•Name

The volume name is displayed.

• Status

The volume status is displayed. Refer to "B.2 Volume Status" (page 974) for detailed information of volume

status.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

216

•Type

The volume type is displayed.

This volume list displays only the volumes whose type is "FTV".

•FTSP Priority

The FTSP number, to which a volume is assigned on a priority basis in the FTRP, is displayed. When the

setting is omitted, "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2: 0 - 119

-ETERNUS DX410 S2: 0 - 239

-ETERNUS DX440 S2: 0 - 255

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 47

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 255

•Capacity

The total volume capacity is displayed.

•Used Capacity

The used capacity of the volume is displayed.

•Used Status

The usage of the volume is displayed.

- Normal

The volume usage does not exceed the "Attention" threshold.

- Attention

The volume usage exceeds the "Attention" threshold but does not exceed the "Warning" threshold.

Volume usage is determined by the ratio of "Free space in the FTRP to which the volume belongs" and

"Non-allocated volume capacity × Threshold [%]".

•Measurements

The FTRP free space status for each volume is displayed.

The measurement value is calculated by using the following formula: (truncate after the decimal point)

A high measurement value indicates that there is more free space in the volume.

-When the measurement value is larger than 500, ">500" is displayed.

-When the measurement value is smaller than 1, "0" is displayed.

-When the non-allocated volume capacity value is "0", "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-When the status of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is "Not Ready", "?" is displayed.

•Attention

The attention threshold (%) for monitoring the volume used capacity is displayed.

Measurements = FTRP Free Capacity / Non-allocated volume capacity

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

217

7.1.10 Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (Basic)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the "7.1.8 Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)" (page

214) to display the corresponding Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail screen.

Click the [Basic] tab on the [Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail] to display the basic information of the

corresponding FTSP.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Status

The FTSP status is displayed. Refer to "B.4 Thin Provisioning Pool Status" (page 976) for detailed

information of FTSP status.

•Disk Type

The type of drive that configures the FTSP is displayed.

-Online

SAS disks

-Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

-SSD

-SED

•RAID Type

The type of RAID group that configures the FTSP is displayed.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

-High Capacity (RAID5)

-High Reliability (RAID6)

-Mirroring (RAID1)

-Striping (RAID0)

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of FTSP is displayed.

•Used Capacity

The used capacity of FTSP is displayed.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

218

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in

the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for Thin Provisioning can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for Thin Provisioning Display function

Create Thin Provisioning Pool •Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)

Delete Thin Provisioning Pool

Rename Thin Provisioning Pool

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

Format Thin Provisioning Pool (All Area)

Format Thin Provisioning Pool (Unformatted Area)

Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool •Threshold (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Assign ECO Mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool) •ECO Mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Delete Thin Provisioning License

Start Balancing Flexible Tier Pool •Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)

•Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Basic)

•Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)

Stop Balancing Flexible Tier Pool

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

219

7.2.1 Create Thin Provisioning Pool

This function creates a Thin Provisioning Pool.

The maximum number of TPP and maximum TPP capacity for each model

*1: Up to 256 TPPs can be created. When the maximum installation number of drives of a model is 512 or less, the

maximum number of TPPs is half the maximum installation number of drives.

There are two methods to create a TPP: automatic drive selection and manual drive selection.

Model Maximum Number of TPP (*1) Maximum TPP Capacity (TB)

ETERNUS DX80 S2 60 128

ETERNUS DX90 S2 120 128

ETERNUS DX410 S2 240 384

ETERNUS DX440 S2 256 768

ETERNUS DX8100 S2 256 768

ETERNUS DX8700 S2 256 1024

•Registering the license for the Thin Provisioning feature is required to create TPP.

•When encryption mode is disabled, TPP encrypted by CM cannot be created.

•Once a TPP has been created, the encryption status cannot be changed.

•TPPs cannot be created in the following conditions:

-When the maximum number of Thin Provisioning Pools are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

-When the maximum capacity of Thin Provisioning Pools are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

-When the resources for creating TPPs (such as the number of RAID groups, the number of volumes,

etc.) are insufficient

(When the maximum number of RAID groups or volumes already exist, TPP cannot be created)

•After a TPP is created, the TPP is formatted automatically. To check the format progress, refer to "7.1.1

Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 200).

•To expand the TPP capacity after a TPP is created, refer to "7.2.4 Expand Thin Provisioning Pool" (page

231).

•To rename the TPP after a TPP is created, refer to "7.2.3 Rename Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 229).

•To change the TPP threshold after a TPP is created, refer to "7.2.7 Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning

Pool" (page 239).

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

220

■Automatically selecting drives to create TPPs

To create a new TPP automatically, select Disk Type, RAID Type, and input TPP capacity. The controlling CM of

the RAID groups that configure the TPP is determined automatically.

The procedure to create a TPP by selecting drives automatically is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Create] in [Action].

2Select "Automatic" for the create mode, specify the other parameters, and click the [Create]

button.

•Name

Input a TPP name. An existing TPP name cannot be specified.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

•Disk Type

Select the type of drive that configures the TPP from the list box.

-Online

SAS disks

-Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

-SSD

-SED

•RAID Type

Select the type of RAID group that configures the TPP from the list box.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

RAID1+0(2D+2M, 4D+4M, 8D+8M, 12D+12M) configuration is available

-High Capacity (RAID5)

RAID5(3D+1P, 4D+1P, 7D+1P, 8D+1P, 12D+1P) configuration is available

-High Reliability (RAID6)

RAID6(4D+2P, 6D+2P, 8D+2P) configuration is available

-Mirroring (RAID1)

RAID1(1D+1M) configuration is available

-Striping (RAID0)

RAID0(4D) configuration is available

•"Striping (RAID0)" has no data redundancy. Select "High Performance (RAID1+0)", "High

Capacity (RAID5)", "High Reliability (RAID6)" or "Mirroring (RAID1)" for the RAID Type.

•The number of RAID groups that configure a TPP is automatically determined by the selected

disk type, the RAID type, the specified total capacity of the Thin Provisioning Pool, and the

drives that are installed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

221

•Thin Provisioning Pool Total Capacity

Input a TPP capacity using numeric characters. Select the capacity unit from "TB" or "GB".

A TPP is automatically created with a capacity of the entered value or higher. Refer to "The

maximum number of TPP and maximum TPP capacity for each model" (page 219) for details on the

maximum TPP capacity.

•Encryption by CM

Select the TPP encryption status with the radio button. When the encryption mode is disabled, "On"

cannot be selected.

-On

Encryption by CM

-Off

Unencrypted

•Threshold (%)

Specify the threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity.

There are two types of threshold: "Warning" and "Attention". Specify the threshold so that "Warning"

is the same or larger than "Attention". The "Attention" threshold can be omitted. When omitting the

"Attention" threshold, clear the checkbox.

The following input conditions apply:

-Warning threshold: "5" - "99"

-Attention threshold: "5" - "80"

→A confirmation screen appears.

•An error screen appears in the following conditions:

-When the "Name" field is not input

-When the "Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

-When the "Name" already exists

-When the "Thin Provisioning Pool Total Capacity" field is not input

-When the total value of TPP capacity to be created and existing TPP capacity exceeds the

maximum TPP capacity for each model

-When a TPP that meets the specified conditions (disk type, RAID type, and capacity that is

equal to or larger than the specified value) cannot be created with the installed drives in the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

222

3Click the [OK] button.

→Create Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

■Manually selecting drives to create Thin Provisioning Pool

To create a new TPP manually, select Disk Type, RAID Type, and the drive that configures the TPP.

The number of member drives in each RAID group

The number of member drives for each RAID type is listed in the following table.

•Specify the threshold so that "Warning" is the same or larger than "Attention".

•The "Attention" threshold can be omitted. When setting the "Attention" threshold, specify a

threshold while the checkbox is selected.

RAID Type Number of member drives

High Performance (RAID1+0) 4, 8, 16, 24

High Capacity (RAID5) 4, 5, 8, 9, 13

High Reliability (RAID6) 6, 8, 10

Mirroring (RAID1) 2

Striping (RAID0) 4

•The conditions for RAID groups in the TPP are as follows:

-The RAID type (High Performance (RAID1+0)/High Capacity (RAID5)/High Reliability (RAID6)/

Mirroring (RAID1)/Striping (RAID0)) must be the same

-The number of member drives in the RAID group must be the same

-The disk type (Online/Nearline/SSD/SED) must be the same

When "Online" is selected for "Disk Type", three types of RAID group can be registered in the TPP. The

three available types are a RAID group that is configured with "Online" disks, a RAID group that is con-

figured with "Nearline" disks, and a RAID group that is configured with both "Online" disks and Near-

line" disks. In this case, registering RAID groups that are only configured with "Online" disks is

recommended to prevent any reduction of TPP access performance.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

223

The procedure to create a TPP by selecting drives manually is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Create] in [Action].

2Select "Manual" for the create mode, and specify the other parameters.

•Name

Input a TPP name. An existing TPP name cannot be specified.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Spaces

•Disk Type

Select the type of drive that configures the TPP from the list box. The drives that are installed in the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed. When "Online" is selected for "Disk Type", "Online" or

"Nearline" disks can be selected. In this case, only the use of "Online" disks to configure a TPP is rec-

ommended.

-Online

SAS disks

-Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

-SSD

-SED

•RAID Type

Select the type of RAID group that configures the TPP from the list box. The installed drive deter-

mine the selectable RAID types that are displayed as options.

-High Performance (RAID1+0)

RAID1+0(2D+2M, 4D+4M, 8D+8M, 12D+12M) configuration is available

-High Capacity (RAID5)

RAID5(3D+1P, 4D+1P, 7D+1P, 8D+1P, 12D+1P) configuration is available

-High Reliability (RAID6)

RAID6(4D+2P, 6D+2P, 8D+2P) configuration is available

-Mirroring (RAID1)

RAID1(1D+1M) configuration is available

•The following shows the recommended drive configuration of the RAID group:

-Select drives with the same capacity. If drives of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest

drive becomes the standard, and all other drives are regarded as the same capacity as the smallest

drive. In this case, the remaining drive space will NOT be used.

-Select drives with the same speed. If drives of different speed exist in a RAID group, access

performance of the RAID group may be affected.

-When "High Performance (RAID1+0)" or "Mirroring (RAID1)" is selected for the RAID type, locate the

drives (mirroring pair drives) divided into different lines (for ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2).

-When "High Capacity (RAID5)" or "High Reliability (RAID6)" is selected for the RAID type, locate the

drives (striping multiple drives) divided into two or more lines (for ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2).

•When using the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2, the restrictions that apply to the drive layout for RAID

group configuration. Refer to "Restrictions of drive layout" (page 179) for details.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

224

-Striping (RAID0)

RAID0(4D) configuration is available

•Thin Provisioning Pool Total Capacity

Total capacity of the TPP created with the selected RAID type and drives is displayed.

Refer to "The maximum number of TPP and maximum TPP capacity for each model" (page 219) for

details on the maximum TPP capacity.

•Encryption by CM

Select the TPP encryption status with the radio button. When the encryption mode is disabled, "On"

cannot be selected.

-On

Encryption by CM

-Off

Unencrypted

•Alarm

Specify the threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity.

There are two types of threshold: "Warning" and "Attention". Specify the threshold so that "Warning"

is the same or larger than "Attention". The "Attention" threshold can be omitted. When omitting the

"Attention" threshold, clear the checkbox.

The following input conditions apply:

-Warning threshold: "5" - "99"

-Attention threshold: "5" - "80"

●Advanced Settings

Specify the Stripe Depth only when performing the advanced performance tuning for each RAID

group that configures a TPP. It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use.

The higher the Stripe Depth value, the lower the number of drives that access the RAID group. If

"High Performance (RAID1+0)" is used, the number of commands that are issued for the drives is

reduced and access performance for the relevant RAID group is improved. Note that for "High Capac-

ity (RAID5)", a high Stripe Depth value may reduce the sequential write performance. Also note that

restrictions apply for RAID groups and volumes in the RAID group for which Stripe Depth value is

changed. Refer to "Restrictions for Stripe Depth modification" (page 228) for details.

-Stripe Depth

Select the Stripe Depth of RAID group that is to be created.

When the "RAID Type" is "Mirroring (RAID1)", this setting is not available. When the "RAID Type"

is "High Reliability (RAID6)", the value is fixed to "64KB". Available Stripe Depth value varies

depending on the RAID type. Refer to "Available Stripe Depth value" (page 228) for details.

•Refer to "The number of member drives in each RAID group" (page 222) for details on the number

of member drives for each RAID type.

•"Striping (RAID0)" has no data redundancy. Select "High Performance (RAID1+0)", "High Capacity

(RAID5)", "High Reliability (RAID6)" or "Mirroring (RAID1)" for the RAID type.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

225

3Click the [Add] button, and set the information of the RAID group that configures the TPP.

4Select the controlling CM of the RAID group and all the drives to be registered in the RAID

group, and click the [OK] button.

•Controlling CM

Select the controlling CM and CPU of the RAID group that is to be created.

"Automatic" and the installed "CM#x CPU#y" in normal status are displayed as options.

-Automatic

-CM#x CPU#y (x: CM number, y: CPU number)

Select "Automatic" for normal operations. When "Automatic" is selected, the CM-CPU that is to be

assigned is determined by the RAID group number. Refer to "Appendix F Automatic Controlling CM-

CPU Setting" (page 1011) for details.

•Drive Selection

Select the checkbox for the drive to be selected.

When using the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2, the restrictions that apply to the drive layout for

RAID group configuration vary depending on the RAID type. Refer to "Restrictions of drive layout"

(page 179) for details.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

226

→The screen returns to the previous screen. The created RAID group is displayed in the RAID group list.

5When creating multiple RAID groups that configure a TPP, repeat Step 3 and Step 4.

Drives can be selected from the list of drives that is displayed for Tabular or from the drive images that

are displayed for Graphic. Click the Tabular tab to display a list of the drives or click the Graphic tab to

display drive images.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the number of selected drives and the number of member drives of the specified RAID type

do not match

•When the number of selected drives and the number of member drives of the existing RAID group

do not match

•To check the number of member drives of the RAID group, click the [RAID Type] link for the existing

RAID group. The drives with the checkbox selected in the displayed screen are the member of the

RAID group.

•Click the [RAID Type] link to change the controlling CM and configuration drives of the RAID group.

•Click the [Delete] button to delete a RAID group.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

227

6After creating a RAID group that configures the TPP, click the [Create] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

7Click the [OK] button.

→Create Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

8Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Name" field is not input

•When the "Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Name" already exists

•When the total value of TPP capacity to be created and existing TPP capacity exceeds the

maximum TPP capacity for each model

•When the "Stripe Depth" value is a value other than the available value for each RAID type.

•Specify the threshold so that "Warning" is the same or larger than "Attention".

•The "Attention" threshold can be omitted. When setting the "Attention" threshold, specify a

threshold while the checkbox is selected.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

228

Available Stripe Depth value

The following table shows the available Stripe Depth value for each RAID type.

Restrictions for Stripe Depth modification

The following restrictions are applied for RAID groups for which the Stripe Depth value is changed.

•Stripe depth for RAID groups that configure the existing TPPs cannot be changed.

•When selecting drives automatically to create a TPP, the Stripe Depth cannot be changed.

7.2.2 Delete Thin Provisioning Pool

This function deletes a Thin Provisioning Pool.

The procedure to delete a Thin Provisioning Pool is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPP to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete] in

[Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

RAID type Drive configuration (*1) Available Stripe Depth value

Mirroring (RAID1) 1D+1M –

High Performance (RAID1+0) Any 64KB, 128KB, 256KB, 512KB, 1024KB

Striping (RAID0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

2D+1P – 4D+1P 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB

5D+1P – 8D+1P 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB

9D+1P – 15D+1P 64 KB, 128 KB

High Reliability (RAID6) Any 64 KB

•TPPs that have volumes registered cannot be deleted. When deleting a TPP, delete the volumes

beforehand. To delete a volume, refer to "5.2.2 Delete Volume" (page 112).

•This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

-When no TPP is registered

-When all the TPPs have volumes registered

After deleting a TPP, all the RAID groups that configure the TPP are also deleted.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

229

2Click the [OK] button.

→Delete Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

7.2.3 Rename Thin Provisioning Pool

This function changes a Thin Provisioning Pool name.

Multiple TPPs can be renamed with a single operation.

The procedure to rename TPP is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPP to be renamed (multiple selections can be made) and click [Rename] in

[Action].

2Input the new TPP name and the suffix starting number (only when multiple TPPs are

selected), and click the [Rename] button.

•Name

Input a new TPP name. An existing TPP name cannot be specified.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

•Start of Suffix

Input the starting number of the suffix that is to be added to the new TPP name.

When changing multiple TPP names, the suffix number is added to the TPP names with consecutive

numbers in ascending order starting with the entered suffix number.

Refer to "Naming conventions for renaming volumes" (page 993) for details.

When changing only one TPP name, the "Start of Suffix" field is not displayed.

The following input conditions apply:

-Numeric characters ("0" - "99999")

-Decimal number

-1 - 5 digits

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

230

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→Rename Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When a TPP name is not input

•When an existing TPP name is input

•When the value in the "Name" does not satisfy the input conditions (when one TPP is selected)

•When the "Start of Suffix" is not specified (when multiple TPPs are selected)

•When the value in the "Start of Suffix" does not satisfy the input conditions (when multiple TPPs

are selected)

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

231

7.2.4 Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

This function expands the capacity of Thin Provisioning Pool.

The maximum number of TPP and maximum TPP capacity for each model

*1: Up to 256 TPPs can be created. When the maximum installation number of drives of a model is 512 or less, the

maximum number of TPPs is half the maximum installation number of drives.

There are two methods to expand a TPP: automatic drive selection and manual drive selection.

Model Maximum Number of TPP (*1) Maximum TPP Capacity (TB)

ETERNUS DX80 S2 60 128

ETERNUS DX90 S2 120 128

ETERNUS DX410 S2 240 384

ETERNUS DX440 S2 256 768

ETERNUS DX8100 S2 256 768

ETERNUS DX8700 S2 256 1024

•TPP capacity is expanded in units of RAID groups. The specifications for a RAID group (such as the RAID

type, the disk type, and the number of member drives) that is to be added are the same as the existing

RAID group.

•TPP capacity cannot be expanded in the following conditions:

-When the maximum capacity of TPPs are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When resources for creating TPPs (such as the number of RAID groups and volumes) are insufficient

(When the maximum number of RAID groups or volumes already exist, TPP cannot be expanded)

After a TPP capacity is expanded, the expanded area of TPP is formatted automatically. To check the format

progress, refer to "7.1.1 Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 200).

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

232

■Automatically selecting drives to expand a TPP

The procedure to expand a TPP by selecting drives automatically is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPP to be expanded and click [Expand] in [Action].

2Select "Automatic" for the expansion mode, specify the TPP capacity after expanded, and

click the [Expand] button.

•Total Capacity after expand

Input the TPP total capacity in numeric characters after expansion is performed and select the units

of capacity from "TB", "GB", or "MB".

Drives are automatically selected according to the existing RAID group specifications, and the TPP

capacity is expanded to the entered value or higher. Refer to "The maximum number of TPP and

maximum TPP capacity for each model" (page 219) for details on the maximum TPP capacity.

→A confirmation screen appears.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the capacity is not specified for "Total Capacity after expand"

•When the entered value in the "Total Capacity after expand" is equal to or lower than the existing

capacity

•When the total value of TPP capacity after expanded and existing TPP capacity exceeds the

maximum TPP capacity for each model

•When the TPP cannot be expanded over the specified capacity in the drive installed in the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

233

3Click the [OK] button.

→Expand Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

■Manually selecting drives to expand a TPP

Select drives manually to expand the TPP.

Check the specifications of the existing RAID groups (number of member drives and disk type) in the TPP in

advance. For the details on how to check the specifications, refer to "Check the RAID group specifications"

(page 234).

•The conditions for RAID groups in the TPP are as follows:

-The RAID type (High Performance (RAID1+0)/High Capacity (RAID5)/High Reliability (RAID6)/

Mirroring (RAID1)/Striping (RAID0)) must be the same

-The number of member drives in the RAID group must be the same

-The disk type (Online/Nearline/SSD/SED) must be the same

(When "Online" is selected for "Disk Type", three types of RAID group may be registered in the TPP. The

three available types are a RAID group that is configured with "Online" disks, a RAID group that is con-

figured with "Nearline" disks, and a RAID group that is configured with both "Online" disks and Near-

line" disks. In this case, registering RAID groups that are only configured with "Online" disks is

recommended to prevent any reduction of TPP access performance.)

•The following shows the recommended drive configuration of the RAID group;

-Select drives with the same capacity. If drives of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest

drive becomes the standard, and all other drives are regarded as the same capacity as the smallest

drive. In this case, the remaining drive space will NOT be used.

-Select drives with the same speed. If drives of different speed exist in a RAID group, access

performance of the RAID group may be affected.

-When "High Performance (RAID1+0)" or "Mirroring (RAID1)" is selected for the RAID type, locate the

drives (mirroring pair drives) divided into different lines (for ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2).

-When "High Capacity (RAID5)" or "High Reliability (RAID6)" is selected for the RAID type, locate the

drives (striping multiple drives) divided into two or more lines (for ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2).

•When using the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2, the restrictions that apply to the drive layout for RAID

group configuration vary depending on the RAID type. Refer to "Restrictions of drive layout" (page 179)

for details.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

234

Check the RAID group specifications

Check the specifications of the existing RAID groups (number of member drives and disk type) in the TPP in

advance. The following describes how to check the specifications.

(1)From the TPP list in "7.1.1 Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 200), click the [Name] link for

the TPP that is to be expanded.

(2)The basic information of the TPP is displayed. Click the [RAID Group] tab to switch the display.

(3)The list of RAID groups that configure the TPP is displayed. Click the [Name] link for the RAID group. Any

RAID group can be specified because the RAID groups in the TPP have the same specifications.

(4)Click the [Disk] tab in the [RAID Group Detail] screen. Check the disk type and the number of member

drives that configure the RAID group.

The procedure to expand a TPP by selecting drives manually is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPP to be expanded and click [Expand] in [Action].

2Select "Manual" for expansion mode.

3Click the [Add] button and set the information of the RAID group to be added to the TPP.

The same Stripe Depth value as the existing RAID groups is applied for the newly added RAID group.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

235

4Select the controlling CM of the RAID group and all the drives to be registered in the RAID

group, and click the [OK] button.

•Controlling CM

Select the controlling CM and CPU of the RAID group that is to be created.

"Automatic" and the installed "CM#x CPU#y" in normal status are displayed as options.

-Automatic

-CM#x CPU#y (x: CM number, y: CPU number)

Select "Automatic" for normal operations. When "Automatic" is selected, the CM-CPU that is to be

assigned is determined by the RAID group number. Refer to "Appendix F Automatic Controlling CM-

CPU Setting" (page 1011) for details.

•Drive Selection

Select the checkbox for the drive to be selected.

When using the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2, the restrictions that apply to the drive layout for

RAID group configuration vary depending on the RAID type. Refer to "Restrictions of drive layout"

(page 179) for details.

→The screen returns to the previous screen. The added RAID group is displayed in the RAID group list.

Drives can be selected from the list of drives that is displayed for Tabular or from the drive images

that are displayed for Graphic. Click the Tabular tab to display a list of the drives or click the Graphic

tab to display drive images.

When the number of selected drives is not an integral multiple of the number of member drives for

the RAID group, the [OK] button cannot be clicked.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

236

5When creating multiple RAID groups, repeat Step 3 and Step 4.

6After creating a RAID group to be added to the TPP, click the [Expand] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

7Click the [OK] button.

→Expand Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

8Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

•Click the [RAID Type] link to change the controlling CM and configuration drives of the newly

added RAID group.

•Click the [Delete] button in the target RAID group area to delete the newly added RAID group.

When the total value of TPP capacity after expanded and existing TPP capacity exceeds the maximum

TPP capacity for each model, an error screen is displayed.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

237

7.2.5 Format Thin Provisioning Pool (All Area)

This function formats all of the areas in the Thin Provisioning Pool.

The procedure to format all of the areas in the Thin Provisioning Pool is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPP that is to be formatted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Format

All Area] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

•When formatting all area in the TPPs, data stored in the Thin Provisioning Volumes in TPP will be deleted.

Format TPV to use them again, after deleting data.

•When a TPP is created using the procedure in "7.2.1 Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 219), the TPP is

formatted automatically. In this case, it is not necessary to format the TPP by using this function.

•An error will stop the balancing TPV when a TPP, in which the currently balancing TPV belongs, is

formatted. Start TPP formatting after balancing TPV is complete.

•An error will stop the RAID migration when a TPP, in which the currently migrating TPV belongs, is

formatted. Start TPP formatting after RAID migration is complete.

•This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

-When no TPP is registered

-When there is no TPP that can be formatted

•TPPs in " Available", " Partially Readying", " Readying", or " Exposed" status can be formatted.

•To check the format progress, refer to "7.1.1 Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 200). Click

the TPP name to see the basic information.

•To format a TPV, refer to "5.2.4 Format Volume" (page 116).

•When formatting all area in the TPPs, data stored in the TPVs in TPP will be deleted.

•An error will stop the balancing TPV when a TPP, in which the currently balancing TPV belongs, is

formatted.

•An error will stop the RAID migration when a TPP, in which the currently migrating TPV belongs, is

formatted.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

238

2Click the [OK] button.

→Format all area in the Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

7.2.6 Format Thin Provisioning Pool (Unformatted Area)

This function formats unformatted area in the Thin Provisioning Pool.

To use a TPV in the TPP again after formatted with "All Area" selected for the mode, format the TPV.

This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

•When no TPP is registered

•When there is no TPP that can be formatted

•When the status of all the TPPs that are to be formatted is " Available".

•TPPs in " Partially Readying", or " Readying" status can be formatted. Data stored in the TPVs of the

target TPP are not deleted. The "Unformatted area" is a new area that is added to a TPP by the capacity

expansion function.

•To check the format progress, refer to "7.1.1 Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 200). Click

the TPP name to see the basic information.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

239

The procedure to format an unformat area in the Thin Provisioning Pool is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPP to be formatted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Format

Unformatted Area] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Format of unformat area in the Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

7.2.7 Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool

This function changes the threshold for monitoring the used capacity of Thin Provisioning Pool. There are two

types of threshold: "Warning" and "Attention".

The procedure to change the threshold of a TPP is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPP for which the threshold is to be changed (multiple selections can be made)

and click [Modify Threshold] in [Action].

This function cannot be performed when there are no TPPs in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•This function changes the threshold of a TPP that is created by using the procedure in "7.2.1 Create Thin

Provisioning Pool" (page 219).

•The same threshold can be applied for multiple TPP in a single operation.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

240

2Select a new threshold, and click the [Modify] button.

•Warning

Change the warning threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity between 5 and 99.

Specify the warning threshold so that the "Warning" threshold is the same or larger than the

"Attention" threshold.

•Attention

Specify the attention threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity between 5 and 80.

Specify the Attention threshold so that the "Warning" threshold is the same or larger than the

"Attention" threshold.

The "Attention" threshold can be omitted. When setting the "Attention" threshold, select the

checkbox.

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→Modify Threshold starts.

When "Warning" is smaller than "Attention", an error screen is displayed.

•When changing a "Attention" threshold, select the checkbox and then specify a new threshold.

•When omitting a "Attention" threshold, clear the checkbox.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

241

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

7.2.8 Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)

This function changes the cache parameters of each Thin Provisioning Pool.

Device performance varies depending on the cache hit ratio. The cache hit ratio can be improved by detecting

the sequentiality for a Read/Write request from the host and reading continuous data in advance. The

characteristics of Read/Write requests from the host depends on the system. Device performance may improve

by specifying a cache parameter that is suitable for the system that is being used.

The following parameter can be specified:

•Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

Specify the number of processes that can be written back at the same time.

The procedure to modify cache parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1Select which TPP to change the cache parameters for (multiple selections can be made) and

click [Modify Cache Parameters] in [Action].

2Change the cache parameters and click the [Modify] button.

•Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

Specify the Multi Writeback Count.

When specifying a larger "Multi Writeback Count" value, sequential write access performance is

improved. Note that this is not effective when a number of random write accesses occur. Depending

on the ratio of read access and write access, read access performance may be reduced.

If pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, MWC cannot be configured.

•The same cache parameter can be applied for multiple TPPs in a single operation.

•Cache parameters other than MWC are specified for each TPV. Refer to "5.2.18 Modify Cache Parameters"

(page 148) for details.

The setting values that are available for Multi Writeback Count vary depending on the RAID type

and drive configuration. Refer to "E.2 Input Conditions for MWC" (page 1007) for details.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

242

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→The cache parameter modification starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Threshold] screen.

End of procedure

7.2.9 Assign ECO Mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

This function applies the ECO mode schedule to the Thin Provisioning Pools (TPP) and enables the ECO mode

setting.

ECO mode is a function to reduce power consumption by stopping motor of disks that configure the TPP while

the TPP is not accessed from the host.

When the ECO mode schedule is applied to a TPP, the ECO mode setting is enabled. When ECO mode is

running, disk motors are activated during the scheduled event term. During times other than the scheduled

time, disk motors are stopped.

If the TPP is accessed from the host while the disk motors are stopped, the disk motors are activated and can

be accessed within 1 - 5 minutes.

If the [Default] button is clicked before the [Modify] button, the default cache parameters are

restored.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

243

ECO Mode Schedule Setting ECO Mode General Setting

Enabled Disabled

Control

Status

During

scheduled

event term

Disk motor is activated. (ECO mode is running) Disk motor runs

regardless of

schedule

settings. (ECO

mode is not

running)

Times other

than scheduled

event term

Disk motor is stopped. (ECO mode is running)

If the RAID group is accessed, disk motors are activated within

1 - 5 minutes.

OFF The target disk motor is operating constantly. (ECO mode is

not running)

Schedule is not applied Disk motor is operating constantly. (ECO mode is not running)

Disks not registered in the TPPs Disk motor is stopped constantly. (ECO mode is running)

•Before applying ECO mode for TPPs, use the procedure in "11.2.8.1 Modify ECO Mode General Setting"

(page 869) to enable the ECO mode setting for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•Set the ECO mode schedule using the procedure in "11.2.8.4 Modify ECO Mode Schedule" (page 876).

•This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

-No volumes are created

-Configured by SSDs

•When using ECO mode, make sure to set the time/date correctly. If the time/date of the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system is wrong, processes used for stopping and starting the disk motor cannot be performed

per the ECO mode schedule.

•If any of the following conditions occur during the ECO mode scheduled time, the disk will be started even

when the disk motor is inactive. Note that the ECO mode schedule will be re-enabled when the following

conditions have finished.

-When the target TPP status is not " Available"

-When performing functions that change the TPP or the volume configuration

-When performing rebuild or copyback in the RAID groups that configure the target TPP

-When formatting is being performed in the TPP

-When RAID migration is being performed in the volumes registered in the TPP

-When Advanced Copy is being performed in the volume registered in the TPP (copy session status is

not "Suspend" or "Tracking")

-During maintenance

-When performing disk diagnosis, TPP diagnosis (diagnosing the RAID groups that configure the TPP),

or when exporting G-List

-When a module error related to the access paths of the Controller Modules and drives is detected

•When the ECO mode is set to TPP, the same ECO Mode schedule is set for all the RAID groups configuring

the TPP.

•When selecting multiple TPPs as the target of the ECO mode, the same ECO mode schedule can be

specified for all the selected TPPs.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

244

The procedure to set the ECO mode for Thin Provisioning Pool is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the TPP for which the ECO mode setting status is to be changed (multiple selections

can be made) and click [Assign ECO Mode] in [Action].

2Select the ECO mode schedule and action to be assigned and click the [Assign] button.

•ECO Mode Schedule

Select the ECO mode schedule that is to be applied.

-No Change

Do not change the current setting.

-Disable

Disable the ECO mode.

-ECO mode schedule name

Apply the selected ECO mode schedule.

•ECO Mode Action

Select whether to enable ("ON") or disable ("OFF") the ECO mode setting. Select "No Change" to use

the current setting.

-No Change

Do not change the current setting.

-ON

Enable the ECO mode.

-OFF

Disable the ECO mode.

→A confirmation screen appears.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

245

3Click the [OK] button.

→Assign ECO Mode starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

7.2.10 Register Thin Provisioning License

This function registers the Thin Provisioning License.

The procedure to register a Thin Provisioning License is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Register License] in [Action].

•If a Thin Provisioning license is not registered, the Thin Provisioning function cannot be used.

•If a Thin Provisioning license is already registered, this function cannot be used.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

246

2Input the Thin Provisioning license key, and click the [Register] button.

•License Key

Input the Thin Provisioning license key.

The following input condition applies:

-Up to 16 capital letters and numeric characters

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→Registration of the Thin Provisioning License starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [License] screen.

End of procedure

If the entered Thin Provisioning license key does not satisfy the input conditions, an error screen

appears.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

247

7.2.11 Delete Thin Provisioning License

This function deletes a Thin Provisioning license.

The procedure to delete a Thin Provisioning License is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Delete License] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Delete Thin Provisioning License starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [License] screen.

End of procedure

Thin Provisioning license cannot be deleted in the following conditions:

•When no Thin Provisioning license is registered

•When Thin Provisioning Pool is registered

•When "TPV balancing" is selected for "Thin Provisioning Allocation Mode" of the subsystem parameter

•When the Flexible Tier function mode is enabled

A Thin Provisioning license cannot be deleted when "TPV balancing" is selected for "Thin Provisioning

Allocation Mode" of the subsystem parameter. Before deleting the Thin Provisioning license, use the proce-

dure described in "11.2.13.4 Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 935) to reset the "Thin Provisioning

Allocation Mode" setting to the default "TPP balancing" setting.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

248

7.2.12 Start Balancing Flexible Tier Pool

This function starts Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP) balancing sessions.

The FTRP balancing function equalizes unevenly allocated physical area in the Flexible Tier Sub Pools (FTSPs)

that configure an FTRP. By using this function, the physical allocated areas are reallocated equally among the

RAID groups in the FTSPs. The I/O access to the FTV is distributed almost equally to the RAID groups in the

FTSP.

Requirements for an FTRP to be balanced

•The status of the FTRP is " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

•Balancing of the selected FTRP is not being performed

•Free space, which can be used for balancing, exists in the FTSPs in the target FTRP

•Even after the FTRP balancing session is performed, the physical allocation between the FTVs and the

FTSPs does not change.

•The FTRP balancing function extracts up to 32 balanceable FTVs (*1) that have a low balancing level from

the selected FTRP and performs balancing sessions in the FTSPs. Note that FTVs are not extracted as

balancing targets in certain conditions. For example, FTVs with a high balancing level, FTVs that are

undergoing RAID migration, or FTVs that are undergoing Zero Reclamation.

*1: Up to 32 sessions, which include FTV balancing sessions, TPV balancing sessions, and RAID migration sessions,

can be performed at the same time. An FTRP balancing session is performed in each FTRP. Note that the number

of FTV balancing sessions that are performed at the same time cannot be specified.

•Balancing of FTVs in the following conditions is not available:

-FTVs which capacity is less than 20GB

-FTVs which used capacity is less than 10GB

The FTV capacity can be checked in the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Volume)] screen. Refer to "7.1.9 Flexible

Tier Pool Detail (Volume)" (page 215) for details.

•FTRP balancing cannot be started in the following conditions:

-When the Thin Provisioning license is not registered

-When the Flexible Tier function mode is disabled

-When the maximum number of volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When the total number of TPV balancing processes and RAID migrations that are running in the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is 32

-When the total capacity for the TPV balancing processes and the RAID migrations that are running in

the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is 128TB

-When the RAID group diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When the disk diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-When Zero Reclamation is being performed for all of the balancing target FTVs in the FTRP

•When FTRP balancing is performed, the used FTRP capacity may temporarily exceed the threshold. If the

used capacity exceeds the threshold, " Attention" or " Warning" is displayed in the "Used Status"

field for the FTRP. The usage of the FTRPs is displayed in the [Flexible Tier Pool] screen. Refer to "7.1.5

Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)" (page 207) for details.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

249

The procedure to start balancing FTRP is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the FTRP for which balancing is to be started and click [Start Balancing FTRP] in

[Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→FTRP balancing starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Flexible Tier Pool] screen.

End of procedure

7.2.13 Stop Balancing Flexible Tier Pool

This function stops Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP) balancing sessions.

•FTRP balancing can be performed during the work I/O.

•The balancing levels of FTRPs and FTSPs, and the progress of the FTRP balancing sessions can be checked.

Refer to "7.1.5 Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)" (page 207), "7.1.7 Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Basic)"

(page 212), and "7.1.8 Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)" (page 214)for details.

•The progress of a balancing FTV can be checked in the [Volume Detail] screen. Refer to "5.1.1 Volume

(Basic Information)" (page 74) for details.

•This function cannot be used when no FTRPs are undergoing balancing or when no FTRP balancing that

has stopped due to an error exists.

•This function cannot be used when the specified FTRP balancing is already complete.

Chapter 7 Thin Provisioning Pool Management

7.2 Functions in the Action Area for Thin Provisioning

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

250

The procedure to stop balancing FTRP is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the FTRP for which balancing is to be stopped and click [Stop Balancing FTRP] in

[Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→FTRP balancing stops.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Flexible Tier Pool] screen.

End of procedure

If FTRP balancing has stopped, the following conditions apply.

•All of the balancing sessions that are currently being performed (*1) for the FTVs registered in the target

FTRP are stopped. Even when balancing sessions are being stopped, FTVs that are not being balanced can

be accessed normally.

•Note that completed balancing processes for the FTVs in the target FTRP (*1) cannot be stopped (the

physical allocation after the balancing process cannot be changed). FTVs that are balanced can be

accessed normally.

*1: When an FTRP balancing session is started, FTV balancing starts in the FTSPs. Refer to "7.2.12 Start Balancing

Flexible Tier Pool" (page 248) for details.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

251

Chapter 8

Advanced Copy Management

This chapter describes Advanced Copy management.

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy status displays the status information of volumes.

Advanced Copy status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Detailed information of the Advanced Copy functions can be displayed from the following screens:

•Advanced Copy (Property)

•Advanced Copy (Extent information)

•Copy Path Detail

Advanced Copy status screen Category

Advanced Copy (Basic Information) Advanced Copy

Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions) Local Copy

EC EC

OPC OPC

QuickOPC QuickOPC

SnapOPC SnapOPC

SnapOPC+ SnapOPC+

Monitor Monitor

Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions) Remote Copy

REC REC

Advanced Copy (ODX) ODX

Advanced Copy (XCOPY) XCopy

Setting (Advanced Copy) Setting

Snap Data Pool Snap Data Pool

Copy Path Copy Path

REC Buffer REC Buffer

REC Disk Buffer REC Disk Buffer

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

252

8.1.1 Advanced Copy (Basic Information)

This function displays the status of all the Advanced Copy sessions.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

●Advanced Copy Session Information (Local/Remote Copy Sessions)

•Session Count

The number of Advanced Copy sessions that are currently being performed for each type (EC, OPC,

QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, Monitor, and REC) is displayed.

The "Session Count" is a total of copy sessions in all the statuses including "Reserved". Click the [Session

Count] link to display the list of sessions for each type.

-ETERNUS DX80 S2: 0 - 1024

-ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 - 2048

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 - 8192

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 8192

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 32768

•Status

The status for each Advanced Copy session is displayed.

- Normal

All the copy sessions are in normal status.

- Error

At least one copy session is not in normal status.

•To display the Advanced Copy session information (Local/Remote Copy sessions) and the Advanced Copy

information, register the Advanced Copy license.

•Registering an Advanced Copy license is not required to display the Advanced Copy Session Information

(ODX Session) or the Advanced Copy Session Information (XCOPY Session).

•Click the [ ] icon to update to the latest screen.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

253

●Advanced Copy Session Information (ODX Session)

•Session Count

The number of ODX sessions (0 - 4096) that are currently being performed is displayed.

The "Session Count" is a total of copy sessions in all the statuses including "Reserved". Click the [Session

Count] link to display the list of sessions.

•Status

The status for each Advanced Copy session is displayed.

- Normal

All the copy sessions are in normal status.

- Error

At least one copy session is not in normal status.

●Advanced Copy Session Information (XCOPY Session)

•Session Count

The number of XCopy (Extended Copy) sessions (0 - 4096) (*1) that are currently being performed is

displayed.

The "Session Count" is a total of copy sessions in all the statuses including "Reserved". Click the [Session

Count] link to display the list of sessions.

*1: An XCOPY (Extended Copy) session is created when the Full Copy function of VMware vStorage APIs for Array Inte-

gration (VAAI) is used.

•Status

The status for each Advanced Copy session is displayed.

- Normal

All the copy sessions are in normal status.

- Error

At least one copy session is not in normal status.

●Advanced Copy Information

•Usable Advanced Copy Size

The Advanced Copy capacity that can be added to the session is displayed.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

254

8.1.2 Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

This function displays status for local copy sessions.

The following session types are available: Equivalent Copy (EC), One Point Copy (OPC), QuickOPC, SnapOPC,

SnapOPC+, and Monitor.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Session ID

The session ID is displayed.

Click this item to display the screen shown in "8.1.7 Advanced Copy (Property)" (page 277) or "8.1.8

Advanced Copy (Extent information)" (page 283).

•Source Volume No.

The copy source volume number is displayed.

If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Destination Volume No.

The copy destination volume number is displayed.

If the "Status" is " Reserved" or the "Type" is "MON", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Type

The copy session type is displayed using an abbreviation.

-For Equivalent Copy: EC

-For One Point Copy: OPC

-For QuickOPC: QOPC

-For SnapOPC: SOPC

-For SnapOPC+: SOPC+

-For Monitor: MON

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

255

•Status

The copy session status is displayed.

- Active

Operating normally

- Reserve

Session ID reserved

- Suspend

Suspended by an instruction from the host

- Error Suspend

Copy canceled due to an error

- Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

•Phase

The copy session phase is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Copying

For OPC, EC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+: Copying

For QuickOPC: Copying the updated areas after recording of updated areas is stopped

For Monitor: Recording the updated areas

-Equivalent

Maintaining equivalent status of the copy source and copy destination that are duplicated after copy is

complete

-Tracking

Recording only the updated area after copy is complete

-Tracking & Copy

Recording the area updated during copy processing and after copy starts

-Readying

Readying to start multiple copy using the Concurrent OPC.

•Error Code

The error code is displayed when an error occurs. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Appendix K Error Code" (page 1064) for details.

•Time Stamp

The time when backup is complete and the time when an error occurred are displayed. If the status is "

Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

The time stamp is updated in the following conditions:

-OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+

The time stamp is updated when copy starts and when an error occurs.

The following information is displayed:

•When "Status" is " Active", the backup time when the copy started is displayed.

•When "Status" is " Error Suspend", the time when the error occurred is displayed.

-QuickOPC

The time stamp is updated when copy starts, restarts, and when an error occurs.

The following information is displayed:

•When "Status" is " Active", the backup time when the copy started is displayed.

•When "Status" is " Error Suspend", the time when the error occurred is displayed.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

256

-EC

The time stamp is updated at Suspend and when an error occurs.

The following information is displayed:

•When "Status" is " Active" and the copy session is not suspended yet, "0" is displayed for all of the

display items. When suspend is requested and "Status" is " Active", the backup time of the

previous suspend that was requested is displayed.

•When "Status" is " Suspend", the backup time when the copy was suspended is displayed.

•When "Status" is " Error Suspend", the time when an error occurred is displayed.

-Monitor

When "Status" is " Active", "0" is displayed for all of the display items.

•Elapsed Time

The elapsed time after a copy session has started is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen)

is displayed.

•Copied Data Size

The size of copy that has been completed is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

•Total Data Size

The total copy size is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Resolution

The copy session resolution is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Requestor

The information of the client that started the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

-SCSI

Copy session requested by the copy management software (via SCSI).

-LAN

Copy session requested by the copy management software (via LAN).

-GUI

Copy session requested by GUI.

-CLI

Copy session requested by CLI.

-SMI-S

Copy session requested by SMI-S.

•License

The registration status of the Advanced Copy license when the copy session is started is displayed.

-Regular

The copy session is started with a paid license or a free license (only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90

S2).

-Trial

The copy session is started with a trial license. Copy sessions that use a trial license are deleted

automatically after the expiration of the trial license.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

257

Filter Setting

8.1.2.1 EC

This function displays detailed information for EC sessions.

Filter Description

Status Select the copy session status that is to be displayed.

Phase Select the copy session phase that is to be displayed.

Session ID Input the session ID of the copy session that is to be displayed.

When not using the session ID for filtering, leave this item blank.

Refer to "8.1.2 Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 254) for display items.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

258

8.1.2.2 OPC

This function displays detailed information for OPC sessions.

8.1.2.3 QuickOPC

This function displays detailed information for Quick OPC sessions.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Modified Data Size

The differential data size when QuickOPC is executed is displayed.

The modified data size is updated in the "Tracking & Copy" and "Tracking" phases. When recopy starts, the

modified data size is once changed to "0" and then the differential data size from the time when recopy

started is displayed. When tracking stops, the modified data size is changed to "0". If the status is "

Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "8.1.2 Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 254) for display items.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

259

8.1.2.4 SnapOPC

This function displays detailed information for SnapOPC sessions.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•SDP No.

The Snap Data Pool number, which is used when the copy destination SDV capacity is insufficient, is

displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•SDP Used Capacity

The used capacity of Snap Data Pool is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "8.1.2 Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 254) for the display items that are not described in

this section.

Refer to "8.1.2 Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 254) for the display items that are not described in

this section.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

260

8.1.2.5 SnapOPC+

This function displays detailed information for SnapOPC+ sessions.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Generation

The generation and total number of generations of the copy session are displayed.

•SDP No.

The Snap Data Pool number, which is used when the copy destination SDV capacity is insufficient, is

displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•SDP Used Capacity

The used capacity of Snap Data Pool is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "8.1.2 Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 254) for the display items that are not described in

this section.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

261

8.1.2.6 Monitor

This function displays detailed information for Monitor sessions.

8.1.3 Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)

This function displays the status for remote copy sessions.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Session ID

The session ID is displayed.

Click this item to display the screen shown in "8.1.7 Advanced Copy (Property)" (page 277) or "8.1.8

Advanced Copy (Extent information)" (page 283).

Refer to "8.1.2 Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 254) for display items.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

262

•Source Volume No.

The copy source volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Destination Volume No.

The copy destination volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

•Remote Session ID

The session ID for the remote device is displayed.

•Type

The copy session type is displayed using an abbreviation (REC).

•Status

The copy session status is displayed.

- Active

Operating normally

- Reserve

Session ID reserved

- Suspend

Suspended by an instruction from the host

- Halt

Remote copy disabled due to an error

- Error Suspend

Copy canceled due to an error

- Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

•Phase

The copy session phase is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Copying

Copying

-Equivalent

Maintaining equivalent status of the copy source and copy destination that are duplicated after copy is

complete

•Error Code

The error code is displayed when an error occurs. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Appendix K Error Code" (page 1064) for details.

•Direction

The copy direction of the applicable session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

-From Local/To Remote

Session from the local device (copy source) to the remote device (copy destination)

-From Remote/To Local

Session from the remote device (copy source) to the local device (copy destination)

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

263

•Time Stamp

The time when backup has been completed, and the time when an error occurred, are displayed.

The time stamp is updated when the process is suspended, when an error occurs, and when the status is

changed.

The following information is displayed for "Time Stamp".

-When "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-When "Status" is " Active" and the copy session is not suspended yet, "0" is displayed for all of the

display items. When suspend is requested and "Status" is " Active", the backup time of the previous

suspend that was requested is displayed.

-When "Status" is " Suspend", the backup time when the copy was suspended is displayed.

-When "Status" is " Error Suspend", the time when an error occurred is displayed.

-When "Status" is " Halt", the time when an error occurred is displayed.

When the status is changed from " Halt" to " Active" or when the copy session is forcibly

suspended, the time stamp information is cleared and "0" is displayed for all of the display items.

•Elapsed Time

The elapsed time after a copy session starts is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

•Copied Data Size

The size of copy that has been completed is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

•Total Data Size

The total copy size is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Resolution

The copy session resolution is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Requestor

The information of the client that started the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

-SCSI

Copy session requested by the copy management software (via SCSI).

-LAN

Copy session requested by the copy management software (via LAN).

-SMI-S

Copy session requested by SMI-S.

•License

The registration status of the Advanced Copy license when the copy session is started is displayed.

If the license information for the connection target storage system cannot be obtained due to an REC path

error, "Unknown" is displayed.

-Regular

The copy session is started with a paid license.

-Trial

The copy session is started with a trial license. Copy sessions that use a trial license are deleted

automatically after the expiration of the trial license.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

264

Filter Setting

8.1.3.1 REC

This function displays detailed information for REC sessions.

Filter Description

Status Select the copy session status that is to be displayed.

Phase Select the copy session phase that is to be displayed.

Session ID Input the session ID of the copy session that is to be displayed.

When not using the session ID for filtering, leave this item blank.

Refer to "8.1.3 Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)" (page 261) for display items.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

265

8.1.4 Advanced Copy (ODX)

This function displays the status for ODX sessions.

ODX sessions are created when the ODX function is used for a server with "Windows Server 2012". The ODX

function offloads the workload for copying or migrating data from the server to the ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Session ID

The session ID is displayed.

Click this item to display the screen shown in "8.1.7 Advanced Copy (Property)" (page 277) or "8.1.8

Advanced Copy (Extent information)" (page 283).

•Source Volume No.

The copy source volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Destination Volume No.

The copy destination volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

•Status

The copy session status is displayed.

- Active

Operating normally

- Reserve

Session ID reserved

- Error Suspend

Copy canceled due to an error

- Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

•Error Code

The error code is displayed when an error occurs. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Appendix K Error Code" (page 1064) for details.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

266

•Time Stamp

The time when backup is complete and the time when an error occurred are displayed.

The time stamp is updated when starting a copy session or an error occurs.

The following information are displayed for this item:

-If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-If the status is " Active", the previous backup time is displayed.

-If the status is " Error Suspend", the time when an error occurred is displayed.

•Elapsed Time

The elapsed time after a session starts is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

•Copied Data Size

The size of copy that has been completed is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

•Total Data Size

The total copy size is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Filter Setting

8.1.5 Advanced Copy (XCOPY)

This function displays the status for XCOPY sessions.

An XCOPY (Extended Copy) session is created when the Full Copy function of VMware vStorage APIs for Array

Integration (VAAI) is used.

Filter Description

Status Select the copy session status that is to be displayed.

Session ID Input the session ID of the copy session that is to be displayed.

When not using the session ID for filtering, leave this item blank.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

267

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Session ID

The session ID is displayed.

Click this item to display the screen shown in "8.1.7 Advanced Copy (Property)" (page 277) or "8.1.8

Advanced Copy (Extent information)" (page 283).

•Source Volume No.

The copy source volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Destination Volume No.

The copy destination volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

•Status

The copy session status is displayed.

- Active

Operating normally

- Reserve

Session ID reserved

- Error Suspend

Copy canceled due to an error

- Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

•Error Code

The error code is displayed when an error occurs. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Appendix K Error Code" (page 1064) for details.

•Time Stamp

The time when backup has been completed, and the time when an error occurred, are displayed.

The time stamp is updated when starting a copy session or an error occurs.

The following information is displayed:

-If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-If the status is " Active", the previous backup time is displayed.

-If the status is " Error Suspend", the time when the error occurred is displayed.

•Elapsed Time

The elapsed time after a session starts is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

•Copied Data Size

The size of copy that has been completed is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

•Total Data Size

The total copy size is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

268

Filter Setting

8.1.6 Setting (Advanced Copy)

This function displays the current Advanced Copy license registration status and the Advanced Copy setting

status.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

●License Information

•State

Registration status of the Advanced Copy license is displayed.

-Not Registered

No license is registered.

-Free/VAAI

A free license and a VAAI-use license are registered.

Up to eight local copy sessions can be created. In addition, the Full Copy function of VMware VAAI can

be used. "Free License/VAAI" is displayed only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.

Filter Description

Status Select the copy session status that is to be displayed.

Session ID Input the session ID of the copy session that is to be displayed.

When not using the session ID for filtering, leave this item blank.

•When the trial license is registered, the registration date and the expiration date is displayed.

•The registration of an Advanced Copy license or setting of a copy table size is not required when using the

Full Copy function of VMware vStorage APIs for Array Integration (VAAI) with controller firmware version

V10L20 or later.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

269

-VAAI

VAAI-use license is registered.

The Full Copy function of VMware VAAI can be used. "VAAI" is displayed only for the ETERNUS DX410 S2/

ETERNUS DX440 S2 or the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2.

-Trial

A trial license is registered. All of the Advanced Copy functions can be used for a limited time.

-Full

A paid license is registered. All of the advanced copy functions can be used.

•Registration Date

The date when the trial license was registered is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following

conditions:

-Trial license has never been registered.

-A paid license, a free license, or VAAI is registered.

•Expiration Date

The expiration date for the trial license is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

-Trial license has never been registered.

-A paid license, a free license, or VAAI is registered.

●Advanced Copy Settings

•Copy Table Size

A copy table size is displayed.

•EC/OPC Priority

The EC/OPC priority is displayed.

-Automatic Priority

This mode changes the EC/OPC priority automatically in response to the operating load status.

-High Priority

This mode operates by making maximum use of internal resources.

-Middle Priority

This mode operates slightly slower than the High Priority mode.

-Low Priority

This mode reduces the effect on host access.

-Very Low Priority

This mode operates slower than the Low Priority mode.

•Current EC/OPC Priority

The current EC/OPC priority is displayed.

-High Priority

-Middle Priority

-Low Priority

-Very Low Priority

•ODX Buffer Volume

The registration status of the ODX Buffer volume is displayed.

-Registered

-Not Registered

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

270

8.1.6.1 Snap Data Pool

This function displays the SDP status.

SDP is the area used when in case executing SnapOPC and SnapOPC+ increases the amount of copy data and

exceeds the SDV capacity.

SDP becomes available when creating an SDPV. Created SDPV is automatically added to the SDP.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•SDP No.

The SDP number (fixed as "0") is displayed.

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of the SDP is displayed.

•Total Free Space

The total free space of the SDP is displayed.

•SDPE

Snap Data Pool Element (SDPE), the allocation unit for SDV, is displayed. Displayed with 1GB, 2GB, or 4GB.

•Unencrypted

-Total Capacity

The total capacity of unencrypted SDP is displayed.

-Total Used Capacity

The total used capacity of unencrypted SDP is displayed.

-Total Used Capacity (%)

The usage rate of unencrypted SDP is displayed.

-Used Host Capacity

The total capacity of the SDPE that is allocated for an unencrypted SDV where a capacity shortage

caused by data writing from the host has occurred is displayed.

-Used Copy Capacity

The total capacity of the SDPE that is allocated for an unencrypted SDV where a capacity shortage

caused by SnapOPC or SnapOPC+ has occurred is displayed.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

271

•Encrypted

-Total Capacity

The total capacity of encrypted SDP is displayed.

-Total Used Capacity

The total used capacity of encrypted SDP is displayed.

-Total Used Capacity (%)

The usage rate of encrypted SDP is displayed.

-Used Host Capacity

The total capacity of the SDPE that is allocated for an encrypted SDV where a capacity shortage caused

by data writing from the host has occurred is displayed.

-Used Copy Capacity

The total capacity of the SDPE that is allocated for an encrypted SDV where a capacity shortage caused

by SnapOPC or SnapOPC+ has occurred is displayed.

8.1.6.2 Copy Path

This function displays the Remote Equivalent Copy (REC) path status between the local and remote devices. It

shows whether the copy path created with the function in "8.2.12 Set Copy Path" (page 318) is operating

properly.

Select the target remote device. (Up to 16 storage systems can be registered.) The following items are

displayed.

•Storage System

•Advanced Copy Path Status

This function is used to check the copy path status by actually sending a command to the copy path between

the storage systems. After following the procedure in "8.2.12 Set Copy Path" (page 318) to set a copy path,

make sure to check the copy path status with the Copy Path function.

•The "Priority Level" and the "Multiplicity" settings can be specified for each remote Box ID. Refer to "8.2.18

Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 351) for details.

•To change the "Link Speed" setting, create a copy path with a new link speed by using the [Set Copy Path]

function, and apply the created copy path to the related storage systems. Refer to "8.2.12 Set Copy Path"

(page 318) for details.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

272

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

●Local Device Information

•Box ID

The Box ID for the local device is displayed.

"Box ID" is an identifier used to identify individual storage systems. This ID is a unique name in the user

system and consists of 40-digit code.

The initial Box ID is a device ID consisting of device information (such as series name, model name, and

serial number).

●Remote Device Information

•Box ID

This is the Box ID of the remote device that has a path to the local device. Click this item to display the

[Copy Path] screen. Refer to "8.1.9 Copy Path Detail" (page 284) for details.

•Connection Type

The type of connection to the remote device that has a path to the local device is displayed.

-Direct

-Remote

•Priority Level

When the local device and the remote device are connected by direct connection, the priority level is

displayed. When the "Connection Type" is "Remote", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Automatic

REC is performed using the priority level (Automatic Priority/High Priority/Middle Priority/Low Priority/

Very Low Priority) that is specified using the procedure in "8.2.6 Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 298).

-1 - 8

REC is performed with the displayed priority level. "1" corresponds to "Very Low Priority", and "8"

corresponds to "High Priority" that is specified using the procedure in "8.2.6 Modify EC/OPC Priority"

(page 298).

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

273

•Multiplicity

When the local device and the remote device are connected by remote connection, the multiplicity is

displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Automatic

REC is performed with the recommended multiplicity that is calculated using the procedure in "8.2.17

Measure Round Trip Time" (page 349).

-1 - 1024

REC is performed with the multiplicity that is manually specified using the procedure in "8.2.18 Modify

REC Multiplicity" (page 351).

•Recommended Multiplicity

When the local device and the remote device are connected by remote connection, the recommended

multiplicity is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-0

The factory default setting.

-1 - 1024

The recommended multiplicity that is calculated using the procedure in "8.2.17 Measure Round Trip

Time" (page 349).

-***

The recommended multiplicity is not measured using the procedure in "8.2.17 Measure Round Trip

Time" (page 349).

•Link Speed

When the local device and the remote device are connected by remote connection, the link speed is

displayed between 1 Mbit/s - 65535 Mbit/s. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

8.1.6.3 REC Buffer

This function displays the REC Buffer status when performing REC in "REC asynchronous consistency mode".

The "Consistency mode" secures the order of data transfer to the remote device for all of the specified REC

sessions. This mode requires constant securement of the dedicated REC Buffer in the cache memory. Copying

via REC Buffer stores multiple REC session I/Os in the REC Buffer for a certain period of time, and copies in

blocks.

Check if the REC Buffer capacity of the copy source and that of the copy destination are the same size.

If the capacities are not the same, configure the settings, using the procedure in "8.2.19 Modify REC Buffer"

(page 354) function, so that the REC Buffer capacity of the copy source and that of the copy destination

become the same size.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

274

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Group

The management group number of the REC Buffer is displayed.

-ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 - 3

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 - 7

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 0 - 7

•Usage

The REC Buffer usage is displayed.

-Unused

-Send

-Receive

•Remote Box ID

The Box ID for the remote device is displayed.

If the copy path information is deleted, "???" is displayed. When the REC Buffer usage is "Unused", a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

•Status

The REC Buffer status is displayed.

-ACTIVE

REC Buffer is available.

-INACTIVE

REC Buffer is not available.

•Size

The REC Buffer size is displayed. When the REC Buffer usage is "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-ETERNUS DX90 S2: 128MB, 256MB, 512MB

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, 2048MB

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, 2048MB

•Forwarding Interval

The data transfer interval is displayed. When the REC Buffer usage is "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

275

•Monitoring Time

The monitoring time, before transition to the "Halt" status for a copy session when an REC Buffer shortage

occurs, is displayed. When the monitoring time" is "0 min.", the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is not

being monitored. When the REC Buffer usage is "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•HALT Wait Timer

The maximum non-responding time is displayed. During the non-response time, the host I/O response is

stopped to give priority to performing REC Buffer transfers in a high-load state. When the REC Buffer usage

is "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•I/O Priority Mode

Whether the "I/O Priority Mode" is enabled or disabled is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the

usage is "Unused".

"I/O Priority Mode" reduces the effect on host I/O when an initial copy for starting, restarting, or recovering

the copy function is performed.

This item is available when logged in using a user account with the "Advanced Copy Management" policy.

•Immediate HALT Mode

Whether the "Immediate HALT Mode" is enabled or disabled is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when

the usage is "Unused".

"Immediate HALT Mode" reduces the effect on host I/O because the REC Buffer is insufficient when "HALT

Wait Timer" is set to "0 sec.".

This item is available when logged in using a user account with the "Advanced Copy Management" policy.

•REC Disk Buffer Status

When the REC Buffer usage is "Send", the status of the REC Disk Buffers that are assigned to the REC Buffer

are displayed. When the REC Buffer usage is "Receive" or "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Active

All of the REC Disk Buffers in the REC Buffer are available.

-Rebuilding

Rebuild/copyback is being performed in some of the REC Disk Buffers.

-Formatting

Formatting is being performed in some of the REC Disk Buffers.

-Not Supported

The copy destination storage system for REC does not support the REC Disk Buffers.

-Not Mirrored

Some of the REC Disk Buffers have lost redundancy due to disk failure.

-Error

Some of the REC Disk Buffers cannot be used (due to RAID group failure or RAID group blockage).

If the "REC Disk Buffer Status" is "Formatting", "Not Supported", or "Error", all of the other REC Disk Buffers

that belong to the same REC Buffer cannot be used.

•REC Disk Buffer Total Capacity

When the usage is "Send", the total capacity of the REC Disk Buffer, which is assigned to the REC Buffer, is

displayed. When the REC Buffer usage is "Receive" or "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Total Storage Data Size

When the usage is "Send", the used capacity of the REC Disk Buffer, which is assigned to the REC Buffer, is

displayed. When the REC Buffer usage is "Receive" or "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Free Disk Buffer Size

When the usage is "Send", the unused capacity of the REC Disk Buffer, which is assigned to the REC Buffer,

is displayed. When the REC Buffer usage is "Receive" or "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

276

8.1.6.4 REC Disk Buffer

This function displays the existing REC Disk Buffers in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

●REC Disk Buffer List

•No.

The RAID group number of the REC Disk Buffer is displayed. Click this item to display the [REC Disk Buffer

Detail] screen.

•Name

The REC Disk Buffer name is displayed. Click this item to display the [REC Disk Buffer Detail] screen.

•Status

The REC Disk Buffer status is displayed. Refer to "B.3 RAID Group Status" (page 975) for details.

•Total Capacity

The total capacity of the REC Disk Buffer is displayed.

•Controlling CM

The controlling CM and CPU for the REC Disk Buffer are displayed.

-CM#x CPU#y (x: CM number, y: CPU number)

•REC Buffer

The management group number of the REC Buffer, to which the REC Disk Buffer is assigned, is displayed. A

"-" (hyphen) is displayed for an REC Disk Buffer that is not assigned to any REC Buffers.

-ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 - 3

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 - 7

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 0 - 7

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

277

•Encryption

The encryption status of the REC Disk Buffer is displayed.

-CM

An REC Disk Buffer that is encrypted by CM

-"-" (hyphen)

An REC Disk Buffer that is not encrypted (unencrypted volume)

-SED

An REC Disk Buffer that is encrypted by SED

•Processing Function

A process that is being performed for the REC Disk Buffer is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-

" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Recovery

Rebuild, copyback, redundant copy, or recovery of the RAID group is being performed.

-Formatting

Formatting is being performed.

Filter Setting

8.1.7 Advanced Copy (Property)

Detailed information (Property) about the Advanced Copy is displayed.

■For Local Copy

Filter Description

Name

Input the REC Disk Buffer name that is to be displayed.

REC Disk Buffers matching or partially matching the input name are displayed.

When not using the REC Disk Buffer name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Status

Select the REC Disk Buffer status that is to be displayed.

When not using the REC Disk Buffer status for filtering, select "All" (all REC Disk

buffers).

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

278

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Session ID

The session ID selected in the [Local Copy] screen is displayed.

•Source Volume Name

The copy source volume name is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Destination Volume Name

The copy destination volume name is displayed. When the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed. When the "Type" is "MON", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Copy Range

The copy range of the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Totally

Whole volume

-Extent

Part of volume

•Secondary Access Permission

If the status is " Active", accessibility from the host to the copy destination volume is displayed. This

item is displayed in EC. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Read Only at Equivalency

When the "Phase" is "Equivalent", only read access to the copy destination volume is allowed

-No Read/Write

No read/write access to the copy destination volume is allowed

•Concurrent Suspend Status

When an instruction to collectively and tentatively separate multiple pairs of a copy source volume and a

copy destination volume (Concurrent Suspend request) is received in EC session, transition status to

"Suspend" is displayed. This item is displayed in EC. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is dis-

played. If the Concurrent Suspend Status cannot be obtained, "Unknown" is displayed.

-Normal

Transition to "Suspend" status is complete or Concurrent Suspend cannot be performed

-Exec

Transition to "Suspend" status in progress

-Error

Transition to "Suspend" status failed

-Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

Refer to "8.1.2 Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 254) for the display items that are not described in

this section.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

279

■For Remote Copy

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Session ID

The session ID selected in the [Remote Copy] screen is displayed here.

•Source Volume Name

The following is displayed depending on the "Direction". If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

-When the "Direction" is "From Local/To Remote"

The copy source volume name is displayed.

-When the "Direction" is "From Remote/To Local"

The "Remote Box ID / Copy source volume number" is displayed.

•Destination Volume Name

The following is displayed depending on the "Direction". If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is dis-

played.

-When the "Direction" is "From Local/To Remote"

The "Remote Box ID / Copy destination volume number" is displayed.

-When the "Direction" is "From Remote/To Local"

The copy destination volume name is displayed.

•Copy Range

The copy range of the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Totally

Whole volume

-Extent

Part of volume

•Secondary Access Permission

If the status is " Active", accessibility from the host to the copy destination volume is displayed. If the

status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Read Only at Equivalency

When the "Phase" is "Equivalent", only read access to the copy destination volume is allowed

-No Read/Write

No read/write access to the copy destination volume is allowed

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

280

•Sync

The operation mode of the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is dis-

played.

-Sync (synchronous)

-Async (asynchronous)

•Transfer Mode

The transfer mode of the copy session is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is dis-

played. If the "Sync" is "Sync", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Stack Mode (Asynchronous Stack mode)

-Consistency Mode (Asynchronous Consistency mode)

-Through Mode (Asynchronous Through mode)

•Recovery Mode

The recovery mode of the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is dis-

played.

-Automatic Recovery

In this mode, copy automatically resumes when the copy path is recovered from error status.

-Manual Recovery

In this mode, copy does not automatically resume when the copy path is recovered from error status.

•Split Mode

The split mode of the copy session is displayed. This item is available only for sessions in REC synchronous

mode. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. If the "Transfer Mode" is "Stack Mode" or

"Consistency Mode", the field is blank.

-Automatic

In this mode, Write I/O access to the copy source volume is accepted when the copy path is in error

status.

-Manual

In this mode, Write I/O access to the copy source volume is not accepted when the copy path is in error

status. Specific sense data is sent to the host.

•Change Error

The result of changing REC mode ("Transfer Mode", "Recovery Mode", or "Split Mode") and the result of REC

reverse operation is displayed.

When anything other than "Normal" is displayed, the operation mode may be different between the copy

source and the copy destination storage systems, or REC reverse operation may disabled due to restriction

in other functions.

If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-Normal

REC mode change and REC reverse operation are working normally

-Mode Change Error

An error was detected while changing the REC mode change

-Reverse Error

An error was detected while the REC reverse operation was being performed

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

281

•Concurrent Suspend Status

When an instruction to collectively and tentatively separate multiple pairs of a copy source volume and a

copy destination volume (Concurrent Suspend request) is received in REC session, transition status to

"Suspend" is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. If the Concurrent Suspend

Status cannot be obtained, "Unknown" is displayed.

-Normal

Transition to " Suspend" status is complete or Concurrent Suspend cannot be performed

-Exec

Transition to " Suspend" status is in progress

-Error

Transition to " Suspend" status failed

-Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

•Remain Time

The expected time to complete transition to "Suspend" when a Concurrent Suspend request is received.

If the "Status" is " Reserved", or if the "Remain Time" cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

■For ODX

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Session ID

The session ID selected in the [ODX] screen is displayed here.

•Source Volume Name

The copy source volume name is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Destination Volume Name

The copy destination volume name is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

Refer to "8.1.3 Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)" (page 261) for the display items that are not described

in this section.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

282

■For XCOPY

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Session ID

The session ID selected in the [XCOPY] screen is displayed here.

•Source Volume Name

The copy source volume name is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Destination Volume Name

The copy destination volume name is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

Refer to "8.1.4 Advanced Copy (ODX)" (page 265) for the display items that are not described in this section.

Refer to "8.1.5 Advanced Copy (XCOPY)" (page 266) for the display items that are not described in this

section.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

283

8.1.8 Advanced Copy (Extent information)

Detailed information (Extent information) about the Advanced Copy is displayed.

This screen is available only when the "Copy Range" is "Extent".

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Offset

The array number of extent information is displayed.

•Source LBA

The copy source start Logical Block Address (LBA) of copy with range specification is displayed.

•Destination LBA

The copy destination start LBA of copy with range specification is displayed.

•Copy Extent Size

The data amount for copy with range specification is displayed.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

284

8.1.9 Copy Path Detail

Detailed information of copy path is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

●Storage System Information

•Local Device Box ID

The Box ID of the local device is displayed.

•Remote Device Box ID

The Box ID of the selected remote device is displayed.

•Connection Type

The connection type between the local device and the selected remote device is displayed.

-Direct

-Remote

•Priority Level

When the local device and the selected remote device are connected by direct connection, the priority level

is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Remote", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Multiplicity

When the local device and the selected remote device are connected by remote connection, the multiplicity

is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Recommended Multiplicity

When the local device and the selected remote device are connected by remote connection, the

recommended multiplicity is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Link Speed

When the local device and the selected remote device are connected by remote connection, the link speed

is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

285

●Advanced Copy Path Status

•Local Port

The port information of the local device is displayed.

•Status

The port path status between the local and remote devices is displayed with an icon and a character string.

- Normal

The copy path is in normal status.

- Error

The copy path is in error status

•Remote Port WWN/iSCSI Name

The port WWN or iSCSI name of the remote device is displayed.

•IP Version

When the port type is iSCSI, the IP version for the destination iSCSI port of the copy path is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port type is FC.

-IPv4

-IPv6 (Link Local)

-IPv6 (Connect IP)

-"-" (hyphen)

•IP Address

When the port type is iSCSI, the IP address for the destination iSCSI port of the copy path is displayed.

The display format varies according to the IP version.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port type is FC.

-For IPv4 address

•xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 0 - 255 (decimal)

-For IPv6 address

•xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 378) for details.

•Remote Port Mode

The remote port mode is displayed. This item is displayed only when the remote device is ETERNUS6000.

-Initiator

A dedicated port for sending

-Target

A dedicated port for downloading

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.1 Advanced Copy Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

286

•Detail Information

Detailed information about the copy path is displayed.

If an error occurs in the copy path, the error details or location is displayed using the following

abbreviations. If there are multiple error locations, multiple abbreviations are displayed.

-Connectable

The copy path is in normal status.

-Path Unstable

The copy path between the local device and remote device is in unstable status. For example, link-

down repeatedly occurs in a certain period of time or communication fails.

-Bitmap Resolution Mismatched

The resolution settings are different between the local and remote devices.

-Suspected Spot (D)

The copy path settings may be invalid.

-Suspected Spot (N)

The error occurs in the remote device.

-Suspected Spot (T)

The error occurs in the FC-RA port or iSCSI-RA port on the remote device.

-Suspected Spot (C)

The error occurs in the cable.

-Suspected Spot (O)

The error occurs in an adapter that is not for a local or a remote device. This occurs only when the

connection type is FC-AL.

-Suspected Spot (S)

The error occurs in the switch or switch settings.

-Suspected Spot (I)

The error occurs in the FC-RA port or iSCSI-RA port on the local device.

-Suspected Spot (M)

The error occurs in the memory.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

287

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in

the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for Advanced Copy can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for Advanced Copy Display function

Start SnapOPC+ •Advanced Copy (Basic Information)

•Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

•SnapOPC+ in Local Copy

Stop Copy Session •Advanced Copy (Basic Information)

•Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

•EC in Local Copy

•OPC in Local Copy

•QuickOPC in Local Copy

•SnapOPC in Local Copy

•SnapOPC+ in Local Copy

•Monitor in Local Copy

•Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)

•REC in Remote Copy

Delete Advanced Copy License

Modify EC/OPC Priority

Modify Copy Table Size

Enable ODX

Disable ODX

Create ODX Buffer Volume

Modify Copy Parameters •Snap Data Pool in Setting (Advanced Copy)

Set Copy Path •Copy Path in Setting (Advanced Copy)

Delete All Copy Path

Export All Copy Path

Export Storage Information

Convert Copy Path

Measure Round Trip Time

Modify REC Multiplicity

Modify REC Buffer •REC Buffer in Setting (Advanced Copy)

Assign REC Disk Buffer

Create REC Disk Buffer •REC Disk Buffer in Setting (Advanced Copy)

Delete REC Disk Buffer

Format REC Disk Buffer

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

288

8.2.1 Required Settings for the Advanced Copy Function

This section describes the necessary preparation that must be performed to use the Advanced Copy function

and copy session management. Perform the required settings in the following order.

■Required settings for the Advanced Copy function (Local Copy and Remote Copy)

●Advanced preparation

The following items must be prepared to use the Advanced Copy functions:

(1)License registration

If a license is not registered, up to eight copy sessions can be performed (only for ETERNUS DX80 S2/

DX90 S2).

(2)Copy destination volume creation

Create a copy destination physical volume according to the amount of updated data in the copy source

volume. Create an SDV and an SDPV when performing SnapOPC+.

Refer to "5.2.1 Create Volume" (page 96).

(3)Copy table size setting

Set the copy table size depending on the capacity of the copy target volume.

Refer to "8.2.7 Modify Copy Table Size" (page 301) and "How to calculate the copy table size" (page

308) for details.

(4)Copy priority setting

Specify the copy priority in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. It is not necessary to change the

default setting (Automatic Priority) for normal use.

Refer to "8.2.6 Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 298).

When performing SnapOPC+, the following preparations are also required.

When using an Advanced Copy function, refer to "8.2.4 Register Advanced Copy License" (page 295) to

•The RAID configuration of the copy source and copy destination can be different.

•The copy source and copy destination volume encryption status must match.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

289

Specify the automatic notification parameter when the SDP capacity is insufficient during a SnapOPC+

session.

(1)Copy parameter setting

Set the SDP capacity threshold for each policy level.

Refer to "8.2.11 Modify Copy Parameters" (page 316).

(2)Event notification setting

Select whether to notify when the SDP capacity exceeds the threshold. When notifying, select the

notification method.

Refer to "11.2.9.1 Setup Event Notification" (page 880).

When performing REC, the following preparations are also required.

(1)Port mode setting

Change the port mode from "CA" (for host connection) to "RA" (for REC connection) or "CA/RA".

Refer to "9.2.3.11 Modify Port Mode" (page 571).

(2)Copy path setting

Set the Copy path information between local and remote devices.

Refer to "8.2.12 Set Copy Path" (page 318).

(3)REC Buffer setting

Set the transfer buffer when performing REC in asynchronous consistency mode.

Refer to "8.2.19 Modify REC Buffer" (page 354).

(4)REC Disk Buffer setting

Set the REC Disk Buffer that is used for saving copy data temporarily when the REC Buffer capacity is

insufficient.

Refer to "8.2.21 Create REC Disk Buffer" (page 362).

(5)REC Disk Buffer allocation

Set REC Disk Buffer allocation.

Refer to "8.2.20 Assign REC Disk Buffer" (page 358).

(6)REC multiplicity setting

Set the multiplicity used for performing REC. It is not necessary to change the default setting (Auto-

matic) for normal use.

Refer to "8.2.18 Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 351).

(7)Copy path conversion

Convert the copy path information file format to perform REC with an older ETERNUS Disk storage

system. The copy path information file that is created using the procedure in "8.2.12 Set Copy Path"

(page 318) can be converted.

Refer to "8.2.16 Convert Copy Path" (page 347).

When monitoring copy paths and sessions, the following preparations are also required.

(1)Event notification setting

Set whether to notify REC path errors, REC Buffer halt operations when overloading or failure occurs,

session errors, and recovery from session errors. When notifying, select the notification method.

Refer to "11.2.9.1 Setup Event Notification" (page 880).

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

290

●Copy session management

After preparation for Advanced Copy is complete, create a copy session to start copying volumes. Check the

copy session status during the copy operation.

(1)Copy session creation

Note that GUI can only create the SnapOPC+ sessions that are performed in volume units.

To create other copy sessions, use the copy management software. Refer to "8.2.2 Start SnapOPC+"

(page 291).

(2)Copy session check

Check the status of each copy session in the "Advanced Copy Session Information" field.

Refer to "8.1.1 Advanced Copy (Basic Information)" (page 252).

For REC sessions, checking copy path and buffer status are also available.

Refer to "8.1.6.2 Copy Path" (page 271) and "8.1.6.3 REC Buffer" (page 273) for details.

■Required settings for the Advanced Copy function (ODX)

●Advanced preparation

The following items must be prepared to use the ODX functions. The ODX function is supported by "Win-

dows Server 2012".

(1)Enable ODX

Enable the ODX function. The ODX function is disabled by default.

Refer to "8.2.8 Enable ODX" (page 310) for details.

(2)Create an ODX Buffer volume

Create an ODX Buffer volume. No ODX Buffer volumes are registered by default.

Refer to "8.2.10 Create ODX Buffer Volume" (page 311) for details.

(3)Event notification setting

Set whether to notify insufficient ODX Buffer volume capacity, session errors, and recovery from session

errors. When notifying, select the notification method.

Refer to "11.2.9.1 Setup Event Notification" (page 880).

Reboot any servers that are connected to the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

●Copy session management

After preparation for ODX copy is complete, create a copy session to start copying volumes. Check the copy

session status during the copy operation.

(1)Copy session check

Check the status of each copy session in the "Advanced Copy Session Information" field.

Refer to "8.1.1 Advanced Copy (Basic Information)" (page 252).

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

291

●Stop ODX

The following items must be prepared after all the ODX sessions are complete or stopped:

(1)Delete an ODX Buffer volume

Delete the dedicated volumes for the ODX function.

Refer to "5.2.2 Delete Volume" (page 112) for details.

(2)Disable ODX

Disable the ODX function.

Refer to "8.2.9 Disable ODX" (page 311) for details.

Reboot any servers that are connected to the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

8.2.2 Start SnapOPC+

This function is used to select the copy source volume and copy destination volume, and start a new SnapOPC+

copy session.

The procedure to start the SnapOPC+ session is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Start SnapOPC+] in [Action].

•Only SnapOPC+ copy sessions that are performed in units of volumes can be created using GUI.

To create EC sessions, OPC sessions, QuickOPC sessions, SnapOPC sessions, SnapOPC+ sessions using

range selection, and REC sessions, use copy management software.

•When using SnapOPC+, SDVs are required as copy destination volumes. The "Capacity of source volume"

that is specified when creating SDVs indicates the copy source Standard volume capacity.

When creating an SDV using the [Create Volume] function, the capacity setting is not required. 24 (MB) +

0.1% of the copy source volume capacity is automatically secured in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

"24MB" is the smallest volume capacity. 0.1% of the copy source volume is the capacity that is used for

the controlling information area in the SDV. When using SnapOPC or SnapOPC+, make sure to create an

SDV and SDPVs. An SDPV is a volume that configures an SDP. The SDP allocates free space when SDV

capacity is insufficient.

•An ODX Buffer volume cannot be specified as a copy source.

For controller firmware version V10L30 or later, the number of available generations for SnapOPC+ is 512.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

292

2Click the [Browse...] button.

3Select the radio button for the volume to be used, and click the [OK] button.

Perform Step 2 and Step 3 in the [Select Source Volume] screen and in the [Select Destination Volume]

screen.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

293

4Check the displayed contents, and click the [Start] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

5Click the [OK] button.

→SnapOPC+ session starts.

6Click the [Done] button to return to the [Advanced Copy] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the SnapOPC+ started in the copy source volume exceeds the maximum number of

generations per volume

•When the SnapOPC+ started in the copy source volume exceeds the maximum number of copy

sessions for the entire ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

294

8.2.3 Stop Copy Session

This function stops the selected copy session.

This function is used when a session cannot be stopped due to a host error or other causes.

The procedure to stop a copy session is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the copy session to be stopped (multiple selections can be made) and click [Stop

Session] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→The selected copy session is stopped.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Advanced Copy] screen.

End of procedure

•If one SnapOPC+ session is stopped, all the sessions started earlier than that session are also stopped.

•If one SnapOPC+ session is stopped, all the Restore OPC sessions started earlier than that session become

in error status.

•If a SnapOPC or SnapOPC+ session during a Restore OPC session is stopped, that Restore OPC session

becomes in error status.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

295

8.2.4 Register Advanced Copy License

This function registers the Advanced Copy license for EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, and REC.

There are two types of Advanced Copy licenses:

•Paid License

All of the Advanced Copy functions can be used.

•Free License

For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, up to eight sessions with the local Advanced Copy function can be

used.

When this registration is complete successfully, the customer can use the Advanced Copy functions.

The procedure to register an Advanced Copy license is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Register License] in [Action].

2Select a registration method, enter an Advanced Copy license key to be registered, and click

the [Register] button.

•Registration Method

To register a paid license, select "Input License Key" and enter the Advanced Copy license key that is

to be registered.

When using the Full Copy function of VMware vStorage APIs for Array Integration (VAAI) with

controller firmware version V10L20 or later, registering an Advanced Copy license is not required.

When using a free license for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, select "Use Free License/VAAI".

If the Advanced Copy license is already registered, "Use Free License/ VAAI" and "Use VAAI" cannot be

selected.

Refer to "Availability of Copy Functions" (page 297) for the availability of copy functions when

selecting "Use Free License/VAAI" or "Use VAAI".

There are no free licenses for the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 or ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2

•When using ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager or ETERNUS SF Express, perform the required settings

described in the documents that are supplied with ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager or ETERNUS SF

Express.

•The registration status of the Advanced Copy license can be checked. Refer to "8.1.6 Setting (Advanced

Copy)" (page 268) for details.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

296

•Input License key

Input the Advanced Copy license key.

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→The Advanced Copy license registration is executed.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Setting] screen.

End of procedure

•Only when registering a paid license, the Advanced Copy license key entry is required.

•When the entered Advanced Copy license key does not satisfy the input conditions, an error screen

appears.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

297

Availability of Copy Functions

The following table shows the availability of copy functions when "Use Free License/ VAAI" or "Use VAAI" is

selected.

8.2.5 Delete Advanced Copy License

This function deletes all of the Advanced Copy licenses registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

The procedure to delete an Advanced Copy license is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Delete License] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

Copy Type ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2

ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2

Use Free License/VAAI Use VAAI

Advanced Copy Local OK (Up to eight sessions) NG

Remote NG NG

Full Copy by VAAI OK OK

•An Advanced Copy license cannot be deleted in the following conditions:

-When the CM status is other than "Normal"

-When an SDV or an SDPV has been registered

-When a volume that is Advanced Copy protected exists

-When an Advanced Copy session (except for an ODX session or an XCOPY session) exists

-When an Advanced Copy table size has been configured

-When an Advanced Copy path has been configured

-When REC Buffer has been configured

-When REC Disk Buffer has been created

-When a port with the RA mode exists

-When a port with the CA/RA mode exists

•Rebooting the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is required after deleting an Advanced Copy license.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

298

2Click the [OK] button.

→Deletion of an Advanced Copy license is executed.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Setting] screen.

End of procedure

8.2.6 Modify EC/OPC Priority

This function sets the copy speed when using EC and OPC.

The EC/OPC speed is usually set in consideration of the host's I/O load and copy processing load. The set EC/OPC

speed is applied not only for the next sessions, but also for existing sessions.

The procedure to modify the EC/OPC priority is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Modify EC/OPC Priority] in [Action].

Registering the license for the Advanced Copy feature is required to use EC and OPC.

•EC includes both EC and REC.

Even though the REC priority is specified using the procedure in "8.2.18 Modify REC Multiplicity" (page

351), the EC/OPC priority values specified with this function are applied only when the REC satisfies both

of the following conditions:

-When the connection method is "Direct"

-When the priority level is "Auto"

Refer to "8.2.12 Set Copy Path" (page 318) for connection type settings.

Refer to "8.2.18 Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 351) for priority level settings.

•OPC includes OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+.

•When "Auto" is selected for "EC/OPC Priority", the current priority level can be checked. Refer to "8.1.6

Setting (Advanced Copy)" (page 268) for details.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

299

2Select the EC/OPC priority, and click the [Set] button.

•EC/OPC Priority

-Automatic Priority

This mode changes the EC/OPC priority automatically in response to the operating load status.

-High Priority

This mode operates by making maximum use of internal resources.

This mode greatly affects host access performance, thus should not be used during normal

operation. Use when the operation load is low.

-Middle Priority

This mode operates slightly slower than the High Priority mode.

Select this mode when performance is greatly affected by the High Priority mode, but the copy

speed is too slow with the Low Priority mode.

-Low Priority

This mode reduces the effect on host access.

Select this mode when using EC and/or OPC during operation.

-Very Low Priority

This mode operates slower than the Low Priority mode.

Select this mode when performance is affected (such as when the performance of host response

is reduced) by the Automatic Priority or Low Priority mode.

●Advanced Setting

•Copy Schedule Mode

Specify the schedule mode for EC, OPC, and Quick OPC. Use "Session Balancing" for normal

operation.

Setting the schedule mode for SnapOPC and SnapOPC + is not required.

Use the [Modify REC Multiplicity] function to specify the REC schedule mode.

-Session Balancing

Copy sessions are scheduled evenly to each controlling CM-CPU for a copy source RAID group (a

RAID group to which the copy source volume belongs).

-Destination RAID Group Balancing

Only one copy session can be performed for each copy destination RAID group. This method pre-

vents unequal loading on a specific RAID group. This may improve the copy performance when a

copy destination RAID group is configured by Nearline disks or when "High Priority" is set for EC/

OPC.

Copy performance is not improved by selecting "Destination RAID Group Balancing" in the following

conditions:

•When the type of the copy destination volume is not "Standard"

•When the copy destination volume "Standard" and concatenated

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

300

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→The selected EC/OPC priority is set.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Setting] screen.

End of procedure

Click [Advanced Setting] to specify the copy schedule mode.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

301

8.2.7 Modify Copy Table Size

This function sets the copy table size, which is used by the firmware for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system,

on the CM cache memory. When the EC, OPC or REC function is in use, this copy table is used as the area that

manages the progress of the copy.

•Registering the license for the Advanced Copy function is required to set the copy table size.

•When the copy table size is equal to 0MB, copy functions cannot be used. The initial (factory default)

copy table size setting is 0MB. Modify the copy table size before using the copy function.

•Make sure to stop the copy session before reducing the copy table size. To check the copy session, refer to

"8.1.1 Advanced Copy (Basic Information)" (page 252).

•The following shows the maximum copy table size for each model.

-ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2: 256MB

-ETERNUS DX410 S2: 512MB

-ETERNUS DX440 S2: 4096MB

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 1024MB

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 12288MB

•Cache memory is not only used for the copy table, but also used for REC Buffers. Note that a copy table

with the maximum capacity for each model cannot always be created. Whether a copy table with the

maximum capacity can be created depends on the memory capacity in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system and the cache memory allocation of the REC Buffer.

•If the copy table size is not sufficient, an error occurs in the copy session. Make sure to specify the "Table

Size Threshold" value to monitor the usage of the copy table in advance. The ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system reports the notification using the method specified in "11.2.9.1 Setup Event Notification" (page

880). There are three methods for notification; E-mail, SNMP Trap, and syslog. When reporting, select the

notification method in advance.

•Set the resolution as small as possible. When a large value is specified, the performance may be reduced.

When unsure about whether the copy target area might be increased in future use, specify "× 16" for

"Resolution".

•The same resolution must be used by both the copy source and copy destination storage system for REC. If

the resolution settings for the copy source and copy destination storage systems are different, REC cannot

be performed. Note that the copy table sizes do not need to be the same. If different recommended

resolutions are calculated for the copy source and copy destination storage systems, use whichever

resolution is greater for both storage systems. If the resolution is changed, recalculate the copy table size

setting for the storage system with the new resolution.

•Changes to the resolution setting are applied from the next session. For a copy session that is currently

being performed, data is copied with the resolution that was specified when the session was started. To

change the resolution of a copy session that is currently being performed, cancel the copy session and

start again.

•When the table size or the table size threshold is changed, the new value is applied immediately.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

302

There are two methods to set the copy table size: manually and automatically.

The procedure to set the copy table size is as follows:

■Manually setting the copy table size

Specify the copy table size manually.

Procedure

1Click [Modify Copy Table Size] in [Action].

2Specify "Resolution" and "Table Size" and click the [Set] button.

•Resolution

Select the resolution.

-× 1

-× 2

-× 4

-× 8

-× 16

•Table Size (MB)

Specify the copy table size.

The maximum size that can be specified is an estimated value from the memory capacity in the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system and the amount of memory allocation for the REC Buffers.

The maximum copy table size for each model is as follows:

-ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2: 0 - 256 (MB) (integral multiple of 8)

-ETERNUS DX410 S2: 0 - 512 (MB) (integral multiple of 8)

-ETERNUS DX440 S2: 0 - 4096 (MB) (integral multiple of 8)

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 1024 (MB) (integral multiple of 8)

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 12288 (MB) (integral multiple of 8)

•Table Size Threshold (%)

Specify the threshold for monitoring the used capacity of the copy table.

To report when the used capacity exceeds the threshold, enable event notification by using the pro-

cedure in "11.2.9.1 Setup Event Notification" (page 880) and select E-mail, SNMP Trap, or syslog for

the notification method.

•Refer to "How to calculate the copy table size" (page 308) for detailed procedure to calculate

the copy table size.

•Refer to "Appendix H Estimated Advanced Copy Source Capacity" for the maximum copy source

capacity.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

303

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the copy table size starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Setting] screen.

End of procedure

■Automatically setting the copy table size

Specify the copy table size automatically.

Procedure

1Click [Modify Copy Table Size] in [Action].

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

304

2Click the [Calculation of recommended values] button.

→The [Calculation of recommended values] dialog box appears.

3Input the necessary information and click the [Calculation] button.

•Total Copy Capacity (Restore OPC is not used)

Input the total copy capacity (*1) when Restore OPC is not used (unit: GB). The applicable Advanced

Copy types are as follows:

-EC

-REC

-OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+ without using Restore OPC

The following input conditions apply:

-ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2: 0 - 262144GB (256TB)

-ETERNUS DX410 S2: 0 - 524288GB (512TB)

-ETERNUS DX440 S2: 0 - 4194304GB (4096TB)

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 1048576GB (1024TB)

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 12582912GB (12288TB)

•Total Copy Capacity (Restore OPC is used)

Input the total copy capacity (*1) for using Restore OPC (unit: GB).

The applicable Advanced Copy types are as follows:

-OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+ using Restore OPC

The following input conditions apply:

-ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2: 0 - 262144GB (256TB)

-ETERNUS DX410 S2: 0 - 524288GB (512TB)

-ETERNUS DX440 S2: 0 - 4194304GB (4096TB)

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 1048576GB (1024TB)

-ETERNUS DX8700 S: 0 - 12582912GB (12288TB)

•Sessions (Restore OPC is not used)

Input the total number of sessions (*1) for not using Restore OPC.

The applicable Advanced Copy types are as follows:

-EC

-REC

-OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+ without using Restore OPC

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

305

The following input conditions apply:

-ETERNUS DX80 S2: 0 - 1024

-ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 - 2048

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 - 8192

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 8192

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 32768

•Sessions (Restore OPC is used)

Input the total number of sessions (*1) for using Restore OPC.

The applicable Advanced Copy types are as follows:

-OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+ using Restore OPC

The following input conditions apply:

-ETERNUS DX80 S2: 0 - 1024

-ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 - 2048

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 - 8192

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 8192

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 32768

*1: For "Total Copy Capacity" and "Sessions", enter the respective total values.

[Example 1]

When executing 10GB OPC (Restore OPC is not used) with 20 sessions and 5GB QuickOPC (Restore OPC is not

used) with 10 sessions

Total Copy Capacity (Restore OPC is not used)

= Copy capacity for OPC (10GB x 20 sessions) +

Copy capacity for QuickOPC (5GB x 10 sessions)

= 200GB + 50GB = 250GB

Sessions (Restore OPC is not used)

= The number of OPC sessions (20 sessions) +

The number of QuickOPC sessions (10 sessions)

= 30 sessions

Example 2:

When executing 10GB OPC (Restore OPC is not used) with 20 sessions and 5GB QuickOPC (Restore OPC is

used) with 10 sessions

Total Copy Capacity (Restore OPC is not used)

= Copy capacity for OPC (10GB x 20 sessions) = 200GB

Sessions (Restore OPC is not used)

= The number of OPC sessions (20 sessions) = 20 sessions

Total Copy Capacity (Restore OPC is used)

= Copy capacity for QuickOPC (5GB x 10 sessions) = 50GB

Sessions (Restore OPC is used)

= The number of QuickOPC sessions (10 sessions) = 10 sessions

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

306

→"Resolution" and "Table Size" are automatically calculated.

4Click the [OK] button.

→The calculated values are reflected to "Resolution" and "Table Size" in the "Advanced Copy Table Size

Setting" field.

•The calculated parameters are "Resolution" and "Table Size". It is assumed that almost 100% of the

copy table size is used.

•When [Calculation of recommended values] is used, the calculation of "Resolution" and "Table

Size" makes allowances for a slight increase of the copy capacity. This is why the calculated values

are higher than values obtained using the procedure described in "How to calculate the copy table

size" (page 308).

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

307

5Click the [Set] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

6Click the [OK] button.

→Setting of the copy table size starts.

7Click the [Done] button to return to the [Setting] screen.

End of procedure

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

308

■How to calculate the copy table size

A dedicated memory area is required for Advanced Copy management and is allocated as a table size. The

table size and resolution settings are determined by the copy capacity and the number of sessions (volumes)

that will be run simultaneously.

S1: Refers to the table size (MB) for EC/REC and for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ without OPC

Restoration.

S2: Refers to the table size (MB) for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration.

(Table size (S)) [MB] = (S1) + (S2)

•Round the derived value up to the next multiple of 8 to obtain the correct setting for the copy table size.

•A copy table of the appropriate size (as derived above) is created in each CM.

•If the total table size value (S) exceeds the maximum size allowed, adjust the resolution (M) upward

until the maximum table size is no longer exceeded. The resolution (M) should be as small as possible.

•Maximum allowed table sizes are as follows:

•Allowance should be made for possible increases in the copy capacity.

•If the resolution is changed during an existing copy session, the table sizing formula described in this

section is not applied.

•The same bitmap ratio (M) value must be used by both the copy source and copy destination storage sys-

tems. If the bitmap ratio settings for the copy source and copy destination storage systems are different,

REC cannot be performed. Note that the table sizes (S) do not need to be identical. If different

recommended resolutions are calculated for the copy source and copy destination storage systems, use

whichever resolution is greater for both storage systems. If the resolution (M) is changed, recalculate the

table size (S) setting for the storage system with the new resolution.

The calculated parameters are "Resolution (M)" and "Table Size (S)". It is assumed that almost 100% of the

copy table size is used.

Storage system name Maximum copy table size (per CM)

ETERNUS DX80 S2 256MB

ETERNUS DX90 S2 256MB

ETERNUS DX410 S2 512MB

ETERNUS DX440 S2 4096MB

ETERNUS DX8100 S2 1024MB

ETERNUS DX8700 S2 12288MB

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

309

●The table size for EC/REC and for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ without OPC Restoration (S1)

●The table size for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration (S2)

*1: For EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, and REC copy sources, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all

volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that are defined as copy sources. For REC

copy destinations, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all the volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS

DX Disk storage system that are defined as copy destinations.

If the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is used for both the " EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, or REC copy

source" and the " REC copy source", the copy capacity is the total capacity of both.

For multi-copy sessions, the copy capacity is the total capacity of multi-copy source volumes (slices or partitions),

multiplied by the number of multi-copy destinations for each copy source. The copy capacity for generation man-

agement by SnapOPC+ sessions is the total capacity of copy source volumes (slices or partitions) multiplied by

the number of generations in the copy destination volumes for each copy source.

Example for multi-copy sessions:

Copy area in the copy source logical volume A: 200M, Number of multi-copy destinations: 4

Copy area in the copy source logical volume B: 500MB, Number of multi-copy destinations: 8

Add 200 × 4 + 500 × 8 = 4800MB to the copy capacity (C1).

Note that "4" and "8" in this example correspond to the number of generations when calculating the copy table

size for SnapOPC+ sessions.

The number of sessions (N1) for multi-copy and SnapOPC+ is 4 + 8 = 12.

When executing OPC Restoration from a copy destination with multi-copy and SnapOPC+ multi-generation

enabled, select one copy destination and apply the above formula. Other copy destinations are calculated as

being normal multi-copy and SnapOPC+ multi-generation.

M: Resolution (The same value is used in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. Set "×1" if possible.)

C1: The total copy capacity (GB) for EC/REC, and OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ without OPC

Restoration (*1)

N1: The number of sessions EC/REC, and OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ without OPC Restoration.

S1 [MB] = ((2 × C1 / M) + N1) × 8 [KB] / 1024 (Round up decimal point)

M: Resolution (The same value is used in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. Set "×1" if possible.)

C2: The total copy capacity (GB) for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration in the

volume (*1)

N2: The number of sessions for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration

S2 [MB] = ((2 × C2 / M) + N2) × 2 × 8 [KB] / 1024 (Round up decimal point)

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

310

8.2.8 Enable ODX

This function enables the ODX function.

This function supports ODX, which is provided for servers with "Windows Server 2012". ODX is a function that

offloads the load on data copying and migration to the storage system.

The procedure to enable the ODX function is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Enable ODX] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Enabling of ODX starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Setting] screen.

End of procedure

•To start using the ODX function, the server must recognize that ODX is enabled in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system. After enabling ODX with this function, reboot the server.

•ODX requires dedicated volumes (ODX Buffer volumes) to save data before updating. ODX Buffer volumes

can be created after ODX is enabled. Refer to "8.2.10 Create ODX Buffer Volume" (page 311) for details.

•The ETERNUS DX Disk storage system does not support an Advanced Copy when the copy destination is a

volume that is being used by the ODX function.

•The ODX function only supports copying within the same ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. Copying to

other storage systems is not supported.

ODX does not require the registration of an Advanced Copy license and copy table size settings.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

311

8.2.9 Disable ODX

This function disables the ODX function.

The procedure to disable the ODX function is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Disable ODX] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Disabling of ODX starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Setting] screen.

End of procedure

8.2.10 Create ODX Buffer Volume

This function creates a dedicated volume for the ODX function.

ODX is a function that offloads the load on data copying and migration to the storage system. ODX copies data

at the time when a copy request is received. If a Write command is issued for the copy source data, this

function backs up the previous data in the area that is to be overwritten. An ODX Buffer volume is used to

store the backup data at this time.

The ODX function is supported by "Windows Server 2012".

•To stop using the ODX function, the server must recognize that ODX is disabled in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system. After disabling ODX with this function, reboot the server.

•The ODX function cannot be disabled when ODX Buffer volumes exist in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system.

Delete the ODX Buffer volume before disabling the ODX function. Refer to "5.2.2 Delete Volume" (page 112)

for details.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

312

ODX Buffer Volume

•One ODX Buffer volume can be created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•The type of the ODX Buffer volume is "Standard", "TPV", or "FTV".

•The capacity of an ODX Buffer volume is 1GB - 1TB.

•An ODX Buffer volume can be created when the ODX function is enabled.

•The ODX Buffer volume must be created with the ODX function.

•If a Thin Provisioning license is not registered, a "TPV" or an "FTV" type ODX Buffer volume cannot be

created.

•When creating an "FTV" type ODX Buffer volume, use CLI. GUI cannot be used to create an "FTV" type ODX

Buffer volume.

•When encryption mode is disabled, an ODX Buffer volume encrypted by CM cannot be created. Note that

when SEDs are not installed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, an ODX Buffer volume encrypted by

SEDs cannot be created.

•If the maximum number of volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, an ODX

Buffer volume cannot be created. Refer to "5.2.1 Create Volume" (page 96) to check the maximum

number of volumes for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•If the maximum capacity for TPVs or FTVs is already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, a

"TPV" type or an "FTV" type ODX Buffer volume cannot be created. Refer to "5.2.1 Create Volume" (page

96) to check the maximum capacity.

•Only one ODX Buffer volume can be created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. Use the [Setting]

screen to check whether an ODX Buffer volume is already created. Refer to "8.1.6 Setting (Advanced

Copy)" (page 268) for details.

•An existing ODX Buffer volume can be checked by using the "Forbid Advanced Copy" field in the [Volume]

screen. Refer to "5.1.1 Volume (Basic Information)" (page 74) for details.

•There are three types of ODX Buffer volumes: "Standard", "TPV", and "FTV". When creating an ODX Buffer

volume in a RAID group, select "Standard" for the volume type. When creating an ODX Buffer volume in a

TPP, select "Thin Provisioning" for the volume type. When creating an ODX Buffer volume in an FTRP, use

CLI. The ODX Buffer volume type is independent of the copy source volume type or the copy destination

volume type.

•Even when the ODX Buffer volume capacity is insufficient, no error occurs in an ODX session that is

already started. Windows Server suspends the use of ODX, and starts a normal copy process that uses

Read and Write processes.

•Monitoring the usage of an ODX Buffer volume is available. If insufficient capacity is detected, the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system sends a notification. Refer to "11.2.9.1 Setup Event Notification" (page

880) for details. If the ODX Buffer volume capacity is frequently insufficient, the benefit of using the ODX

function is lost. Expand the ODX Buffer volume capacity as required. Refer to "5.2.5 Expand Volume"

(page 117), "5.2.7 Start RAID Migration" (page 123), or "5.2.6 Expand Thin Provisioning Volume" (page

121) for details.

•An ODX Buffer volume can be deleted by using the same procedure as "Standard" and "TPV" type volumes

if the ODX function is not used. Refer to "5.2.2 Delete Volume" (page 112) for details. To delete an "FTV"

type ODX Buffer volume, use CLI.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

313

The procedure to create an ODX Buffer volume is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Create ODX Buffer Volume] in [Action].

2Specify the detailed information of the ODX Buffer volume and select the RAID group or TPP

in which the ODX Buffer volume is to be created. Click the [Create] button.

•Name

Specify the ODX Buffer volume name. An existing volume name cannot be specified.

The following input condition applies:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Capacity

Specify the volume capacity between "1GB" - "1TB", and select the unit of capacity (MB/GB/TB).

Up to a 15-digit number including the "." (decimal point) can be input. Note that when "MB" is

selected, the specified value is rounded down to the nearest whole number. When "GB" or "TB" is

selected, the specified value is converted to "MB" and rounded down to the nearest whole number.

•Type

Specify the volume type. If a Thin Provisioning license is not registered, "Standard" is displayed in

this field.

-Standard

A volume that is created in the RAID group.

-Thin Provisioning

A volume that is created in Thin Provisioning Pools.

•The volume capacity that is required for an ODX Buffer volume varies depending on the server system

configuration and the applications that are being used. When using the ODX function for normal file

copying or file migration with Microsoft Windows Server, creating a 10GB ODX Buffer volume is

recommended.

•An ODX Buffer volume can be created by using the maximum free space that is available in a RAID group.

Inputting the volume capacity is not required. "Standard" type volumes can be created using the

maximum free space.

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers

can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

If "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected, inputting the capacity is not required. The specified value

and unit are not used.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

314

•Use all Largest Free Space

Select the "Enable" checkbox to create an ODX Buffer volume with the largest available free space in

the RAID group. This checkbox can be selected or cleared only when "Type" is "Standard".

If "Enable" is selected, an ODX Buffer volume with a capacity of up to 1TB is created with the

available space displayed in the "Largest Free Space" field for the selected RAID group.

•Encryption by CM

Select whether to encrypt (On) or not encrypt (Off) the new volumes.

-When "On" is selected:

A volume that is encrypted by CM is created.

-When "Off" is selected:

A volume that is not encrypted is created.

●Target RAID Group/Thin Provisioning Pool

•When "Type" is "Standard"

-Radio buttons to select a RAID group

Select the RAID group in which the ODX Buffer volume is created.

•When "Enable" is selected, the capacity and the unit are not available.

•The capacity for created ODX Buffer volume is not displayed. Use the [Volume] screen to check

the volume capacity after volume creation is complete.

•When "Thin Provisioning" is selected for "Type", selecting on or off for "Encryption by CM" is not

available.

•When "Encryption by CM" is "On", a RAID group that is configured with SEDs cannot be selected.

When creating an ODX Buffer volume in a RAID group that is configured by SEDs, select "Off".

•When the encryption mode is disabled, "Encryption by CM" is not displayed.

•When "Encryption by CM" is "On", a RAID group that is configured with SEDs cannot be selected.

•RAID groups in the following conditions are not displayed in the target RAID group list:

-RAID groups that are registered in TPPs

-RAID groups that are registered in FTRPs

-RAID groups that are registered as REC Disk Buffers

-RAID groups in which 128 volumes are already created

-RAID groups for which "Usage" is "Temporary"

-RAID groups with free space that is less than 1GB

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

315

•When "Type" is "Thin Provisioning"

-Radio buttons to select a TPP

Select the TPP in which the ODX Buffer volume is created.

→A confirmation screen appears.

TPPs that are registered in FTRPs are not displayed in the target Thin Provisioning Pool list.

When using the maximum free space in the RAID group to create an ODX Buffer volume without

specifying the capacity, select the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space". A "Standard" type

volume can be created using the maximum free space.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Name" is not input

•When the name overlaps with an existing volume name for "Name"

•When the "Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space" is cleared and "Capacity" is not input

•When the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected and the capacity of a

created ODX Buffer volume is less than 1GB

•When the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected and the capacity of a

created ODX Buffer volume exceeds the maximum capacity

•When the capacity that is specified for "Capacity" exceeds the maximum capacity that can be

created

•When the maximum number of volumes that can be created is exceeded

•When free space in the RAID group or TPP is insufficient

•LDE is being performed in the target RAID group

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

316

3Click the [OK] button.

→ODX Buffer volume creation starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Setting] screen.

End of procedure

8.2.11 Modify Copy Parameters

This function sets the parameters to enable automatic reporting when the SDP capacity is insufficient during a

SnapOPC+ session and specifies the unit of the area allocation to the SDV (SDPE). If the copy source data

exceeds the physical capacity of copy destination (and when the free SDP does not exist), an error occurs in

the relevant copy session and other older copy sessions. This function prevents stopping copy session when

the capacity shortage occurs. There are three methods for notification; E-mail, SNMP Trap, and syslog. The

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system reports the notification using the method specified in "11.2.9.1 Setup Event

Notification" (page 880). When reporting, select the notification method in advance.

The procedure to modify copy parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Modify Copy Parameters] in [Action].

•Registering the license for the Advanced Copy feature is required to use SnapOPC+.

•Make sure to set the notification method by using the procedure in "11.2.9.1 Setup Event Notification"

(page 880) to automatically report when the SDP usage exceeds the threshold.

•Notification of the shortage of SDP capacity is sent only once for each policy level. Even if the threshold is

exceeded again within the 24 hours from the first notification, the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system does

not report that effect. After 24 hours has passed, the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system sends a

notification again.

•If the threshold for multiple policies is satisfied at the same time, the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

notifies of the highest policy level.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

317

2Specify the threshold for each policy level, and click the [Modify] button.

●Policy of Snap Data Pool

•Policy Level 1 (Informational) Threshold

If the usage of SDP exceeds the specified threshold, the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system notifies

that effect as the Policy Level 1 (Informational).

Specify between 1% and 97% for the threshold.

•Policy Level 2 (Warning) Threshold

If the usage of SDP exceeds the specified threshold, the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system notifies

that effect as the Policy Level 2 (Warning).

Specify between 2% and 98% for the threshold.

•Policy Level 3 (Error) Threshold

If the usage of SDP exceeds the specified threshold, the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system notifies

that effect as the Policy Level 3 (Error). Specify between 3% and 99% for the threshold.

●SDPE Setting

•SDPE

Specify Snap Data Pool Element (SDPE), that is the unit of allocation to the SDV.

-1GB

-2GB

-4GB

→A confirmation screen appears.

If the magnitude relation is not "Threshold for a policy level 1" → "Threshold for policy level 2" →

"Threshold for policy level 3", an error screen appears.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

318

3Click the [OK] button.

→The specified copy parameters are registered.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Snap Data Pool] screen.

End of procedure

8.2.12 Set Copy Path

This function sets copy path information between the ETERNUS Disk storage systems required for performing

REC using the wizard screen.

Copy path information indicates the path (copy path and the storage system where the copy path is set) used

for performing REC.

Not only copy path information of the local device but also the information between remote devices can be

created.

The following ETERNUS Disk storage systems support the [Set Copy Path] function.

•ETERNUS DX90 S2

•ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2

•ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2

•ETERNUS DX90

•ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700

•ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000

•ETERNUS6000

In this section, the storage system that is used to create copy paths is referred to as "local device" and the

storage system that is connected to is referred to as a "remote device".

The following settings are available for the [Set Copy Path] function:

(1)Register Device Information (Register)

(2)Create Copy Path (Create)

(3) Save (Save)

(4) Apply Copy Path (Apply)

(5)Measure Round Trip Time (Measure)

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

319

•To create copy path information between different models of ETERNUS Disk storage systems (such as

ETERNUS DX440 S2 and ETERNUS4000), be sure to create the information on the newer model of

ETERNUS Disk storage system (ETERNUS DX440 S2 in the above example). The copy path creating

function on an older model may not have a function to add the device information for newer models or

the created path information file cannot be applied to newer models.

•When creating the copy path information between ETERNUS DX S2 series (*1) with an old controller

firmware version (V10L2x or earlier) and ETERNUS DX S2 series with a new controller firmware version

(V10L3x or later), use the storage system with controller firmware version V10L3x or later (the new

storage system) to create the copy path information. If the copy path information is created with an

ETERNUS DX S2 series with controller firmware version V10L2x or earlier (an old storage system), a device

information file that is created by a new storage system cannot be used for the old storage system. In this

case, the device information of the new storage system must be specified manually.

*1: ETERNUS DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, or ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2

•To use an iSCSI port as the copy path, there are some restrictions for applying the copy path information

files that are created by new storage systems or old storage systems. Refer to "Applying copy path

information files with IPv6" (page 340) for details.

•When the controller firmware version V10L3x or later is used, the IP versions that can be used for an iSCSI

port (except an iSCSI port for older storage system connection) are as follows; IPv4, IPv6 (Link Local), or

IPv6 (Connect IP). A copy path can be created between iSCSI ports that are the same IP version.

•Copy paths cannot be created when the same ETERNUS Disk storage system is set for the local device and

remote device.

•If the Box ID is changed after setting the copy path, REC will no longer run. Create copy paths again with

the new Box ID, and then apply the new copy path information to all the related ETERNUS Disk storage

systems again.

•Different types of interfaces (FC, iSCSI 1Gbit/s, iSCSI 10Gbit/s) cannot exist together on an REC path

(connection between a local device and a remote device).

•Up to 16 remote devices can be connected from one storage system.

•Up to 8 copy paths can be created between a pair of storage systems.

•Up to 32 destination ports (FC-RA) can be connected from one port.

•Up to 16 destination ports (iSCSI-RA) can be connected from one port.

•If a copy path, which is being used in an REC, was modified, it may affect operations, such as the REC

being stopped. Confirm that REC is not in use before modifying the information. To check whether REC is

in use, refer to the copy session list of remote copy.

•Copy path information files cannot be applied to the storage system when the port mode of the port set

in the copy path information does not match the port mode of the adapter installed in the storage system

to be applied to. Modify the copy path information or switch the port mode on the storage system in

advance. Refer to "9.2.3.11 Modify Port Mode" (page 571) for switching port modes.

•Copy path information files cannot be applied to the storage system when the port type (FC or iSCSI) that

is specified in the copy path information does not match the port type of the adapter that is installed in

the storage system. In addition, if the port type is iSCSI, a copy path information file cannot be applied to

the storage system when the IP address and iSCSI name in the copy path information file do not match

the specification of the adapter that is installed in the storage system.

•Before measuring the round trip time, set a physical path properly between the ETERNUS Disk storage

systems. When a copy path has an error, the round trip time cannot be measured correctly.

•It takes a maximum of 160 seconds to measure the round trip time.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

320

The procedure to set an REC copy path is as follows:

Operation Mode Selection

In this screen, select the operation mode.

Procedure

1Click [Set Copy Path] in [Action].

•Only copy path information files created/saved with this function can be loaded with this function.

•The device information files that are exported/saved by the following storage systems can be loaded for

this function:

-ETERNUS DX90 S2

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2

-ETERNUS DX90

-ETERNUS DX410/DX440

-ETERNUS DX8100/DX8400/DX8700

-ETERNUS4000

-ETERNUS8000

-ETERNUS6000

•Use the procedure in "8.2.13 Delete All Copy Path" (page 343) to delete the copy path information in the

local device. The copy path information of the local device is initialized.

•The round trip time can be measured only between the local device and a remote device that has a

physical path to the local device. When a copy path is created between remote devices, apply a copy path

information file to the applicable device before measuring the round trip time.

•The round trip time can be measured only when the connection type is "Remote".

•To change the measured round trip time, refer to "8.2.17 Measure Round Trip Time" (page 349).

•To change the link speed, create a copy path with a new link speed by using this function, and apply the

created copy path to the related storage systems.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

321

2Select the operation mode, and click the [Next >>] button.

•Operation Mode

-Create Copy Path

Create a copy path and apply to the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

-Apply Copy Path

Apply the existing copy path information file to the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

The displayed screen is different depending on the selected operation.

■When selecting "Create Copy Path"

The [Base Information Selection] screen appears. Proceed to "Register Device Information" (page 322).

■When selecting "Apply Copy Path"

The [Copy Path Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to "Copy Path Information File

Selection" (page 336).

End of procedure

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

322

In this screen, register the device information to which the copy path is created.

Procedure

1Select a device information selection method in the [Base Information Selection] screen,

and click the [Next >>] button.

•Base Information

-Backup Path File

The copy path information file previously applied is used.

-Path File

The copy path information file stored in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is used.

-Not use

Copy path is created manually.

The displayed screen is different depending on the selected item.

■When selecting "Backup Path File"

→The [Check Registered Device Information] screen appears. Proceed to Step 3.

■When selecting "Path File"

→The [Copy Path Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to Step 2.

■When selecting "Not use"

→The [Device Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to Step 7.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

323

2Input the location where the copy path information file that to be used, and click the [Next

>>] button.

•Copy Path Information File

Input the location where the copy path information file that to be used.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the location, or input the location directly.

→The [Check Registered Device Information] screen appears.

3Select a device to register the information (multiple selections can be made), and click the

[Next >>] button.

•Checkboxes for selecting a device

A list of the ETERNUS Disk storage system information specified in the copy path information file

previously applied or stored in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.

Select the storage system to create a copy path.

→A confirmation screen appears.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

324

4Click the [OK] button.

→The [Device Configuration Setting] screen appears.

5Set the port to be used for the copy path, and click the [Next >>] button.

•Port Type

Select the port type to set a copy path. The displayed contents vary depending on the device type.

-For ETERNUS DX90 S2

FC 1-Port, FC 2-Port, iSCSI 1-Port, iSCSI 2-Port, iSCSI-RA (*1)

-For ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2

FC 2-Port, FC 4-Port, iSCSI 2-Port, iSCSI-RA (*1)

-For ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2

FC 2-Port, FC 4-Port, iSCSI 2-Port, iSCSI-RA (*1)

-For ETERNUS DX90

FC 4-Port

-For ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700 or ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000

FC 1-Port, FC 2-Port, FC 4-Port, iSCSI-RA 1-Port, iSCSI-RA 2-Port

-For ETERNUS6000

FC 2-Port, FC 4-Port

*1: iSCSI-RA is a dedicated adapter that is used for REC between the local device and the ETERNUS DX400

series, the ETERNUS DX8000 series, the ETERNUS4000, or the ETERNUS8000.

•Check to use as RA (for an ETERNUS Disk storage system that is not the ETERNUS6000)

Select the port to set a copy path as RA.

The port number is displayed at right side of the checkbox. When "iSCSI-RA", "iSCSI-RA 1-Port", or

"iSCSI-RA 2-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field, all ports are automatically selected.

- #x (x: Port number (0 - 3))

-When "FC 1-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field: #0 (#1, #2 and #3 cannot be selected.)

-When "FC 2-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field: #0, #1 (#2 and #3 cannot be selected.)

-When "FC 4-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field: #0, #1, #2, #3

-When "iSCSI 1-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field: #0 (#1 cannot be selected.)

-When "iSCSI 2-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field: #0, #1

-When "iSCSI-RA" is selected in the "Port Type" field: #0, #1 (All ports are selected.)

-When "iSCSI-RA 1-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field: #0 (#0 is selected.)

-When "iSCSI-RA 2-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field: #0, #1 (All ports are selected.)

When no storage system to register the information is selected, the [Device Information File

Selection] screen appears. Proceed to Step 7.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

325

•Initiator / Target Setting

Select the port mode to set a copy path as RA.

-Initiator

-Target

The displayed screen is different depending on the port settings.

■When "FC 1-Port", "FC 2-Port", or "FC 4-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field

•When a device for which port setting is not completed exists

→The [Device Configuration Setting] screen appears again. Proceed to Step 5.

•When port setting is completed for all the selected devices

→The [Device Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to Step 7.

■When "iSCSI-RA", "iSCSI-RA 1-Port", or "iSCSI-RA 2-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field

→The [iSCSI Port Information Setting] screen appears. Proceed to Step 6.

■When "iSCSI 1-Port" or "iSCSI 2-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field and one or more ports used as

"RA" exist

→The [iSCSI Port Information Setting] screen appears. Proceed to Step 6.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

326

6Set the iSCSI port in the [iSCSI Port Information Setting] screen, and click the [Next >>]

button.

•IP Version

Select the IP version of the port to set a copy path.

If the copy path is already specified for the port when the copy path information file is being loaded,

the IP version that is set for the port is selected as the default setting. For other ports, "IPv4" is set as

the default setting.

This item is not displayed when "Port Type" is "iSCSI-RA" (for older storage system connection),

"iSCSI-RA 1-Port", or "iSCSI-RA 2-Port".

-IPv4

-IPv6 (Link Local)

-IPv6 (Connect IP)

•IP Address

Input the IP address of the iSCSI port.

This item is required when "Port Type" is "iSCSI-RA" (for older storage system connection), "iSCSI-RA

1-Port", or "iSCSI-RA 2-Port" or when "IP Version" is "IPv4". If not specified, the field is blank.

The following input conditions apply:

-Numeric characters

-First text box: "1" - "255"

-Other text boxes: "0" - "255"

•IPv6 Link Local Address

Input the IPv6 link IP address of the iSCSI port.

This item is required when "IP Version" is "IPv6 (Link Local)".

Refer to "Available IPv6 Address" (page 757) for details. Note that the current setting is displayed by

an abbreviation.

This item is not displayed when "Port Type" is "iSCSI-RA" (for older storage system connection),

"iSCSI-RA 1-Port", or "iSCSI-RA 2-Port". If not specified, the field is blank.

The following input condition applies:

-fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 378) for details.

•IPv6 Connect IP Address

Input the IPv6 connect IP address of the iSCSI port.

This item is required when "IP Version" is "IPv6 (Connect IP)".

The following IPv6 addresses can be used; "global address", "unique local address", and "6to4

address". Refer to "Available IPv6 Address" (page 757) for details. Note that the current setting is

displayed by an abbreviation.

This item is not displayed when "Port Type" is "iSCSI-RA" (for older storage system connection),

"iSCSI-RA 1-Port", or "iSCSI-RA 2-Port". If not specified, the field is blank.

The following input condition applies:

-xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 378) for details.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

327

•iSCSI Name

Specify the iSCSI name of the iSCSI port (required). If not specified, the field is blank. Specify a

unique iSCSI name in the same device.

The following input conditions apply:

-Alphabetic characters (lower case) and numeric characters

-Symbols "-" (hyphen), "." (period) and ":" (colon)

-The name starts with "iqn." or "eui."

-4 - 223 characters

•Alias Name

Specify the Alias Name of the iSCSI port (can be omitted). If not specified, the field is blank.

The following input condition applies:

-Up to 31 alphanumeric characters

•User Name

Specify the user name to access the iSCSI port (can be omitted). After specifying the user name,

specify the "Password". If not specified, the field is blank.

The following input condition applies:

-Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols

•Password

Specify the password to access the iSCSI port (can be omitted). This item is required when setting

the "User Name". The entry is displayed with "*" or similar characters. If not specified, the field is

blank.

The following input condition applies:

-12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols

The displayed screen is different depending on the port setting status.

■When a device for which port setting is not completed exists

→The [Device Configuration Setting] screen appears again. Proceed to Step 5.

■When port setting is completed for all the selected devices

→The [Device Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to Step 7.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

328

7Specify whether to use the device information file, and click the [Next >>] button.

●Operation Method Selection

•Operation Method

Select whether to continue the device registration.

-Finish of Registration by File Reading

-Registration from File

When selecting "Registration from file", specify a file in the "Device Information File Selection"

field. When 128 devices are already registered, "Registration from file" cannot be selected.

●Device Information File Selection

•Device Information File

Input the location where the device information file is stored.

Click the [Browse...] button and specify the location, or directly input the path.

The displayed screen is different depending on the port setting status.

■When selecting "Registration from File"

→The [Device Configuration Setting] screen appears. Proceed to Step 5.

■When selecting "Finish of Registration by File Reading"

→The [Device Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to Step 8.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

329

8Select whether to continue registration of device information, and click the [Next >>]

button.

●Operation Method Selection

•Operation Method

Select whether to continue the device registration.

-Registration by manual operation

When selecting "Registration by manual operation", specify parameters in the "Device

Information Setting" field.

When 128 devices are already registered, "Registration by manual operation" cannot be

selected.

-Finish of Registration by File Reading

●Device Information Setting

•Device Type

Select the device type that is to be registered.

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2

-ETERNUS DX90 S2

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2

-ETERNUS DX90

-ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700

-ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000 MODEL400/600/800/1200/2200

-ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000 MODEL300/500/700/900/1100/2100

-ETERNUS6000

•Box ID

Input the Box ID of the storage system that is to be registered.

Box ID that is already registered in the ETERNUS Disk storage system cannot be specified.

The following input conditions apply:

-Alphabetic characters (upper case), numeric characters, spaces, and "#" (hash key characters)

-40 characters (fixed)

In the following conditions, check the Box ID for the relevant storage system from the [System

Settings] screen in the [System] navigation. Refer to "11.2.13.3 Change Box ID" (page 933) for

details.

•ETERNUS DX90 S2 (V10L30 or later)

•ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 (V10L30 or later)

•ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 (V10L30 or later)

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

330

•Unique Number

Input the unique number of the device to be registered.

Input conditions vary depending on the device type.

Unique number that is already registered in another ETERNUS Disk storage system cannot be

specified.

The following input conditions apply:

-For all device types:

4-digit hexadecimal (fixed)

-ETERNUS DX90 S2:

Input the value of the fifth and sixth bytes of the WWN.

[Example] For WWN 500000E0D4445800: [4458]

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2:

Input the value of the fifth and sixth bytes of the WWN.

[Example] For WWN 500000E0D404C500: [04C5]

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2:

Input the value of the fifth and sixth bytes of the WWN.

[Example] For WWN 500000E0D42F1000: [2F10]

-ETERNUS DX8700 S2:

Input the value of the fifth and sixth bytes of the WWN.

[Example] For WWN 500000E0D4314E00: [314E]

-ETERNUS DX90:

Input the value of the fifth and sixth bytes of the WWN.

[Example] For WWN 500000E0D062A100: [62A1]

-ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700 or

ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000:

Input the value of the sixth and seventh bytes of the WWN.

[Example] For WWN 2000000B5D6A1234: [1234]

-ETERNUS6000:

Input the value of the sixth and seventh bytes of the WWN.

[Example] For WWN 2000000E00CB5678: [5678]

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

331

The displayed screen is different depending on the port setting status.

■When selecting "Registration by manual operation"

→The [Device Configuration Setting] screen appears again. Proceed to Step 5.

■When selecting "Finish of Registration by File Reading"

→The [Check Registered Device Information] screen appears. Proceed to Step 9.

9Check the device information, and click the [Next >>] button.

→The [Copy Path Creation Device Selection] screen appears. Proceed to "Set Copy Path" (page 332).

End of procedure

•The unique number can be checked by the WWN of the FC port. All of the FC ports in a storage

system have the same unique number. The displayed screens for each storage system model are as

follows:

-For ETERNUS DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, or ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2:

→Port information (FC) of the [Channel Adapter Detail] screen

-For ETERNUS DX90:

→Port status (FC) of the [Storage System Status] screen

-For ETERNUS DX410/DX440, ETERNUS DX8100/DX8400/DX8700, or ETERNUS4000/

ETERNUS8000:

→CA Detailed Information screen (FC) of the [Device Status] screen

-For ETERNUS6000:

→WWN list (FC) of the [Device Status] screen

•If only iSCSI ports are installed in a storage system, the unique number can be checked by the

default iSCSI name. All of the iSCSI ports in a storage system have the same unique number. For

"iSCSI 1-Port" or "iSCSI 2-Port", the last four digits of the iSCSI name indicate the unique number.

[Example]

For the default iSCSI Name iqn.2000-09. com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus-dx400:00044205:

[4205].

Note that the iSCSI name is a parameter that can be customized. It is not possible to check whether

the iSCSI name is customized or not. In this case, create an REC device information file using the

[Export Storage Information] function and register the device by file reading.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

332

Set Copy Path

In this screen, set a copy path. Specify the Box ID of the target device in which the copy path is created, and

set the line information between devices.

Procedure

1Click the [Remote Device Box ID] link to create a copy path.

→The [Copy Path Setting] dialog box appears.

2Set a copy path in the [Copy Path Setting] dialog box and click the [OK] button.

●Copy Path Setting

•Line Setting

Select a copy path. Up to eight copy paths can be selected.

Checkboxes are displayed only for the combinations meeting all the following conditions

(combinations to which a copy path can be set):

-The same port type (FC, iSCSI, or iSCSI-RA) is used for both the local device and remote device.

-The same IP version (v4, v6L, or v6C) is specified for the iSCSI ports that are used for both the

local and remote devices.

-RA port is used.

-For ETERNUS6000, the local device and the remote device have different port usages (Initiator/

Target).

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

333

●Line Setting

•Connection Type

Select the connection type for the remote device.

-Remote

Connecting the local and remote devices via a line.

-Direct

Connecting the local and remote devices without a line.

Even in connection via a switch, select "Direct" when not using a line.

•Link Speed

Specify the link speed (*1) for connection with the remote device. This item can be set when the

"Connection Type" is "Remote".

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 5-digit decimal number

-1- 65535 (Mbit/s)

*1: For the "Link Speed" field, specify the WAN bandwidth (a total of multiple lines, if used) that can be

actually used for REC. For some cases such as using the bandwidth control device, the WAN bandwidth

that can be used for REC is designated. In this case, specify the designated value. In the ETERNUS Disk

storage systems, the WAN bandwidth control is unavailable. To control WAN bandwidth, using the

bandwidth control device is required.

When using a line device with the compression function, specify the bandwidth (a total of multiple lines,

if used) that can be used after compression. In the ETERNUS Disk storage systems, data compression is

unavailable. To compress data, using a line device with the compression function is required.

Example 1: When the bandwidth control device is not used

Line bandwidth (*2): 200Mbit/s (All available for REC)

The number of lines (*3): 4 (200Mbit/s for all)

Link speed = 200 (Mbit/s) x 4 = 800 (Mbit/s)

Example 2: When the bandwidth control device is used

Line bandwidth with bandwidth limit (*2): 100Mbit/s

(100Mbit/s out of 200Mbit/s line bandwidth is available for REC)

The number of lines (*3): 2 (100Mbit/s for all)

Link speed = 100 (Mbit/s) x 2 = 200 (Mbit/s)

Example 3: When the line device has no compression function

Line bandwidth (*2): 200Mbit/s (All available for REC)

The number of lines (*3): 2 (200Mbit/s for all)

Compression ratio: 0 (%) (No compression)

Link speed = 200 (Mbit/s) x 2 / (1 - 0 (%)) = 400 (Mbit/s)

Example 4: When the line device has the compression function

Line bandwidth (*2): 200Mbit/s (All available for REC)

The number of lines (*3): 2 (200Mbit/s for all)

Compression ratio: 20 (%) (20% for all)

Link speed = 200 (Mbit/s) x 2 / (1 - 20 (%)) = 500 (Mbit/s)

*2: The line bandwidth that the user has signed up to be used for REC

*3: The number of lines that the user has signed up to be used for REC

To change the link speed, create a copy path with a new link speed by using this function, and

apply the created copy path to the related storage systems.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

334

→The [Copy Path Creation Device Selection] screen appears.

3Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 the same number of times as the number of storage systems to set

copy paths.

4When setting a copy path is completed for all the storage systems, click the [Next >>]

button.

→The [Download File] screen appears. Proceed to "Save Copy Path" (page 335).

End of procedure

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

335

Save Copy Path

In this screen, save the copy path information that is created in the procedure in "Set Copy Path" (page 332).

Procedure

1Click the [Save] button to save the copy path information.

→A dialog box to download the file appears.

2Save the copy path information file.

The default file name is "RecPath_serial number for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system_YYYY-MM-

DD_hh-mm-ss.bin". (YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the save screen (Step 1) is

displayed.)

3Click the [Next >>] button.

→The [Device Connection List] screen appears. Proceed to "Apply Copy Path Information" (page 337).

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

336

End of procedure

Copy Path Information File Selection

In this screen, select the copy path information file to be used.

Procedure

1Input the location where the copy path information file to be used is stored, and click the

[Next >>] button.

•Copy Path Information File

Input the location where the copy path information file is stored.

Click the [Browse...] button and specify the location, or directly input the path.

→The [Device Connection List] screen appears. Proceed to "Apply Copy Path Information" (page 337).

End of procedure

Clicking the [Done] button displays the [Finish Copy Path Setting Wizard] screen. Click the [OK]

button to finish the [Set Copy Path] function.

Perform this procedure only when "Apply Copy Path" is selected in the procedure in "Operation Method

Selection" (page 329).

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

337

Apply Copy Path Information

In this screen, apply the copy path information.

Procedure

1Confirm that the copy path is set between the devices in the [Device Connection List] screen,

and click the [Next >>] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Application of the copy path information starts. After application completes, the [Measure Round

Trip Time] screen appears. Proceed to "Measure Round Trip Time" (page 338).

Click the Box ID of the remote device to display the [Check Copy Path Information Setting] dialog box

where you can check the details of copy path information.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

338

End of procedure

Measure Round Trip Time

In this screen, measure the round trip time between the local and remote devices.

Procedure

1Select a remote device to measure the round trip time in the [Measure Round Trip Time]

screen (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Next >>] button.

•Checkboxes for selecting a remote device

Checkboxes are displayed only for a remote device with a copy path to the local device with a

"remote" type connection. Select the remote device to measure the round trip time.

→A confirmation screen appears.

•If the port mode does not match between the device configuration and the applied copy path

information file configuration ("CA" in the storage system and "RA" in the copy path information

file), an error screen appears.

•The [Finish Copy Path Setting Wizard] screen appears in the following conditions. Click the [Done]

button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

-No remote device with a copy path to the local device

-The connection type for all the remote devices is "Direct"

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

339

2Click the [OK] button.

→Measurement of the round trip time starts. After measurement completes, the [Measure Round Trip

Time Result] screen appears.

3Check the measured round trip time, and click the [Next >>] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

4Click the [OK] button.

→Setting the round trip time starts.

5After setting the time, click the [Done] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

340

■Applying copy path information files with IPv6

The following storage systems and copy path information files are used in this example.

The following table shows whether an exported device information file from each storage system can be

loaded when creating a copy path information file.

Available: The device information file can be loaded

N/A: The device information file cannot be loaded (manual input of the device information is required)

Storage system Target model Current controller

firmware version

Exported copy path information file

New storage

systems

ETERNUS DX90 S2

ETERNUS DX410 S2/

DX440 S2

ETERNUS DX8100 S2/

DX8700 S2

V10L3x or later

(IPv6 support)

New file

(IPv4, IPv6 (Link Local), or IPv6 (Connect IP) can

be used for the iSCSI-RA port)

Old storage

systems

ETERNUS DX90 S2

ETERNUS DX410 S2/

DX440 S2

ETERNUS DX8100 S2/

DX8700 S2

V10L2x or earlier

(IPv6 not

supported)

Old file

(only IPv4 can be used for the iSCSI-RA port)

Old storage

systems

(other models)

ETERNUS DX90

ETERNUS DX410/DX440

ETERNUS DX8100/

DX8700

ETERNUS4000/

ETERNUS8000

ETERNUS6000

Any firmware

version

(IPv6 not

supported)

N/A

(When creating copy paths between new storage

systems and old storage systems or between new

storage systems and old storage systems (other

models), make sure to create a copy path

information file using the new ETERNUS Disk

storage system. In this case, creating copy path

information files by using the old storage system

(other models) is not available.)

Copy path information file The storage system from which

the device information file is downloaded

Name The storage system

to which the file is

created

Old storage systems

(other models)

Old storage systems New storage systems

Old file Old storage systems N/A Available N/A

New file

(IPv6 address (*1) is

not included)

New storage systems Available Available Available

New file

(IPv6 address (*1) is

included)

New storage systems Available Available Available

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

341

■Applying copy path information files

•Obtain the copy path information file from the storage system to which the copy path is to be created and

apply this file to the old storage systems (other models), the old storage systems, and the new storage

systems

Available: The copy path information file can be applied

*1: IPv6 (Link Local) and/or IPv6 (Connect IP)

*2: Only an IPv4 address is used for the copy path information file

*3: Only an IPv4 path can be used for the copy path information file

*4: Regarded as an IPv4 address is used for the copy path information file

*5: The copy path information file of the target storage system includes IPv6 paths

•Obtain the copy path information file from the storage system to which the copy path information file was

applied

Available: The copy path information file can be obtained correctly

N/A: The copy path information file cannot be obtained correctly

*1: IPv6 (Link Local) and/or IPv6 (Connect IP)

*2: Only an IPv4 address is used for the copy path information file

*3: Regarded as an IPv4 address is used for the copy path information file

*4: The IPv6 path information can be obtained correctly

Copy path information file The storage system to which the file is applied

Name The storage system to

which the file is created

Old storage

systems

(other models)

Old storage

systems

New storage

systems

Old file Old storage systems Available (*2) Available (*2) Available (*4)

New file

(IPv6 address (*1) is

not included)

New storage systems Available (*2) Available (*4) Available (*4)

New file

(IPv6 address (*1) is

included)

New storage systems Available (*3) Available (*3) Available (*5)

Copy path information file The storage system from which the file is obtained

Name The storage system to

which the file is created

Old storage

systems

(other models)

Old storage

systems

New storage

systems

Old file Old storage systems Available (*2) Available (*2) Available (*3)

New file

(IPv6 address (*1) is

not included)

New storage systems Available (*2) Available (*3) Available (*3)

New file

(IPv6 address (*1) is

included)

New storage systems N/A N/A Available (*4)

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

342

Setting example 1

[Device information]

Storage system 1 (old storage system)

Storage system 2 (old storage system)

Storage system 3 (new storage system) ← Local device

Storage system 4 (new storage system)

[Copy path information]

Storage system 1 – Storage system 2 (IPv4)

Storage system 1 – Storage system 3 (IPv4)

Storage system 3 – Storage system 4 (IPv6)

When the local device is storage system 3 (or storage system 4), load the device information file from the

copy path between storage system 1 and storage system 4, and then create the copy path information file.

When the copy path information file that was obtained from storage system 3 (or storage system 4) is applied

to the copy path between storage system 1 and storage system 4, the copy path can be used correctly.

Setting example 2

[Device information]

Storage system 1 (old storage system) ← Local device

Storage system 2 (old storage system)

Storage system 3 (new storage system)

Storage system 4 (new storage system)

[Copy path information]

Storage system 1 – Storage system 2 (IPv4)

Storage system 1 – Storage system 3 (IPv4)

Storage system 3 – Storage system 4 (IPv6)

When the local device is storage system 1 (or storage system 2), obtain the copy path information that was

applied when setting example 1.

If the relevant copy path information is applied to the copy path between storage system 1 and storage

system 4, the IPv6 addresses of storage system 3 and storage system 4 are not applied correctly. In this case,

a copy cannot be performed or an unexpected copy path is created.

•When applying the copy path information file to an old storage system (other models), the [Convert Copy

Path] function must be used to convert the format. Refer to "8.2.16 Convert Copy Path" (page 347) for

details.

•Make sure to obtain the copy path information file that includes the IPv6 address of the new storage

system. If copy path information is obtained from an old storage system to which the copy path

information file is already applied, the IPv6 address cannot be obtained correctly. If this copy path

information file is applied to the new storage system, copying may not be available or copy paths may be

set to an unexpected remote device.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

343

8.2.13 Delete All Copy Path

This function deletes all of the copy path information between local and remote devices registered in the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

The procedure to delete all of the copy paths is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Delete All Copy Path] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Deletion of copy paths starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

•If a copy path, which is being used in an REC, was deleted, it may affect operations, such as the REC being

stopped. Confirm that REC is not in use before modifying the information.

To check whether REC is in use, refer to "8.1.3 Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)" (page 261).

•This function deletes all of the copy paths configured in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. To delete

some of the copy paths, refer to "8.2.12 Set Copy Path" (page 318).

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

344

8.2.14 Export All Copy Path

This function exports the copy path information registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, and saves

the information in a file.

The saved file can be used as path information when creating a copy path, so that manual registration of the

path information will not be required.

The procedure to export the copy path information is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Export All Copy Path] in [Action].

2Click the [Create Data] button.

→The copy path information, which has been registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, is

exported.

After the copy path information export has been finished, a screen to execute downloading the file

is displayed.

•A copy path information cannot be exported when it has not been registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system.

•The format of the copy path information file has been changed in controller firmware version V10L30.

When the copy path information includes an IPv6 address, make sure to export the path information file

from an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system with controller firmware version V10L3x or later. An ETERNUS

DX Disk storage system with controller firmware version V10L2x or earlier cannot export correct IPv6

addresses.

If the copy path information has not been registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, an error

screen appears.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

345

3Click the [Download] button.

→A dialog box to download the file appears.

4Save the copy path information file.

The default file name is "RecPath_serial number for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system_YYYY-MM-

DD_hh-mm-ss.bin". (YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen (Step 3) is

displayed.)

5Click the [Close] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

8.2.15 Export Storage Information

This function exports the FCRA/iSCSI-RA installation information in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, and

saves the information in a file.

The saved file can be used as device information when creating a copy path, so that manual registration of the

device information will not be required.

The procedure to export the REC device information is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Export Storage Info] in [Action].

The format of the device information file has been changed in controller firmware version V10L30. A device

information file that is obtained using an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system with controller firmware V10L3x

or later cannot be applied to an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system with V10L2x or earlier controller firmware

when creating a copy path information file. Note that a device information file that is obtained from an

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system with controller firmware V10L2x or earlier can be applied to an ETERNUS DX

Disk storage system with V10L3x controller firmware.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

346

2Click the [Create Data] button.

→The REC device information, which has been registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, is

exported.

After the REC device information export has been finished, a screen to execute downloading the file

is displayed.

3Click the [Download] button.

→A dialog box to download the file appears.

4Save the REC device information file.

The default file name is "RecRAInfo_serial number for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system_YYYY-MM-

DD_hh-mm-ss.bin".

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen (Step 3) is displayed.)

5Click the [Close] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

347

8.2.16 Convert Copy Path

This function outputs the copy path information file for past ETERNUS Disk storage system (hereinafter,

referred to as "previous models").

The copy path information file that is created in ETERNUS DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, or ETERNUS

DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 is converted to a file format that can be read by previous models and applied for

enabling the execution of Remote Equivalent Copy (REC) with previous models.

The applicable models are shown as follows:

•ETERNUS DX90

•ETERNUS DX410/DX440

•ETERNUS DX8100/DX8400/DX8700

•ETERNUS4000

•ETERNUS8000

•ETERNUS6000

The procedure to convert copy path information file is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Convert Copy Path] in [Action].

2Select the copy path information file that is to be converted, and click the [Create Data]

button.

•Copy Path Information File

This specifies the copy path information file for which the file format is converted.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the copy path information file, or directly input the path to

the copy path information file.

•Target Device Box ID

The Box ID of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system set as file format conversion target in the copy

path information file that was read is displayed as an option.

Select the Box ID of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system for which the file format is converted.

•Conversion is performed only on the copy path information file created by the procedure in "8.2.12 Set

Copy Path" (page 318) or the copy path information file obtained by the procedure in "8.2.14 Export All

Copy Path" (page 344).

•This function cannot be executed unless there is an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system set as the

conversion target in the copy path information file.

Apply the converted copy path information file to each ETERNUS DX Disk storage system by using the copy

path setting function for each ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that is set as a conversion target.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

348

→The copy path information, which has been registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, is

exported. After the copy path information export has been finished, a screen to execute

downloading of the file is displayed.

3Select the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that is to be converted, and click the [Download]

button.

→A dialog box to download the file appears.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the selected file is not a copy path information file

•When the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that is to be converted does not exist in the copy path

information file

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

349

4Save the copy path information file.

The default file name is "RecPathConvt_serial number for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system_YYYY-

MM-DD_hh-mm-ss.bin".

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen (Step 3) is displayed.)

5Click the [Close] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

8.2.17 Measure Round Trip Time

This function measures the round trip time between the local device and the remote device.

"Round trip time" is the time taken to make a communication between two devices.

Only one remote device can be measured at a time.

The procedure to measure the REC round trip time is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the remote device to measure the REC round trip time, and click [Get Round Trip Time]

in [Action].

•Round trip time can be measured only when the connection type is "Remote". Round trip time cannot be

measured when the connection type is "Direct".

•Set the REC session status to "Suspend" between devices before measuring.

•Make sure that the physical path is correctly configured between devices before measuring. When a copy

path has an error, the round trip time cannot be measured correctly.

•If the path between devices is changed, measure the round trip time again.

•Round trip time measurement requires a maximum of 160 seconds.

A remote device with "Direct" as the connection type cannot be selected.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

350

2Click the [Measure] button.

→Measurement of round trip time starts.

3Change the "Round Trip Time (msec)" value if necessary, and click the [Modify] button.

•Round Trip Time (msec)

The round trip time measurement result between the local device and the remote device is

displayed.

If a measurement error has occurred, the field is blank. The value can be changed. The following

describes the recommended round trip time.

-Asynchronous copy: within 100 (msec)

-Synchronous copy: within 50 (msec)

→A confirmation screen appears.

•If the round trip time has not been entered, the [Modify] button cannot be clicked.

•If the entered round trip time does not satisfy the input conditions, an error screen appears.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

351

4Click the [OK] button.

→The round trip time measurement result is updated in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

5Click the [Done] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

8.2.18 Modify REC Multiplicity

This function specifies multiplicity or priority level when performing Remote Equivalent Copy (REC).

It is not necessary to change the default setting (Auto) for normal use. This function can adjust the copy

performance to give priority to REC over work I/O or to reduce the affect on work I/O.

When the local device and the remote device are connected by remote connection

•If "Auto" is selected for the specification mode, REC is performed with the recommended multiplicity that is

calculated by the obtained round trip time.

If the round trip time is not measured, "***" is displayed in the "Recommended Multiplicity" field.

To display the recommended multiplicity, use the procedure in "8.2.17 Measure Round Trip Time" (page

349).

•If "Manual" is selected for the specification mode, REC will be performed with the specified multiplicity.

When the local device and the remote device are connected by remote connection

•When the priority level is "Automatic", REC is performed using the priority level that is specified using the

procedure in "8.2.6 Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 298).

•When the priority level is from "1" to "8", REC is performed using the specified priority level.

•If "***" is displayed in the "Recommended Multiplicity" field of the Remote Box ID List, and "Auto" has

been selected for the specification mode, REC will not be performed with the appropriate multiplicity. To

select "Auto", measure the round trip time using the procedure in "8.2.6 Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page

298).

•If the path between local and remote devices has been changed, measure the round trip time and set the

multiplicity again.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

352

The procedure to modify REC multiplicity is as follows:

Procedure

1Click the [Modify REC Multiplicity] in [Action].

2Specify the multiplicity, and click the [Set] button.

●Remote Box ID List

•Priority Level

Select the priority level between "1" and "8". When the "Connection Type" is "Remote", a "-" (hyphen)

is displayed.

-Auto

REC is performed using the priority level (Automatic Priority/High Priority/Middle Priority/Low

Priority/Very Low Priority) that is specified with the [Modify EC/OPC Priority] function.

-1 - 8

Specify from "1" to "8" for the REC priority level. "1" corresponds to "Very Low Priority", and "8"

corresponds to "High Priority" for the [Modify EC/OPC Priority] function.

•Specification Mode

Select the specification mode for multiplicity. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

-Auto

-Manual

•Multiplicity

When the "Specification Mode" is "Manual", specify multiplicity between "1" and "1024". When

"Auto" is selected, or when the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

●Advanced Setting

•Copy Schedule Mode

Specify the REC copy schedule mode for each remote device. Use "Session Balancing" for normal

operation.

-Session Balancing

Copy sessions are scheduled evenly to each controlling CM-CPU for a copy source RAID group (a

RAID group to which the copy source volume belongs).

-Destination RAID Group Balancing

Only one copy session can be performed for each copy destination RAID group. This method pre-

vents unequal loading on a specific RAID group. This may improve the copy performance when

the copy source and the copy destination storage systems are connected by direct connection

and the copy destination RAID group is configured by Nearline disks.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

353

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→The REC multiplicity settings starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

•Copy performance is not improved by selecting "Destination RAID Group Balancing" in the

following conditions:

-When the type of the copy destination volume is not "Standard"

-When the copy destination volume "Standard" and concatenated

•Specify the same copy schedule mode for copy source and copy destination storage systems. If

different modes are specified, the copy performance may not improve as expected.

When "Manual" is selected for "Specification Mode" and numeric characters exceed the allowed range

(from 1 to 1024), an error screen appears.

Click [Advanced Setting] to specify the copy schedule mode.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

354

8.2.19 Modify REC Buffer

This function sets parameters of the REC Buffer for copying data via the REC Buffer (in Asynchronous

Consistency mode).

The "Consistency mode" secures the order of data transfer to the remote device for all of the specified REC

sessions. This mode requires constant securement of the dedicated REC Buffer in the cache memory. Copying

via REC Buffer stores multiple REC session I/Os in the REC Buffer for a certain period of time, and copies in

blocks.

The procedure to set the REC Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the target REC Buffers to be modified (multiple selections can be made), and click the

[Modify REC Buffer] in [Action].

•Perform REC Buffer settings in both the REC copy source and destination storage systems. Make the REC

Buffer size the same for the storage systems of the copy source and the destination. The size will be

adjusted to whichever is smaller.

•Take REC reverse operation into consideration and specify the same values for the REC Buffers

("Forwarding Interval", "Monitoring Time", "HALT Wait Timer", "I/O Priority Mode", and "Immediate HALT

Mode") in the copy source storage system and the copy destination storage system.

•When changing REC Buffers, suspend the sessions using the target REC Buffers.

•When deleting REC Buffers, stop the sessions using the target REC Buffers.

•When performing bidirectional data transfer, settings for "Send" and "Receive" REC Buffers in the ETERNUS

DX Disk storage system are required.

•The following REC Buffer capacity is secured for the cache memory of each controller:

-ETERNUS DX90 S2: 512MB

-ETERNUS DX410 S2: 4096MB

-ETERNUS DX440 S2: 8192MB

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 8192MB

•The number of REC Buffers, which can be configured, are as follows:

-ETERNUS DX90 S2: Up to 4

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: Up to 8

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: Up to 8

•This function cannot be used when the remote device and/or copy path is not set.

•If the usage of the REC Buffer, to which the REC Disk Buffer has already been assigned, is changed to

"Receive" or "Unused", the REC Disk Buffer assignment will be cleared (the REC Disk Buffer itself will not

be deleted).

•Cache memory is not only used for REC Buffers, but also used for the copy table. Note that the REC Buffer

with the maximum size for each model cannot be created depending on the memory capacity in the

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system and cache memory allocation for the copy table.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

355

2Change the REC Buffer configurations, and click the [Set] button.

●REC Buffer Setting List

•Usage

Specify the usage of the REC Buffer.

When setting the REC Buffer for sending, select "Send". When setting the REC Buffer for receiving,

select "Receive". When the target REC Buffer is not used, select "Unused".

•Remote Box ID

Select the Box ID for the remote device.

If the copy path information is deleted, "???" is displayed. Select "Unused" for REC Buffer usage or

select a new remote Box ID.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Size

Select the REC Buffer size.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-ETERNUS DX90 S2: 128MB, 256MB, 512MB

-ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, 2048MB

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, 2048MB

•Forwarding Interval

Select the data transfer intervals.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-1 sec., 2 sec., 4 sec., 8 sec., 15 sec., 30 sec., 45 sec., 60 sec., 75 sec., 90 sec., 105 sec., 120 sec.

•Monitoring Time

Specify the monitoring time, before transition to the "Halt" status for a copy session when an REC

Buffer shortage occurs. If the REC Buffer is in a high-load state for the specified monitoring time,

the copy session is automatically changed to "Halt" state. When "0 min." is specified in this field, REC

Buffer shortage monitoring is not performed.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-0 min., 1 min., 2 min., 3 min., 4 min., 5 min., 6 min., 7 min., 8 min., 9 min., 10 min., 11 min., 12

min., 13 min., 14 min., 15 min.

•HALT Wait Timer

Specify the maximum non-response time. During the non-response time, the host I/O response is

stopped to give priority to performing REC Buffer transfers in a high-load state. If the non-response

time exceeds the specified value, response to host I/O is restarted. However, the copy session is

changed to the "Halt" state. When "0 sec." is specified for this field, ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

gives priority to the host I/O, and the copy session is immediately changed to "Halt" state.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

-0 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec.

●Advanced Setting

"I/O Priority Mode" and "Immediate HALT Mode" can only be set when setting a copy operation or

host I/O tuning for each REC Buffer. It is not necessary to change the default setting ("Disable") for

normal use.

•I/O Priority Mode

Select either "Enable" or "Disable" for the "I/O Priority Mode" of the REC Buffer.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

"I/O Priority Mode" reduces the effect on host I/O when an initial copy for starting, restarting, or

recovering the copy function is performed.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

356

•Immediate HALT Mode

Select either "Enable" or "Disable" for the "Immediate HALT Mode" of the REC Buffer.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

"Immediate HALT Mode" reduces the effect on host I/O because of the insufficient of REC Buffer

when "HALT Wait Timer" is set to "0 sec.". Enable this item when the response to host I/O is reduced

even if "0 sec." is selected for the "HALT Wait Timer".

→A confirmation screen appears.

•This mode should only be used by users who want to maintain host I/O performance as much

as possible during REC.

•If "Enable" is selected and host I/O with a high load continues, it may take an extended period

of time for the data to reach an equivalent state. Reduce throughput by as much as possible to

avoid exceeding the line bandwidth of REC during initial copying.

•This mode should only be used by users who want to maintain host I/O performance as much

as possible during REC.

•Items that are set for this mode are only applied when "0 sec." is selected for "HALT Wait Timer".

•When "Enable" is selected, the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system changes the sessions using the

target REC Buffers to "Halt" if the capacity of a REC Buffer is insufficient. If this occurs, the initial

copy starts every time when recovering from the "Halt" status and the time required for the

order of data transfers cannot be guaranteed, resulting in this process taking an extended

period of time.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

357

3Click the [OK] button.

→The REC Buffer settings starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Buffer] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•The total size of the REC Buffer is larger than 8192MB (512MB for ETERNUS DX90 S2, and 4096MB

for ETERNUS DX410 S2)

•The Box ID for the remote device has been changed

•The same remote Box ID has been selected both for "Send " and for "Receive" as its usage

•When the usage of an REC Buffer is "Send" or "Receive", and its path to the remote Box ID has been

deleted

•An REC Buffer, which has already been deleted ("???" is displayed in the "Remote Box ID" field), still

exists

•When the setting contents of the REC Buffer has not been changed

•To change the remote Box ID, first specify "Unused" for the use of the corresponding group. Then,

click [Modify REC Buffer] again to specify a new remote Box ID and other information in the

corresponding group.

•To change "I/O Priority Mode" or "Immediate HALT Mode", click "Advanced Setting".

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

358

8.2.20 Assign REC Disk Buffer

This function reassigns REC Disk Buffers to an REC Buffer.

■Assigning an additional REC Disk Buffer

The procedure to assign additional REC Disk Buffers to an REC Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the REC Buffer, to which the REC Disk Buffer is to be assigned, and click [Assign REC

Disk Buffer] in [Action].

•The REC Disk Buffer can be assigned to an REC Buffer only when the REC Buffer's usage is "Send".

•The following number of REC Disk Buffers can be assigned to one REC Buffer:

-ETERNUS DX90 S2/DX410 S2: One or two REC Disk Buffers

-ETERNUS DX440 S2: One, two, or four REC Disk Buffers

-ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: One, two, or four REC Disk Buffers

•A single REC Disk Buffer cannot be assigned to multiple REC Buffers.

•When assigning multiple REC Disk Buffers to an REC Buffer, each REC Buffer has the following

requirements.

-The assigned REC Disk Buffers have the same drive type

("Online" REC Disk Buffers and "Nearline" REC Disk Buffers can be assigned in the same REC Buffer.

However, only assigning either "Online" REC Disk Buffers or "Nearline" REC Disk Buffers is recommended

since the available capacity and access performance may be reduced when these REC Disk Buffers are

used together.)

-The assigned REC Disk Buffers have the same number of drives (four or eight)

-The assigned REC Disk Buffers have the same encryption status ("CM", "-", or "SED")

•When assigning an additional REC Disk Buffer, use one with the same capacity. When using REC Disk

Buffers of different capacities, the smallest becomes the standard, and all other REC Disk Buffers are

regarded as having the same capacity as the smallest REC Disk Buffer. In this case, the remaining REC

Disk Buffer space will NOT be used.

When assigning REC Disk Buffers to REC Buffers, an REC Disk Buffer must be created in advance. Refer to

"8.2.21 Create REC Disk Buffer" (page 362) for details.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

359

2Click the [Add] button.

→The screen to add REC Disk Buffer assignment appears.

3Select the checkbox for the additional REC Disk Buffer to be assigned, and click the [OK]

button.

→The selected REC Disk Buffer is added.

•When assigning multiple REC Disk Buffers to an REC Buffer, select ones with the same capacity.

•An error screen appears in the following conditions:

-No REC Disk Buffers, which satisfy the assignment requirements, are registered to the ETERNUS

DX Disk storage system

-The number of REC Disk Buffers, which are assigned to an REC Buffer, exceeds the maximum

number which the storage system model supports

-The selected REC Disk Buffer does not satisfy the assignment requirements

-The selected REC Disk Buffer does not exist

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

360

4When the REC Disk Buffer assignment has been completed, click the [Modify] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

5Click the [OK] button.

→The REC Disk Buffer assignment starts.

6Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Buffer] screen.

End of procedure

■Deleting an REC Disk Buffer assignment

The procedure to delete the assignment of the REC Disk Buffers from the REC Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the REC Buffer to delete the assignment of the REC Disk Buffer, and click [Assign REC

Disk Buffer] in [Action].

•To delete the assignment of the REC Disk Buffer, click the [Delete] button for the target REC Disk

Buffer (RAID group).

•When RAID groups in the REC Disk Buffer are configured with both "Online" and "Nearline" drives,

"Online" is displayed.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

361

2To delete the assignment of the REC Disk Buffer, click the [Delete] button for the target REC

Disk Buffer (RAID group).

→The selected REC Disk Buffer is deleted from the list.

3Click the [Modify] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

4Click the [OK] button.

→Deletion of an REC Disk Buffer starts.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

362

5Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Buffer] screen.

End of procedure

8.2.21 Create REC Disk Buffer

This function creates an REC Disk Buffer.

When using the REC Consistency mode, REC Buffer shortage may occur due to errors (such as a bad line). Note

that the copy session will be halted if the REC Buffer shortage extends for a certain period of time. The REC

Disk Buffer is used for temporarily saving copy data to avoid these situations.

Requirements for Drive Selection

•The requirements for a RAID group that is to be used as an REC Disk Buffer are as follows:

-The number of member drives is four or eight

-Different drive types are not selected at the same time

•The following shows the recommended drive configuration of the RAID group:

-Select drives with the same capacity. If drives of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest

becomes the standard, and all other drives are regarded as the same capacity as the smallest drive. In

this case, the remaining drive space will NOT be used.

-Select drives with the same speed. If drives of different speed exist in a RAID group, access performance

of the RAID group may be affected.

-Dividing the mirroring pair drives into different lines (for ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2)

•Registering the license for the Advanced Copy feature is required to create an REC Disk Buffer.

•The RAID types, which can be used in REC Disk Buffer, are "High Performance (RAID1+0)" (drive configura-

tion: 2D+2M) and "High Performance (RAID1+0)" (drive configuration: 4D+4M).

•When encryption mode is disabled, an encrypted REC Disk Buffer cannot be created by CM.

•In the following conditions, REC Disk Buffers cannot be created;

-When Online, SSDs, and SEDs are combined in a single REC Disk Buffer

-When Nearline, SSDs, and SEDs are combined in a single REC Disk Buffer

-When resources for creating an REC Disk Buffer (such as the number of RAID groups and volume num-

bers) are insufficient

(When the maximum number of RAID groups or volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system, a new REC Disk Buffer cannot be created.)

•When the REC Disk Buffer creation process is complete, the REC Disk Buffer will be formatted

automatically.

•When assigning multiple REC Disk Buffers to an REC Buffer, each REC Buffer has different conditions.

Refer to "8.2.20 Assign REC Disk Buffer" (page 358) for details.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

363

•The following shows the recommended drive configuration of the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2:

-A mirroring pair should be distributed over drives that are connected to different SAS cascades (*1).

*1: The "SAS cascade" indicates the DEs that are connected to a single BRT port.

Same SAS cascade:

DE#x0, DE#x1, DE#x2, DE#x3 (x: 0 - F)

DE#x8, DE#x9, DE#xA, DE#xB (x: 0 - F)

[Example] SAS cascade for Port#0 of the BRT#0/#1: DE#00, DE#01, DE#02, DE#03

[Example] SAS cascade for Port#1 of the BRT#0/#1: DE#10, DE#11, DE#12, DE#13

The procedure to create an REC Disk Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Create REC Disk Buffer] in [Action].

2Specify the REC Disk Buffer detailed information, and click the [Create] button.

•Name

Input a RAID group name to be created.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

•Controlling CM

Select the controlling CM and CPU of the RAID group that is to be created.

"Automatic" and the installed "CM#x CPU#y" in normal status are displayed as options.

-Automatic

-CM#x CPU#y (x: CM number, y: CPU number)

Select "Automatic" for normal operations. When "Automatic" is selected, the CM-CPU that is to be

assigned is determined by the RAID group number. Refer to "Appendix F Automatic Controlling CM-

CPU Setting" (page 1011) for details.

•Encryption by CM

Select the RAID group encryption status with the radio button.

-On

Encryption by CM

-Off

Unencrypted

When the encryption mode is disabled, "On" cannot be selected.

•Checkbox to select drives

Select the checkbox for the drive to be used.

•Drives can be selected from the list of drives that is displayed for Tabular or from the drive

images that are displayed for Graphic. Click the Tabular tab to display a list of the drives or click

the Graphic tab to display drive images.

•Refer to "Requirements for Drive Selection" (page 362) to select a drive.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

364

●Advanced Setting

Specify the Stripe Depth only when performing the advanced performance tuning for each RAID

group that configures a TPP. It is not necessary to change the default setting (64KB) for normal use.

-Stripe Depth

Select the Stripe Depth value of the RAID group from 64KB, 128KB, 256KB, 512KB, or 1024KB.

→A confirmation screen appears.

3Click the [OK] button.

→Creation of an REC Disk Buffer starts.

4Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Disk Buffer] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When four or eight drives are not selected

•When Online, SSDs, and SEDs are combined in a single REC Disk Buffer

•When Nearline, SSDs, and SEDs are combined in a single REC Disk Buffer

•When the same name for the RAID group is specified as that of an existing RAID group

•When the RAID group name specified in the "Name" filed does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Name" is not input

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

365

8.2.22 Delete REC Disk Buffer

This function deletes an REC Disk Buffer.

The procedure to delete an REC Disk Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the REC Disk Buffer that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click

the [Delete REC Disk Buffer] button in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Deletion of an REC Disk Buffer starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Disk Buffer] screen.

End of procedure

REC Disk Buffers that have been assigned to the REC Buffer cannot be deleted.

If a selected REC Disk Buffer is assigned to the REC Buffer, an error screen appears.

Chapter 8 Advanced Copy Management

8.2 Functions in the Action Area for Advanced Copy

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

366

8.2.23 Format REC Disk Buffer

This function formats an REC Disk Buffer.

The procedure to format an REC Disk Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the REC Disk Buffers to be formatted (multiple selections can be made), and click the

[Format REC Disk Buffer] button in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→Formatting of an REC Disk Buffer starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Disk Buffer] screen.

End of procedure

•If an in-use REC Disk Buffer is formatted, the data stored in the REC Disk Buffer will be deleted.

•The following REC Disk Buffers cannot be formatted:

-The status is other than " Available" or " Readying"

-The REC Disk Buffer is blocked

The newly created REC Disk Buffer will be formatted automatically. In this case, it is not necessary to format

the REC Disk Buffer by using this function.

If an in-use REC Disk Buffer is formatted, the data stored in the REC Disk Buffer will be deleted.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

367

Chapter 9

Connectivity Management

This chapter describes connectivity management.

9.1 Connectivity Status

Connectivity status displays the status information of volumes.

Connectivity status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Connectivity status screen Category

Connectivity (Basic Information) Connectivity

Host Group Host Group

FC/FCoE Host FC

iSCSI Host iSCSI

SAS Host SAS

CA Port Group Port Group

FC Port FC

iSCSI Port iSCSI

SAS Port SAS

FCoE Port FCoE

LUN Group LUN Group

Host Response Host Response

CA Reset Group CA Reset Group

Host-LU QoS Host-LU QoS

Host QoS (Basic) Host QoS

FC/FCoE Host QoS FC/FCoE

iSCSI Host QoS iSCSI

SAS Host QoS SAS

Port QoS (Basic) Port QoS

FC Port QoS FC

iSCSI Port QoS iSCSI

SAS Port QoS SAS

FCoE Port QoS FCoE

LU QoS Group LU QoS Group

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

368

Detailed information of the LUN groups can be displayed from the following screens:

•Host Affinity Detail

•Host Group Detail

•LUN Group Detail

•LUN Group : LU QoS Group Detail

•Host-LU QoS Performance Information

9.1.1 Structures for Host Connection

This section describes structures for host connection.

•Host Group

A host group combines HBAs of the hosts that access the same LUN group into a group (HBAs configure the

multipaths). HBAs in multiple hosts can be configured in a single host group. Once a "host group" is

created, the settings for hosts (HBAs) in the group can be changed at the same time by changing the "host

group" settings. This simplifies the settings that are required to be set for each host (HBA), improving

operability.

•CA Port Group

A CA port group is a group of ports with the same port settings. A CA port group is configured with ports

that access the same LUN group, such as ports that are used for multipath connection to the server or for

connecting to the cluster configuring server. A single CA port group can be connected to multiple host

groups. Once a "CA port group" is created, multiple ports can be selected at the same time for "9.2.1.1

Create Host Affinity" (page 414) and "9.2.1.3 Modify Host Affinity" (page 428). This simplifies the settings

that must be set for each port, improving operability.

•LUN Group

A LUN group is a group of LUNs that is accessed by the same host group and the same CA port group. A LUN

group, which was previously referred to as an "affinity group", is mapping information for LUNs and

volumes.

•Host Affinity

The host affinity settings specify associations between a "host group", a "CA port group" and a "LUN group".

The new host affinity settings enable the "host affinity setting" function and "LUN mapping" function,

which were previously set separately, to be set together. "ON" and "OFF" for the affinity mode is changed by

specifying or not specifying the host group that is to be accessed.

For an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system with firmware version V10L50 or later, a host affinity that associ-

ates "host", "CA port", and "LUN group" can be created without creating a "host group" or a "CA port group".

Use the procedure that does not create a host group (select "Use "Add Host"") only if the previous procedure

for registering hosts in older storage systems (such as the ETERNUS DX410/DX440 or the ETERNUS DX8100/

DX8400/DX8700) is used.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

369

Figure 9.1 Basic concept of host connection (when using host groups)

Setting examples

•Host group settings (Refer to "9.2.2.1 Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 440), "9.2.2.2 Add iSCSI Host Group"

(page 448), or "9.2.2.3 Add SAS Host Group" (page 456) for details).

No. Host group Host Host response

1 Host Group A Host A - HBA1

Host A - HBA2

Default

2 Host Group B Host B - HBA1

Host B - HBA2

Default

3 Host Group C Host C - HBA1

Host C - HBA2

Host D - HBA1

Host D - HBA2

Default

LUN Group XX

Vol#1 Vol#2 Vol#3

LUN Group YY

Vol#10 Vol#11

CA Port Group Y

CA Port Group X

HBA1

HBA2

HBA1

HBA2

HBA1

HBA2

Host Group A

Host Group B

Host Group C

Host A

Host B

Host C

Host D

Multipath

Switch

Port #0

Port #1

Port #2

Port #3

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

The procedure to define the Host Affinity is as follows:

1. Define host group.

2. Define CA port group.

3. Define LUN group.

4. Allocate the host group, the CA port group, and the LUN group.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

370

•CA port group settings (Refer to "9.2.3.1 Create FC Port Group" (page 517), "9.2.3.2 Create iSCSI Port Group"

(page 519), "9.2.3.3 Create SAS Port Group" (page 522), or "9.2.3.4 Create FCoE Port Group" (page 525) for

details).

Port#0: CM#0 CA#0 Port#0

Port#1: CM#1 CA#0 Port#0

Port#2: CM#0 CA#0 Port#1

Port#3: CM#1 CA#0 Port#1

•LUN group settings (Refer to "9.2.4.1 Add LUN Group" (page 574) for details).

•Host affinity settings (Refer to "9.2.1.1 Create Host Affinity" (page 414) for details).

*1: Setting example when specifying a host group that accesses LUN group YY via CA port group Y.

*2: Setting example when a host group that accesses LUN group YY via CA port group Y is not specified.

No. CA port group Port

1 CA Port Group X Port#0, Port#1

2 CA Port Group Y Port#2, Port#3

No. LUN group Host LUN LUN

1LUN Group XX 0 Vol#1

1Vol#2

2Vol#3

2 LUN Group YY 0 Vol#10

1 Vol#11

No. Host group CA port group LUN group Description

1 Host Group A

(Default)

CA Port Group X LUN Group XX A host affinity with the affinity mode

set to "ON".

2 Host Group B

(Default)

CA Port Group X LUN Group XX A host affinity with the affinity mode

set to "ON".

(*1)

Host Group C

(Default)

CA Port Group Y LUN Group YY A host affinity with the affinity mode

set to "ON".

(*2)

All

(Default)

CA Port Group Y LUN Group YY A host affinity with the affinity mode

set to "OFF".

•In setting example No.4, LUN groups other than "LUN group YY" cannot be allocated to the "CA port

group Y".

•In setting example No.4, the "CA port group Y" for which "All" is selected cannot be used for setting

host affinity with the specified host group (setting examples No.3 and No.4 cannot be configured in

the same environment).

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

371

9.1.2 Connectivity (Basic Information)

A list of the host affinity groups is displayed.

When the target connection is "Host Group - CA Port Group", a host affinity is a group that defines an associa-

tion between a "Host Group", a "CA Port Group", and a "LUN Group". When the target connection is "Host - CA

Port", a host affinity is a group that defines an association between a "Host", a "CA Port", and a "LUN Group".

The host affinity function is used when connecting a specific host group (multiple servers) via switches. By

defining the association between a "Host Group", a "Port Group" and a "LUN Group", security is improved since

the volumes that the host recognizes can be limited. In addition, by configuring the groups of hosts (HBAs)

and ports that access the same LUN group, GUI operation can be simplified.

For an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system with firmware version V10L50 or later, a host affinity that associates

"host", "CA port", and "LUN group" can be created without creating a "host group" or a "CA port group".

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Host Group or Host

The "Host Group Name" or "Host Name" with the host affinity setting is displayed. By clicking this item, the

[Host Affinity] screen is displayed. Refer to "9.1.9 Host Affinity Detail" (page 403) for display items.

If "All" is displayed for the "Host Group Name" or "Host Name" field, all of the hosts can access the ETERNUS

DX Disk storage system.

Regardless of whether the host belongs to a host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the "Host Group"

field if the host affinity setting is specified for a host. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the "Host" field if the

host affinity setting is specified for a host group.

•CA Port Group

The CA port group names for which the host affinity setting is configured are displayed.

Regardless of whether the CA port belongs to a CA port group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed if the host affinity

setting is specified for a CA port.

•CA Port

The location information of the CA port with the host affinity setting is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if the host affinity setting is allocated for a CA port group.

-CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

372

•LUN Group

The names of the LUN groups with host affinity settings are displayed.

When LUNs are directly associated to CA ports (when LUN mapping is created) by an application other than

GUI, the field is blank.

•Host Response

One of the following host responses is displayed.

-Host response that is allocated to the host group

-Host response that is allocated to the host

-If all of the hosts are to be connected ("All" is displayed in the "Host" field), the host response that was

selected when setting the host affinity

•Solaris MPxIO

•HP-UX

•AIX EMPD (*1)

•AIX VxVM

•AIX Single Path

•VS850/SVC

•Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

•Default

*1: EMPD: ETERNUS Multipath Driver

The following modifications are applied for the host response settings with firmware version V10L15 or later.

•"Others" is changed to "Default".

•"Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are deleted from the "Host Response" value.

However, these parameters are displayed if they are applied for host groups.

•The setting parameters for "Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are the same as "Default".

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

373

Display Examples of Host Affinities

Display examples for the host affinity are shown in the following table.

Example

No.

Display contents Description

Host

Group

Host CA Port

Group

CA Port LUN

Group

Host

Response

Example

Host_

Group_

xxx

–Port_

Group_

xxx

–LUN_

Group_

xxx

Host_

Response1

The host affinity setting has

been configured in

"Host_Group_xxx",

"Port_Group_xxx" and

"LUN_Group_xxx".

The server recognizes the LUN

group, "LUN_Group_xxx", which

has been specified for each

member host (HBA) in

"Host_Group_xxx".

Example

All All Port_

Group_

yyy

–LUN_

Group_

yyy

Host_

Response2

All servers will be covered.

The server recognizes the

specified LUN group,

"LUN_Group_yyy", from every

member port in

"Port_Group_yyy".

Example

– Host_z – CM#0

CA#0

Port#0

LUN_

Group_

zzz

Host_

Response3

The host affinity setting of

"Host_z (HBA)" and "LUN

Group_zzz" has been configured

to the device side CA port,

"CM#0 CA#0 Port#0".

Hosts, CA ports, and LUN groups

are allocated without specifying

a host group or CA port group.

Example

–All–CM#1

CA#1

Port#1

LUN_

Group_

www

Host_

Response4

The LUN mapping of

"LUN_Group_www" has been

configured to the device side CA

port, "CM#1 CA#1 Port#1".

Hosts, CA ports, and LUN groups

are allocated without specifying

a host group or CA port group.

Example

–All–CM#0

CA#1

Port#1

Host_

Response5

The LUN is directly allocated to

CA port "CM#0 CA#1 Port#1" by

an application other than GUI

(LUN mapping is created).

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

374

9.1.3 Host Group

The list of the host groups is displayed.

A host group uses the same interface type, and groups the hosts (HBAs), which access the same LUN group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Name

The host group name is displayed.

By clicking this item, the [Host Group Detail] screen is displayed. Refer to "9.1.10 Host Group Detail" (page

404) for display items.

•Type

The interface type of the host registered in the host group is displayed.

•Status

Whether the host group is used ("Active") or not ("Inactive") for the host affinity settings is displayed.

"Host affinity setting" is to specify association between "Host Group", "CA Port Group", and "LUN Group".

-Active

The host group is used for the host affinity settings. The LUN group can be accessed from the member

host of the host group.

-Inactive

The host group is not used for the host affinity settings.

•Host Response

The host response name, which has been assigned to a host group, is displayed.

•Number of Hosts

The number of hosts, which have been registered in the host group, is displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

375

Filter setting

The filter setting field is displayed only for ETERNUS DX8700 S2.

9.1.3.1 FC/FCoE Host

In this screen, registered FC/FCoE hosts in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Name

The FC host name is displayed.

•WWN

The FC host WWN is displayed.

•Host Group

The host group name, to which the FC host belongs, is displayed.

When the FC host belongs to two host groups, the host group names are separated with a ", (comma)" and

displayed. If the FC host belongs to three or more host groups, the names of the first two groups and a

[more...] link are displayed.

If the FC host does not belong to a host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Host Response

The host response that is assigned to the FC host or to the host group of the FC host is displayed.

Filter Description

Name Input the host group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Type Select the interface type for the host group that is to be displayed.

Status Select the host group status that is to be displayed.

Host Response Select the host response name that is to be displayed.

The interface types "FC" and "FCoE" are both regarded as "FC". Both "FC host" and "FCoE host" are abbreviated

as "FC host" in this section.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

376

•Status

Whether the host affinity setting is applied to the FC host is displayed.

"Host Affinity Setting" is to specify association between "Host Group", "CA Port Group", and "LUN Group" or

association between "Host", "CA Port", "and "LUN Group". The host affinity setting specifies the path

between each host and port.

-Active

The host affinity setting is applied to the FC host. The LUN group can be accessed from the FC host.

-Inactive

The host affinity setting is not applied to the FC host.

Filter setting

9.1.3.2 iSCSI Host

In this screen, registered iSCSI hosts in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Name

The iSCSI host name is displayed.

•iSCSI Name

The iSCSI name of the iSCSI host is displayed.

Filter Description

Name Input the FC host name that is to be displayed.

When not using the FC host name for filtering, leave this item blank.

WWN Input the WWN that is to be displayed.

When not using the WWN for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Response

Select the host response name that is to be displayed.

The FC hosts, to which the same host response has been assigned, can be used for

filtering.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

377

•Host Group

The host group name, to which the iSCSI host belongs, is displayed.

When the iSCSI host belongs to two host groups, the host group names are separated with a ", (comma)"

and displayed. If the iSCSI host belongs to three or more host groups, the names of the first two groups and

a [more...] link are displayed.

If the iSCSI host does not belong to an host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Host Response

The host response that is assigned to the iSCSI host or to the host group of the iSCSI host is displayed.

•Status

Whether the host affinity setting is applied to the iSCSI host is displayed.

"Host Affinity Setting" is to specify association between "Host Group", "CA Port Group", and "LUN Group" or

association between "Host", "CA Port", "and "LUN Group". The host affinity setting specifies the path

between each host and port.

-Active

The host affinity setting is applied to the iSCSI host. The LUN group can be accessed from the iSCSI host.

-Inactive

The host affinity setting is not applied to the iSCSI host.

•IP Version

The IP version when the IP address was registered for the iSCSI host is displayed.

•IP Address

The IP address of the iSCSI host is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 378) for

details.

If the IP address is not specified, the field is blank.

•Alias Name

The iSCSI host Alias Name is displayed.

If the Alias Name is not set, the field is blank.

•CHAP User ID

The iSCSI host user ID is displayed.

If the user ID is not set, the field is blank.

Filter setting

Filter Description

Name Input the iSCSI host name that is to be displayed.

When not using the iSCSI host name for filtering, leave this item blank.

iSCSI Name Input the iSCSI name that is to be displayed.

When not using the iSCSI name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Response

Select the host response name that is to be displayed.

The iSCSI hosts, to which the same host response has been assigned, can be used for

filtering.

IP Version Select the IP version that is to be displayed.

The iSCSI hosts with the same IP version are displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

378

■IPv6 Address Notation

Since the IPv6 address is 128-bit and extremely long, this address is displayed using "xxxx", which describes

16-bit in hexadecimals as being one block that is separated by colons (":").

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

•Use 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters) for inputting an IPv6 address.

•The current setting is displayed with 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

•Up to 128-bit

•The first 64-bit (prefix) of the link local address is fixed to "fe80::".

The following three abbreviation methods are available for IPv6 addresses:

(1) Omission of the first "0" of a block that follows consecutive zeros.

(2) Replacement of "0000" blocks with "0".

(3) Replacement of a block with consecutive zeros by "::" is performed only once.

IP Address

Input the IP address that is to be displayed.

ETERNUS DX Disk storage system compares the input IP address and the existing IP

address by starting from the first letter. The iSCSI hosts with the same IP address are

displayed.

An abbreviation for the IPv6 address can be used.

When not using the IP address for filtering, leave this item blank.

Alias Name

Input the Alias Name that is to be displayed.

iSCSI hosts matching or partially matching the input Alias Name are displayed.

When not using the Alias Name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Filter Description

The following IP addresses cannot be specified:

•Link local addresses (the address starts with "fe80::") for which all of the values for the low 64-bit are "0"

•Connect IP addresses (*1) for which the first 3-bit are not "001" or the first 7-bit are not "1111110"

*1: The connect IP address indicates either a "global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address". Note that

this limitation is not applied when specifying IP addresses for "Common Name". This limitation also does not

apply when specifying "Subject Alt Name" for "11.2.3.15 Create Self-signed SSL Certificate" (page 787) or

"11.2.3.16 Create Key/CSR" (page 790).

[Example] 2001:1000:0120:0000:0000:0123:0000:0000

2001:1000:120:0000:0000:123:0000:0000

[Example] 2001:1000:120:0000:0000:123:0000:0000

2001:1000:120:0:0:123:0:0

[Example] 2001:1000:120:0:0:123:0:0

2001:1000:120::123:0:0 is OK

2001:1000:120::123:: is not allowed

(Replacement of a block with consecutive zeros by "::" is allowed only once.)

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

379

9.1.3.3 SAS Host

In this screen, registered SAS hosts in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Name

The SAS host name is displayed.

•SAS Address

The SAS address of the SAS host is displayed.

•Host Group

The host group name, to which the SAS host belongs, is displayed.

When the SAS host belongs to two host groups, the host group names are separated with a ", (comma)"

and displayed. If the SAS host belongs to three or more host groups, the names of the first two groups and

a [more...] link are displayed.

If the SAS host does not belong to a host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Host Response

The host response that is assigned to the SAS host or to the host group of the SAS host is displayed.

•Status

Whether the host affinity setting is applied to the SAS host is displayed.

"Host Affinity Setting" is to specify association between "Host Group", "CA Port Group", and "LUN Group" or

association between "Host", "CA Port", "and "LUN Group". The host affinity setting specifies the path

between each host and port.

-Active

The SAS host is used for the host affinity settings. The LUN group can be accessed from the SAS host.

-Inactive

The SAS host is not used for the host affinity settings.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

380

Filter setting

9.1.4 CA Port Group

A list of the CA port groups is displayed.

A CA port group is a group of the same CA type ports that are connected to the specified host group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Name

The port group name is displayed.

•Type

The type of the CA port group is displayed.

-FC

-iSCSI

-SAS

-FCoE

•CA Port Group Member

The location information of the port, which is a CA port group member, is displayed.

If there are two CA port group members, the ports are displayed, being separated with a ", (comma)". If

there are three or more ports, the location information of the two ports and the [more...] link are

displayed.

-CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

Filter Description

Name Input the SAS host name that is to be displayed.

When not using the SAS host name for filtering, leave this item blank.

SAS Address Input the SAS address that is to be displayed.

When not using the SAS address for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Response

Select the host response name that is to be displayed.

The SAS hosts, to which the same host response has been assigned, can be used for

filtering.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

381

•Status

Whether the CA port group is used ("Active") or not ("Inactive") for the host affinity settings is displayed.

"Host affinity setting" is to specify association between "Host Group", "CA Port Group" and "LUN Group".

-Active

The CA port group is used for the host affinity settings. The LUN group can be accessed from the host

group via the CA port group.

-Inactive

The CA port group is not used for the host affinity settings. The CA port group is not being used.

9.1.4.1 FC Port

Parameters of the FC ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

-CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

•Type

The CA type of the target port is displayed.

-8G FC

8Gbit/s (maximum) FC. The port mode can be changed (CA, RA, CA/RA, or Initiator).

-16G FC

16Gbit/s (maximum) FC. The port mode can be changed (CA, RA, CA/RA, or Initiator).

•Status

The status of the target port is displayed.

•Port Mode

The mode of the target port is displayed.

-CA

-RA

-CA/RA

-Initiator

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

382

•Connection

The connection type of the target port is displayed.

-Fabric

A connection type that enables simultaneous communication among multiple nodes through a Fibre

Channel switch. This connection type can also be used for a direct connection when "Transfer Rate" is

"16 Gbit/s".

-FC-AL

A connection type that connects multiple nodes in a loop.

•Loop ID

If the connection type of the target port is "FC-AL", the Loop ID is displayed.

"Loop ID" is an identification number of a node in a loop.

When the connection type of the target port is "Fabric", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the target port is displayed.

-Auto-negotiation

-2 Gbit/s

-4 Gbit/s

-8 Gbit/s

-16 Gbit/s

•FC Frame Size

The frame size of the target port is displayed.

"FC Frame Size" specifies the length of the communication information.

-512 bytes

-1024 bytes

-2048 bytes

•Reset Scope

The reset scope of the target port is displayed.

Reset scope is the range where the command reset from the server is performed, when the target port is

connected to multiple servers.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA".

-I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request.

-T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancels) the command request from all of the servers that are connected to the port.

•Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

Whether the function to release the reservation status of the volume when the target port (chip) is reset is

enabled or disabled is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA" or "Initiator".

•REC Line No.

The REC line number of the target port is displayed.

The REC line number is used to switch the communication path when a line fails.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "Initiator".

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

383

•REC Transfer Mode

Whether the REC synchronous transfer mode, the REC asynchronous stack mode, the REC asynchronous

consistency mode, or the REC asynchronous through mode is enabled or disabled for the target port is

displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "Initiator".

-Sync

When the REC synchronous transfer mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC

synchronous transfer mode path.

-Async Stack

When the REC asynchronous stack mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC

asynchronous stack mode path.

-Async Consistency

When the REC asynchronous consistency mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC

asynchronous consistency mode path.

-Async Through

When the REC asynchronous through mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC

asynchronous through mode path.

9.1.4.2 iSCSI Port

Parameters of the iSCSI ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

-CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

•Type

The type of the target port is displayed.

-1G iSCSI

1Gbit/s iSCSI. The port mode can be changed (CA, RA, or CA/RA).

-10G iSCSI

10Gbit/s iSCSI. The port mode can be changed (CA, RA, or CA/RA).

-iSCSI-RA (for older storage system connection)

1Gbit/s iSCSI-RA. It is used for REC for the ETERNUS DX400 series, the ETERNUS DX8000 series, the

ETERNUS4000, and the ETERNUS8000.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

384

•Status

The status of the target port is displayed.

•Port Mode

The mode of the target port is displayed.

-CA

-RA

-CA/RA

•Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the target port is displayed. All transfers are full-duplex.

-Auto-negotiation

-1Gbit/s

-10Gbit/s

-100Mbit/s

•Reset Scope

The reset scope of the target port is displayed.

Reset scope is the range where the command reset from the server is performed, when the target port is

connected to multiple servers. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA".

-I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request.

-T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancels) the command request from all of the servers that are connected to the port.

•Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

Whether the function to release the reservation status of the volume when the target port (chip) is reset is

enabled or disabled is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA".

•iSCSI Name

The iSCSI name of the target port is displayed.

•Alias Name

The Alias Name of the target port is displayed.

If the Alias Name is not specified, the field is blank.

•Bandwidth Limit

The bandwidth limit of the target port is displayed.

This item is displayed when the WAN bandwidth that can be used for REC is designated.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the type is "1G iSCSI" or "10G iSCSI".

•MTU

The MTU size of the target port is displayed.

"Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)" is the maximum amount of data that can be transmitted at the one

time over the communication network.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA".

•CHAP

When CHAP authentication for the target port is enabled, "ON" is displayed. If the authentication is

disabled, "OFF" is displayed.

When the "Port Mode" is "CA/RA", this item is displayed in "x / y" format.

x: The CHAP authentication status of the CA port ("ON" or "OFF")

y: The CHAP authentication status of the RA port ("ON" or "OFF")

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

385

•REC Line No.

The REC line number of the target port is displayed.

The REC line number is used to switch the communication path when a line fails.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA".

•REC Transfer Mode

Whether the REC synchronous transfer mode, the REC asynchronous stack mode, the REC asynchronous

consistency mode, or the REC asynchronous through mode is enabled or disabled for the target port is

displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA".

-Sync

When the REC synchronous transfer mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC

synchronous transfer mode path.

-Async Stack

When the REC asynchronous stack mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC

asynchronous stack mode path.

-Async Consistency

When the REC asynchronous consistency mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC

asynchronous consistency mode path.

-Async Through

When the REC asynchronous through mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC

asynchronous through mode path.

9.1.4.3 SAS Port

Parameters of the SAS ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

-CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

•Type

The CA type (fixed at "SAS") of the target port is displayed.

•Status

The status of the target port is displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

386

•Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the target port is displayed.

-Auto-negotiation

-1.5 Gbit/s

-3 Gbit/s

-6 Gbit/s

•Reset Scope

The reset scope of the target port is displayed.

Reset scope is the range where the command reset from the server is performed, when the target port is

connected to multiple servers.

-I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request.

-T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancels) the command request from all of the servers that are connected to the port.

•Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

Whether the function to release the reservation status of the volume when the target port (chip) is reset is

enabled or disabled is displayed.

9.1.4.4 FCoE Port

Parameters of the FCoE ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

-CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

•Type

The CA type (fixed at "FCoE") of the target port is displayed.

•Status

The status of the target port is displayed.

•Port Mode

The mode (fixed at "CA") of the target port is displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

387

•Transfer Rate

The transfer speed (fixed at "10 Gbit/s") of the target port is displayed.

•FC Frame Size

The frame size of the target port is displayed.

"FC Frame Size" specifies the length of the communication information.

-512 bytes

-1024 bytes

-2048 bytes

•VLAN ID

The VLAN ID of the target port is displayed.

•Fabric Name

The fabric name of the target port is displayed.

•Reset Scope

The reset scope of the target port is displayed.

Reset scope is the range where the command reset from the server is performed, when the target port is

connected to multiple servers.

-I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request.

-T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancels) the command request from all of the servers that are connected to the port.

•Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

Whether the function to release the reservation status of the volume when the target port (chip) is reset is

enabled or disabled is displayed.

9.1.5 LUN Group

A list of the LUN groups is displayed.

A LUN group is a group of LUNs, which can be recognized by the host. The allocation information of LUNs and

volumes in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are configured to the LUN group.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

388

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Name

The LUN group name is displayed. By clicking this item, the [LUN Group Detail] screen is displayed. Refer to

"9.1.11 LUN Group Detail" (page 405) for display items.

•Status

Whether the LUN group is used ("Active") or not ("Inactive") for the host affinity settings is displayed.

"Host Affinity Setting" is to specify association between "Host Group", "CA Port Group", and "LUN Group" or

association between "Host", "CA Port", "and "LUN Group".

-Active

The LUN group is used for the host affinity settings. The LUN group can be accessed from the host.

-Inactive

The LUN group is not used for the host affinity settings.

•Number of LUNs

The number of LUNs, which have been allocated to volumes in the LUN group, is displayed.

•LUN Overlap

If volumes in the LUN group satisfy one or both of the following conditions, "Yes" is displayed. For any other

conditions, the field is blank.

-The volumes are allocated to different LUN groups.

-The volumes are included in the mapping information, which is directly allocated to the CA port without

specifying the host group or the CA port group.

Filter setting

Filter Description

Name Input the LUN group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the LUN group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Status Select the LUN group status that is to be displayed.

Number of LUNs Select the number of LUNs that is to be displayed.

Using "512LUN" as the standard, ">512" or "≤512" can be selected.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

389

9.1.6 Host Response

The registered host responses are displayed.

The host response configures the appropriate operation mode on which the host makes connection. The usual

host connection uses a recommended pattern or the default setting which have been arranged in advance in

accordance with each OS type.

When customizing the host response in accordance with the OS type or the operating environment, refer to

"9.2.5.1 Add Host Response" (page 581).

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Name

All of the host responses, which have been registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, are

displayed.

-Solaris MPxIO

-HP-UX

-AIX EMPD (*1)

-AIX VxVM

-AIX Single Path

-VS850/SVC

-Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-Default

*1: EMPD: ETERNUS Multipath Driver

The following modifications are applied for the host response settings with firmware version V10L15 or

later.

•"Others" is changed to "Default".

•"Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are deleted from the "Host Response" value.

However, these parameters are displayed if they are applied for host groups.

•The setting parameters for "Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are the same as

"Default".

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

390

•Status

Whether the host response is used ("Active") or not ("Inactive") for the host affinity settings is displayed.

-Active

The host response is used for the host affinity settings.

-Inactive

The host response is not used for the host affinity settings.

9.1.7 CA Reset Group

A list of the registered CA reset groups is displayed.

A "CA reset group" is a group of ports which are released simultaneously under the instruction of a server.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•CA Reset Group Member

The location information of member ports of each CA reset group is displayed.

If there are several ports, the ports are displayed, being separated with a ", (comma)". If there are three or

more ports the [more...] link are displayed.

-CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

9.1.8 Host-LU QoS

A list of the registered Host-LU QoS groups is displayed.

The Host-LU QoS list shows the association between "Host", "CA Port", and "LUN Group", bandwidth limit

(performance limits), and performance information.

•When using GUI, schedule settings for QoS parameters and displaying scheduled QoS parameters are not

available. Use CLI to check the scheduled QoS parameters that are specified using CLI. GUI displays only

the bandwidth limit and the performance information that are specified by using GUI.

•Host-LU QoS does not support from LUN#1024 onward. If volumes are mapped from LUN#1024 onward,

only the first 1024 LUNs (LUN#0 - LUN#1023) are displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

391

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Host : Bandwidth Limit

-Host

The host name for which the host affinity setting is configured is displayed.

If "All" is displayed, all of the hosts can access the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

-Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not

been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

If "All" has been selected for hosts, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Click the [Host : Bandwidth Limit] link to display the total performance information for the host and the

performance information of each LUN. Refer to "9.1.13 Host-LU QoS Performance Information" (page 407)

for details.

•Host Group

If a host belongs to a host group, the host group name is displayed. If a host does not belongs to the host

group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If "All" is displayed, all of the hosts can access the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•The operation status of Host-LU QoS can be confirmed with the displayed action name.

-If [Enable Host-LU QoS] is displayed, the Host-LU QoS has been disabled. Host-LU QoS is not running.

-If [Disable Host-LU QoS] is displayed, the Host-LU QoS has been enabled. Host-LU QoS is running.

•Host-LU QoS starts its operation by configuring the bandwidth limit on a "Host", "CA Port", or "LUN Group",

and enabling the Host-LU QoS.

•This function displays the performance information that is obtained during performance monitoring

regardless of whether the Host-LU QoS mode is enabled or disabled. When the performance information

is displayed before performance monitoring is stopped, the performance information that was obtained

up to this point is displayed. This function displays the total performance information for the host and the

performance information for each host LUN.

•The performance information of each CA port can also be displayed. Refer to "9.1.8.5 Port QoS (Basic)"

(page 396) for details.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

392

•CA Port : Bandwidth Limit

-CA Port

The location information of the CA port with the host affinity setting is displayed.

-Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not

been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

•CA Port Group

If a CA port belongs to a CA port group, the CA port group name is displayed. If a host does not belong to a

CA port group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•LUN Group : LU QoS Group

-LUN Group

The LUN group name is displayed. If the CLI command ("set mapping") is used for LUN mapping, a "- "

(hyphen) is displayed.

-LU QoS Group

The LU QoS group number is displayed. If a LU QoS group number is not configured, a "- " (hyphen) is

displayed.

•For ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2/DX410 S2/DX440 S2/DX8100 S2: 0 - 543

•For ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 2175

Click the [LUN Group : LU QoS Group] link to display a bandwidth limit on each LUN. Refer to "9.1.12 LUN

Group : LU QoS Group Detail" (page 406) for details.

9.1.8.1 Host QoS (Basic)

Follow the message in the Information area to configure a bandwidth limit on each host.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

393

9.1.8.2 FC/FCoE Host QoS

The bandwidth limit of the FC/FCoE hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is

displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Name

The FC/FCoE host name is displayed.

•WWN

The FC/FCoE host WWN is displayed.

•Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the FC/FCoE host is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth

limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

This function displays all the hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system regardless of

whether the hosts belong to host groups or not.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

394

9.1.8.3 iSCSI Host QoS

The bandwidth limit of the iSCSI hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Name

The iSCSI host name is displayed.

•IP Version

The IP version of the iSCSI host is displayed.

•IP Address

The IP address of the iSCSI host is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 378) for

details.

If the IP address is not set, the field is blank.

•Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the iSCSI host is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth

limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

This function displays all the hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system regardless of

whether the hosts belong to host groups or not.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

395

9.1.8.4 SAS Host QoS

The bandwidth limit of the SAS hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Name

The SAS host name is displayed.

•SAS address

The SAS address of the SAS host is displayed.

•Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the SAS host is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit

has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

This function displays all the hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system regardless of

whether the hosts belong to host groups or not.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

396

9.1.8.5 Port QoS (Basic)

Follow the message in the Information area to configure a bandwidth limit on each port.

9.1.8.6 FC Port QoS

This function displays the bandwidth limit and the performance information of the FC ports that are registered

in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

•The ports with "CA" or "CA/RA" as the port mode that are registered by the ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system are displayed regardless of whether the ports belong to CA port groups or not.

•This function displays the performance information that is obtained during performance monitoring

regardless of whether the Host-LU QoS mode is enabled or disabled. When the performance information

is displayed before performance monitoring is stopped, the performance information that was obtained

up to this point is displayed. This function displays the performance information of each port.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

397

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

•Type

The type of the target port is displayed.

-8G FC

An 8Gbit/s (maximum) FC.

-16G FC

A 16Gbit/s (maximum) FC.

•Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the target port is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth

limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

•Performance Monitoring

-State

The status of performance monitoring for the host is displayed.

•Active

•Stopped

-Start Time

-Stop / Collect Time

The start time and the end time for performance monitoring are displayed.

•YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Day (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 -

23), mm: Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

The displayed time varies depending on how the performance monitoring is started or ended.

•Before monitoring is started (*1)

"State" for performance monitoring is "Stopped". "-" (hyphens) are displayed for "Start Time" and

"Stop Collect Time".

•Monitoring is started

"State" for performance monitoring is changed from "Stopped" to "Active". The time when

performance monitoring was started is displayed for "Start Time". The time when the performance

information is obtained is displayed for "Stop / Collect Time".

•Monitoring is started while the monitoring session has already been started

"State" for performance monitoring is "Active". The last time when performance monitoring was

started is displayed for "Start Time". The time when the performance information is obtained is

displayed for "Stop / Collect Time".

•Monitoring is stopped

"State" for performance monitoring is changed from "Active" to "Stopped". The last time when

performance monitoring was started is displayed for "Start Time". The time when performance

monitoring is stopped is displayed for "Stop / Collect Time".

•Monitoring is stopped while the monitoring session has already been stopped

"State" for performance monitoring is "Stopped". The last time when performance monitoring was

started is displayed for "Start Time". The first time when performance monitoring was stopped is

displayed for "Stop / Collect Time".

*1: When performance monitoring is not being performed after the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is

started. When the start time is "0", "-" is displayed for "Start Time" and "Stop / Collect Time".

When the start time is "0", "-" is displayed for "Start Time" and "Stop / Collect Time".

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

398

•IOPS

The performance information from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring

is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

-Ave

The average I/O count per second is displayed.

-Min

The minimum I/O count per second is displayed.

-Max

The maximum I/O count per second is displayed.

•Throughput

The transfer data size from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended

(or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

-Ave

The average data transfer size per second is displayed.

-Min

The minimum data transfer size per second is displayed.

-Max

The maximum data transfer size per second is displayed.

•Delay Time

-Total

The total delay time for executing a command from when performance monitoring is started until per-

formance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed. If the total delay

time exceeds the maximum value, "Overflow" is displayed.

-Ave

The average delay time per command from when performance monitoring is started until performance

monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

9.1.8.7 iSCSI Port QoS

This function displays the bandwidth limit and the performance information of the iSCSI ports that are

registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

If performance monitoring is restarted during an active performance monitoring session, the

performance information that is already obtained is deleted and the collection of performance

information starts again.

•The ports with "CA" or "CA/RA" as the port mode that are registered by the ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system are displayed regardless of whether the ports belong to CA port groups or not.

•This function displays the performance information that is obtained during performance monitoring

regardless of whether the Host-LU QoS mode is enabled or disabled. When the performance information

is displayed before performance monitoring is stopped, the performance information that was obtained

up to this point is displayed. This function displays the performance information of each port.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

399

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

•Type

The type of the target port is displayed.

-1G iSCSI

1Gbit/s iSCSI.

-10G iSCSI

10Gbit/s iSCSI.

•Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the target port is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth

limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

•Performance Monitoring

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•IOPS

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•Throughput

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•Delay Time

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

400

9.1.8.8 SAS Port QoS

This function displays the bandwidth limit and the performance information of the SAS ports that are

registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

•Type

The type of the target port is displayed.

•Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the target port is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth

limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

•Performance Monitoring

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•IOPS

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•Throughput

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•Delay Time

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•The ports that are registered by the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are displayed regardless of whether

the ports belong to CA port groups or not.

•This function displays the performance information that is obtained during performance monitoring

regardless of whether the Host-LU QoS mode is enabled or disabled. When the performance information

is displayed before performance monitoring is stopped, the performance information that was obtained

up to this point is displayed. This function displays the performance information of each port.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

401

9.1.8.9 FCoE Port QoS

This function displays the bandwidth limit and the performance information of the FCoE ports that are

registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

•Type

The type of the target port is displayed.

•Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the target port is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth

limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

•Performance Monitoring

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•IOPS

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•Throughput

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•Delay Time

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 397) for details.

•The ports that are registered by the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system are displayed regardless of whether

the ports belong to CA port groups or not.

•This function displays the performance information that is obtained during performance monitoring

regardless of whether the Host-LU QoS mode is enabled or disabled. When the performance information

is displayed before performance monitoring is stopped, the performance information that was obtained

up to this point is displayed. This function displays the performance information of each port.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

402

9.1.8.10 LU QoS Group

A list of the registered LU QoS groups is displayed.

An LU QoS group is a group of the bandwidth limit (the maximum performance) configured for each Host

LUN.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•LU QoS Group No.

The LU QoS group number is displayed.

-For ETERNUS DX80 S2/90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 - 543

-For ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 2175

•Status

Whether a LU QoS group is assigned to a LUN group with the host affinity setting is displayed.

"Host affinity setting" is to specify association between "Host", "CA Port" and "LUN Group".

-Active

The LU QoS group is assigned to a LUN group.

-Inactive

The LU QoS group is not assigned to a LUN group.

By assigning an LU QoS group to a LUN group with the host affinity setting, the bandwidth limit can be

configured for each LUN. Refer to "9.2.7.2 Set Host-LU QoS" (page 599) for details.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

403

9.1.9 Host Affinity Detail

The details of the host affinity are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

●Host Group - CA Port Group - LUN Group Setting

•Host Group

The selected host group name or "All" is displayed.

•CA Port Group

The CA port group that is allocated to the selected host group is displayed.

•LUN Group

The LUN group that is allocated to the selected host group is displayed.

●Host - CA Port Connection

•Host

Member hosts in the selected host group is displayed.

If "All" has been selected for the host group, "All" is also displayed for the host.

•CA Port

The location information of the CA port which has the host affinity setting with the relevant host is

displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

404

9.1.10 Host Group Detail

The details of the host group are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

●Host Group Information

•Name

The host group name is displayed.

•Host Response

The host response name, which has been assigned to a host group, is displayed.

•Status

Whether the host group is "Active" or "Inactive" in the host affinity setting is displayed.

•Number of Hosts

The number of hosts, which have been registered in the host group, is displayed.

●Host List

•Name

The host name is displayed.

•WWN

When the host interface type is "FC/FCoE", the WWN of the host is displayed.

•iSCSI Name

When the host interface type is "iSCSI", the iSCSI name of the host is displayed.

•SAS Address

When the host interface type is "SAS", the SAS address of the host is displayed.

•Other Host Group

The other host group names to which the host belongs are displayed.

When the host belongs to two host groups, the host group names are separated with a ", (comma)" and

displayed. If the host belongs to three or more host groups, the names of the first two groups and a

[more...] link are displayed. If the host belongs to only one host group, the field is blank.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

405

9.1.11 LUN Group Detail

The detailed information of a LUN group is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•Host LUN

The host LUN is displayed.

•Volume No.

The volume number, which is allocated to the LUN, is displayed.

•Name

The volume name is displayed.

•Type

The volume type is displayed.

-Standard

-WSV

-TPV

-FTV

-SDV

•Capacity

The volume capacity is displayed.

When the "Type" is "SDV", the logical capacity, which can be accessed from the host, is displayed.

•LUN Group

If the volume is allocated to different LUN groups, the LUN group name is displayed. If the host, ports, and

LUNs are associated without specifying a host group or CA port group, the location information of the ports

is displayed.

If the volume is registered in multiple LUN groups or the volume is allocated to multiple ports, the display

contents vary depending on the number of LUN groups and the number of ports. When there are two

display targets (the LUN group name and the port location information), the items are separated with a ",

(comma)" and displayed. When there are three or more display targets (the LUN group name and the port

location information), the first two items and a [more...] link are displayed. When a volume is not

allocated to different LUN groups, the field is blank.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

406

9.1.12 LUN Group : LU QoS Group Detail

The bandwidth limit for each LUN is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

•LUN Group

The LUN group name is displayed. If the CLI command ("set mapping") is used for LUN mapping, a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

•LU QoS Group No.

The LU QoS group number is displayed. If a LU QoS group number is not configured, a "-" (hyphen) is

displayed.

-For ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2/DX410 S2/DX440 S2/DX8100 S2: 0 - 543

-For ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 2175

•Host LUN

The host LUN number is displayed.

•Name

The volume name is displayed.

•Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been

configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

407

9.1.13 Host-LU QoS Performance Information

When a host affinity setting with a specific host group is already configured, the total performance

information for the host and the performance information of each LUN are displayed.

If a host affinity setting with all of the host groups is configured ("All" is specified as the target host group),

the performance information of each host LUN is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

●Host - CA Port - LUN Group Information

•Host : Bandwidth Limit

The host name and the bandwidth limit of the selected host is displayed in "Host : Bandwidth Limit"

format.

If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is

displayed as the "Bandwidth Limit". If "All" has been selected for the host, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed as the

"Bandwidth Limit".

•Host Group

The host group name, to which the selected host belongs, is displayed.

If all of the hosts are to be connected, "All" is displayed.

If the host does not belong to a host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•WWN

The WWN for the selected host is displayed.

This item is displayed when the host affinity setting is configured and the selected host is "FC" or "FCoE".

The monitoring status of the performance information and obtained performance information are cleared in

the following conditions:

•When the port mode is changed (CA, CA/RA → RA or Initiator)

•When the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is rebooted

•When an error is detected in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

•When the hot maintenance of the CM is performed

•When the concurrent firmware upgrade is being performed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

408

•iSCSI Name

The iSCSI name for the selected host is displayed.

This item is displayed when the host affinity setting is configured and the selected host is "iSCSI".

•IP Version

The IP version of the iSCSI host is displayed. This item is displayed when the host affinity setting is

configured and the selected host is "iSCSI".

-IPv4

-IPv6

•IP Address

The IP address of the selected iSCSI host is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If the IP address is not specified, the field is

blank.

This item is displayed when the host affinity setting is configured and the selected host is "iSCSI".

-For IPv4 address

•xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

-For IPv6 address

•xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 378) for details.

•SAS Address

The SAS address of the selected host is displayed.

This item is displayed when the host affinity setting is configured and the selected host is "SAS".

•CA Port : Bandwidth Limit

The location information and the bandwidth limit of the selected CA port is displayed in "CA Port :

Bandwidth Limit" format.

If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is

displayed as the "Bandwidth Limit".

•CA Port Group

If a CA port that is connected to the selected host belongs to a CA port group as a member, the CA port

group name is displayed. If a host does not belong as a member, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

•LUN Group : LU QoS Group

The LUN group name and LU QoS group number are displayed in "LUN Group : LU QoS Group" format.

If the CLI command ("set mapping") is used for LUN mapping, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed as "LUN Group".

If a LUN QoS group number has not been configured, a "- " (hyphen) is displayed as "LU QoS Group".

-LU QoS group

ETERNUS DX80 S2/90 S2/410 S2/440/8100 S2 S2: 0 - 543

ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 - 2175

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

409

●Performance information

•Login IP Address

IP address that is logged in is displayed.

The performance information is displayed for each specified IP address. Note that the IPv6 address is

displayed as an abbreviation. If there is no IP address, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

This item is displayed for the iSCSI host when the host affinity setting is configured, the iSCSI name is

specified, and the IP address is not specified.

-For IPv4 address

•xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

-For IPv6 address

•xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 378) for details.

●Performance Monitoring

•State

The status of performance monitoring for the host is displayed.

-Active

-Stopped

•Start Time

•Stop / Collect Time

The start time and the end time for performance monitoring are displayed.

The displayed time varies depending on how the performance monitoring is started or ended.

-Before monitoring is started (*1)

"State" for performance monitoring is "Stopped". "-" (hyphens) are displayed for "Start Time" and "Stop

Collect Time".

-Monitoring is started

"State" for performance monitoring is changed from "Stopped" to "Active". The time when performance

monitoring was started is displayed for "Start Time". The time when the performance information is

obtained is displayed for "Stop / Collect Time".

-Monitoring is started while the monitoring session has already been started

"State" for performance monitoring is "Active". The last time when performance monitoring was started

is displayed for "Start Time". The time when the performance information is obtained is displayed for

"Stop / Collect Time".

-Monitoring is stopped

"State" for performance monitoring is changed from "Active" to "Stopped". The last time when perfor-

mance monitoring was started is displayed for "Start Time". The time when performance monitoring is

stopped is displayed for "Stop / Collect Time".

-Monitoring is stopped while the monitoring session has already been stopped

"State" for performance monitoring is "Stopped". The last time when performance monitoring was

started is displayed for "Start Time". The first time when performance monitoring was stopped is

displayed for "Stop / Collect Time".

*1: When performance monitoring is not being performed after the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is started.

In the following conditions, "-" (hyphens) are displayed for "Start Time" and "Stop / Collect Time".

•When no iSCSI host with the host affinity setting is connected

•When no IP address for an iSCSI host with the host affinity setting is logged in

•When the start time is "0"

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

410

●Host Total Performance

When the host affinity setting is configured by a port and a specific host group, the total performance

information for the specific host that is connected to the port is displayed.

If an IP address is not specified and multiple IP addresses are logged in with the iSCSI host that is

connected to the target port, the performance information of each IP address is displayed.

•IOPS

The performance information from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring

is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

-Ave

The average I/O count per second is displayed.

-Min

The minimum I/O count per second is displayed.

-Max

The maximum I/O count per second is displayed.

•Throughput

The transfer data size from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended

(or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

-Ave

The average data transfer size per second is displayed.

-Min

The minimum data transfer size per second is displayed.

-Max

The maximum data transfer size per second is displayed.

•Delay Time

-Total

The total delay time for executing a command from when performance monitoring is started until per-

formance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed. If the total delay

time exceeds the maximum value, "Overflow" is displayed.

-Ave

The average delay time per command from when performance monitoring is started until performance

monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

If performance monitoring is restarted during an active performance monitoring session, the

performance information that is already obtained is deleted and the collection of performance

information starts again.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.1 Connectivity Status

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

411

●Host LUN Performance

The performance information of each LUN is displayed for the specific host (when "All" is specified for the

host, all of the hosts) that is connected to the port.

•Host LUN

The host LUN is displayed.

-0 - 1023

•Volume Name

The volume name is displayed.

•IOPS

The performance information from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring

is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

-Ave

The average I/O count per second is displayed.

-Min

The minimum I/O count per second is displayed.

-Max

The maximum I/O count per second is displayed.

•Throughput

The transfer data size from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended

(or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

-Ave

The average data transfer size per second is displayed.

-Min

The minimum data transfer size per second is displayed.

-Max

The maximum data transfer size per second is displayed.

•Delay Time

-Total

The total delay time for executing a command from when performance monitoring is started until per-

formance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed. If the total delay

time exceeds the maximum value, "Overflow" is displayed.

-Ave

The average delay time per command from when performance monitoring is started until performance

monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

412

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in

the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for Connectivity can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for Connectivity Display function

Host Affinity Management –

Create Host Affinity •Connectivity (Basic Information)

•Host Group

Delete Host Affinity •Connectivity (Basic Information)

Modify Host Affinity

Hot Group Management –

Add FC/FCoE Host Group •Connectivity (Basic Information)

•Host Group

•FC/FCoE Host in Host Group

Add iSCSI Host Group •Connectivity (Basic Information)

•Host Group

•iSCSI Host in Host Group

Add SAS Host Group •Connectivity (Basic Information)

•Host Group

•SAS Host in Host Group

Add FC/FCoE Host •Connectivity (Basic Information)

•FC/FCoE Host in Host Group

Add iSCSI Host •Connectivity (Basic Information)

•iSCSI Host in Host Group

Add SAS Host •Connectivity (Basic Information)

•SAS Host in Host Group

Delete Host Group •Host Group

Modify Host Group

Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)

Modify Host Group (iSCSI)

Modify Host Group (SAS)

Delete FC/FCoE Host •FC/FCoE Host in Host Group

Delete iSCSI Host •iSCSI Host in Host Group

Delete SAS Host •SAS Host in Host Group

Modify FC/FCoE Host •FC/FCoE Host in Host Group

Modify iSCSI Host •iSCSI Host in Host Group

Modify SAS Host •SAS Host in Host Group

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

413

CA Port Group Management –

Create FC Port Group •CA Port Group

Create iSCSI Port Group

Create SAS Port Group

Create FCoE Port Group

Delete CA Port Group

Modify CA Port Group

Modify FC Port Parameters •FC Port in Port Group

Modify iSCSI Port Parameters •iSCSI Port in Port Group

Modify SAS Port Parameters •SAS Port in Port Group

Modify FCoE Port Parameters •FCoE Port in Port Group

Modify Port Mode •FC Port in Port Group

•iSCSI Port in Port Group

LUN Group Management –

Add LUN Group •LUN Group

Delete LUN Group

Modify LUN Group

Host Response Management –

Add Host Response •Host Response

Delete Host Response

Modify Host Response

Modify CA Reset Group •CA Reset Group

Host-LU QoS Management –

Enable/Disable Host-LU QoS •Host-LU QoS

Set Host-LU QoS

Release Host-LU QoS

Start Host-LU QoS Performance Monitoring

Stop Host-LU QoS Performance Monitoring

Set FC/FCoE Host QoS •FC/FCoE Host QoS in Host QoS

Set iSCSI Host QoS •iSCSI Host QoS in Host QoS

Set SAS Host QoS •SAS Host QoS in Host QoS

Set FC Port QoS •FC Port QoS in Host QoS

Set iSCSI Port QoS •iSCSI Port QoS in Host QoS

Set SAS Port QoS •SAS Port QoS in Host QoS

Set FCoE Port QoS •FCoE Port QoS in Host QoS

Add LU QoS Group •LU QoS Group

Delete LU QoS Group

Modify LU QoS Group

Functions in the Action area for Connectivity Display function

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

414

9.2.1 Host Affinity Management

Host Affinity management provides the following functions:

•Create Host Affinity

•Delete Host Affinity

•Modify Host Affinity

9.2.1.1 Create Host Affinity

This function creates a new host affinity.

When "Host Group - CA Port Group" is selected for "Target Connection", specify the existing "Host Group", "CA

Port Group", and "LUN Group" settings. When "Host - CA Port" is selected for "Target Connection", select the

existing "Host", "CA Port", "and "LUN Group" settings.

The host accesses a volume via a defined path. Configuring the host affinity can limit the volumes which the

host can recognize.

•The maximum number of connectable hosts (the number of HBAs) per CA port is 256.

•If a host group has been specified in the "Host Group" field of host affinity, all the member ports of the

assigned "CA Port Group" have the affinity mode configured "ON".

•If "All (all hosts)" has been specified in the "Host Group" field of host affinity, all the member ports of the

assigned "CA Port Group" have the affinity mode configured "OFF".

•When one port is registered in several CA port groups, and the affinity setting has been configured on one

of the CA port groups including the corresponding port, the affinity setting is configured on all the CA port

groups, which include the corresponding port, and also on the member ports.

•CA port groups without a host affinity setting can be used for creating a host affinity regardless of

whether the affinity mode is enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).

•CA ports without a host affinity setting can be used for creating a host affinity regardless of whether the

affinity mode is enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).

•A host can be a member of several host groups. In addition, a CA port can be a member of several CA port

groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring

host affinity.

•To change the settings of the host affinities, refer to "9.2.1.3 Modify Host Affinity" (page 428).

•Host groups with the host interface "FCoE" can configure host affinity with CA port groups with CA types

"FC" or "FCoE".

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

415

■When "Host Group - CA Port Group" is selected for "Target Connection"

The procedure to create a host affinity is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Create Host Affinity] in [Action].

2Click the [Browse...] button for the host group.

→The [Select Host Group] screen appears.

3Select the connection target.

■When "Host Group" is selected

(1) Select a host group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

416

■When "All" is selected

(1) Select a host response, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

The following modifications are applied for the host response settings with firmware version V10L15

or later.

•"Others" is changed to "Default".

•"Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are deleted from the "Host Response" value.

However, these parameters are displayed if they are applied for host groups.

•The setting parameters for "Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are the same as

"Default".

To allow all of the hosts to recognize the LUN group, select "All" for "Target Connection" and then select

the host response. "All" is displayed in "All (host response name)" format.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

417

4Click the [Browse...] button for the CA port group.

→The [Select CA Port Group] screen appears.

5Select a CA port group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

•If a specific host group has been selected in the "Host Group" field, CA port groups for which the

affinity mode is "OFF" are not displayed.

•If "All" has been selected in the "Host Group" field, CA port groups with any of the following

conditions are not displayed:

-The affinity mode is "ON"

-Member CA ports that used in other CA port groups

-CA port groups that are being used by other host affinities

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

418

6Click the [Browse...] button for the LUN group.

→The [Select LUN Group] screen appears.

7Select a LUN group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

419

8To edit the path between a host and a CA port, click the [Edit] button for the path to be

edited.

→The [Select CA Port] screen appears.

The LUN range that can be recognized from a host depends on the "Host Specific Mode" setting of the

host response that is applied to the selected "Host Group" (specific host group) or "All" (all of the

hosts). A host does not recognize any LUNs that are not included within the following ranges.

The following table shows the LUN range that can be recognized from a host for each "Host Specific

Mode".

When "All" is selected for "Host Group", the LUN groups in which LUNs are specified from LUN#512

onward are not displayed.

Host Specific Mode LUN range that can be recognized from a host

When "Host Group" is selected When "All" is selected

Normal LUN#0 - LUN#255 LUN#0 - LUN#255

AIX Mode LUN#0 - LUN#511 LUN#0 - LUN#511

NR1000V Mode LUN#0 - LUN#511 LUN#0 - LUN#511

HP-UX Mode LUN#0 - LUN#1023 LUN#0 - LUN#511

BS2000 Mode LUN#0 - LUN#4095 LUN#0 - LUN#511

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

420

9Select whether to enable or disable the path between a host and a CA port, and click the

[OK] button.

•Checkbox to select paths

To enable the path between a host and a CA port, select the checkbox of the CA port.

To disable the path between a host and a CA port, clear the checkbox of the CA port.

10 Confirm the host affinity setting and the path between the host and the CA port, click the

[Create] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

421

11 Click the [OK] button.

→The host affinity creation starts.

12 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Connectivity] screen.

End of procedure

■When "Host - CA Port" is selected for "Target Connection"

The procedure to create a host affinity is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Create Host Affinity] in [Action].

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the host interface type of the host group and the CA type of the CA port group do not match

Note that the CA types of "FCoE" and "FC" are regarded as the same CA type.

•When the number of host affinities exceeds the maximum number per ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system

•When the number of hosts exceeds the maximum number per CA port

•When a host cannot recognize some LUNs

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

422

2Click the [Browse...] button for the host.

→The [Select Host] screen appears.

3Select the connection target.

■When "Host" is selected

(1) Select a host to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

423

■When "All" is selected

(1) Select a host response, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

The following modifications are applied for the host response settings with firmware version V10L15

or later.

•"Others" is changed to "Default".

•"Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are deleted from the "Host Response" value.

However, these parameters are displayed if they are applied for host groups.

•The setting parameters for "Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are the same as

"Default".

To allow all of the hosts to recognize the LUN group, select "All" for "Target Connection" and then select

the host response. "All" is displayed in "All (host response name)" format.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

424

4Click the [Browse...] button for the CA port.

→The [Select CA Port] screen appears.

5Select a CA port to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

•If a specific host has been selected in the "Host" field, CA ports for which the affinity mode is "OFF"

are not displayed.

•If "All" has been selected in the "Host" field, CA ports with any of the following conditions are not

displayed:

-The affinity mode is "ON"

-The CA ports are used in the CA port group

-The CA port is used by another host affinity

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

425

6Click the [Browse...] button for the LUN group.

→The [Select LUN Group] screen appears.

7Select a LUN group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

426

8After confirming the host affinity settings, click the [Create] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

The LUN range that can be recognized from a host depends on the "Host Specific Mode" setting of the

host response that is applied to the selected "Host" (specific host) or "All" (all of the hosts). A host

does not recognize any LUNs that are not included within the following ranges.

The following table shows the LUN range that can be recognized from a host for each "Host Specific

Mode".

When "All" is selected for "Host", the LUN groups in which LUNs are specified from LUN#512 onward

are not displayed.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the host interface type of the host and the CA type of the CA port do not match

Note that the CA types of "FCoE" and "FC" are regarded as the same CA type.

•When the number of host affinities exceeds the maximum number per ETERNUS DX Disk storage

system

•When the number of hosts exceeds the maximum number per CA port

•When a host cannot recognize some LUNs

Host Specific Mode LUN range that can be recognized from a host

When "Host" is selected When "All" is selected

Normal LUN#0 - LUN#255 LUN#0 - LUN#255

AIX Mode LUN#0 - LUN#511 LUN#0 - LUN#511

NR1000V Mode LUN#0 - LUN#511 LUN#0 - LUN#511

HP-UX Mode LUN#0 - LUN#1023 LUN#0 - LUN#511

BS2000 Mode LUN#0 - LUN#4095 LUN#0 - LUN#511

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

427

9Click the [OK] button.

→The host affinity creation starts.

10 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Connectivity] screen.

End of procedure

9.2.1.2 Delete Host Affinity

This function deletes the registered host affinity in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.

When a host affinity is deleted, the paths between "Host Group", "CA Port Group", and "LUN Group" or the

paths between "Host", "CA Port", "and "LUN Group" are also deleted.

The procedure to delete a host affinity is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the host affinity to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete

Host Affinity] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

2Click the [OK] button.

→The deletion of the host affinity starts.

When deleting a host affinity, make sure to stop the access of the host which has been associated with the

host affinity to be deleted.

If the selected host affinity does not exist, an error screen appears.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

428

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Connectivity] screen.

End of procedure

9.2.1.3 Modify Host Affinity

This function is used to perform the following modifications to the existing host affinity.

•Changing the "CA Port Group" or "CA Port" settings

•Changing the "LUN Group" setting

•Changing the "CA Ports in a CA Port Group" setting (Change the path between the host and the CA port)

•Changing the "Host Response" setting (only when "Host Group" or "Host" is "All")

Not only the path between the existing host and the CA port, but also the path between a host and a CA port,

which has been added after creating a host affinity, can be modified.

•The maximum number of connectable hosts (the number of HBAs) per CA port is 256.

•When modifying an active host affinity, make sure to stop the access of the host which has been

associated with the host affinity to be modified.

•When one port is registered in several CA port groups, and the affinity setting has been configured on one

of the CA port groups including the corresponding port, the affinity setting is configured on all the CA port

groups, which include the corresponding port, and also on the member ports.

•CA port groups without a host affinity setting can be used for creating a host affinity regardless of

whether the affinity mode is enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).

•CA ports without a host affinity setting can be used for creating a host affinity regardless of whether the

affinity mode is enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).

•A host can be a member of several host groups. In addition, a CA port can be a member of several CA port

groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when changing

host affinity settings.

•When the procedure in "9.2.2.5 Modify Host Group" (page 463) is used to add a host to a host group, the

paths between the added host and all of the ports that are in the associated CA port group are

configured.

•When the procedure in "9.2.3.6 Modify CA Port Group" (page 528) is used to add a port to a CA port group,

the paths between all of the hosts in the host group and the added port are configured.

•Host groups with the host interface "FCoE" can configure host affinity with CA port groups with CA types

"FC" or "FCoE".

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

429

■When selecting a host affinity for "Host Group - CA Port Group"

The procedure to modify a host affinity is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the host affinity to be modified, and click [Modify Host Affinity] in [Action].

2Check the display contents of the host group.

The next step that needs to be performed depends on the display contents of the host group.

■When the selected host group is "All (host response name)"

(1) Click the [Browse...] button.

→The [Select Host Group] screen appears. Proceed to Step 3.

■When the host group is not "All (host response name)"

→Proceed to Step 4.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

430

3Select the host response that is to be assigned to all of the hosts and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

4Click the [Browse...] button for the CA port group.

→The [Select CA Port Group] screen appears.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

431

5Select a CA port group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

6Click the [Browse...] button for the LUN group.

→The [Select LUN Group] screen appears.

•If a specific host group has been selected in the "Host Group" field, CA port groups with any of the

following conditions are not displayed:

-The affinity mode is "OFF"

-The CA port group is used by another host affinity

•If "All" has been selected in the "Host Group" field, CA port groups with any of the following

conditions are not displayed:

-The CA port group is used by another host affinity

-Member CA ports that used in other CA port groups

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

432

7Select a LUN group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

•The LUN range that can be recognized from a host is determined by which of the following settings

is used. A host does not recognize any LUNs that are not included within the following ranges.

-The "Host Specific Mode" setting of the host response that is applied to "Host Group" (specific

host group) with the host affinity setting

-The "Host Specific Mode" setting of the host response that is applied to "All" (all of the hosts)

with the host affinity setting

-The "Host Specific Mode" setting of the host response that is newly applied to "All" (all of the

hosts) with the host affinity setting

•The following table shows the LUN range that can be recognized from a host for each "Host Specific

Mode".

When "All" is selected for "Host Group", the LUN groups in which LUNs are specified from LUN#512

onward are not displayed.

Host Specific Mode LUN range that can be recognized from a host

For "Host Group" For "All"

Normal LUN#0 - LUN#255 LUN#0 - LUN#255

AIX Mode LUN#0 - LUN#511 LUN#0 - LUN#511

NR1000V Mode LUN#0 - LUN#511 LUN#0 - LUN#511

HP-UX Mode LUN#0 - LUN#1023 LUN#0 - LUN#511

BS2000 Mode LUN#0 - LUN#4095 LUN#0 - LUN#511

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

433

8To edit the path between a host and a CA port, click the [Edit] button for the path to be

edited.

→The [Select CA Port] screen appears.

9Select whether to enable or disable the path between a host and a CA port, and click the

[OK] button.

•Checkbox to select paths

To enable the path between a host and a CA port, select the checkbox of the CA port.

To disable the path between a host and a CA port, clear the checkbox of the CA port.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

434

10 Confirm the modified host affinity setting and the path between the host and the CA port,

click the [Modify] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

11 Click the [OK] button.

→The modification of the host affinity starts.

12 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Connectivity] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the host interface type of the host group and the CA type of the CA port group do not match

Note that the CA types of "FCoE" and "FC" are regarded as the same CA type.

•When the number of hosts exceeds the maximum number per CA port

•When a host cannot recognize some LUNs

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

435

■When selecting a host affinity for "Host - CA Port"

The procedure to modify a host affinity is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the host affinity to be modified, and click [Modify Host Affinity] in [Action].

2Check the display contents of the host.

The next step that needs to be performed depends on the display contents of the host.

■When the selected host is "All (host response name)"

(1) Click the [Browse...] button.

→The [Select Host] screen appears. Proceed to Step 3.

■When the host is not "All (host response name)"

→Proceed to Step 4.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

436

3Select the host response that is to be assigned to all of the hosts and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

4Click the [Browse...] button for the CA port.

→The [Select CA Port] screen appears.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

437

5Select a CA port to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

6Click the [Browse...] button for the LUN group.

→The [Select LUN Group] screen appears.

•If a specific host has been selected in the "Host" field, CA ports with any of the following conditions

are not displayed:

-The affinity mode is "OFF"

-The CA port is used by another host affinity

•If "All" has been selected in the "Host" field, CA ports with any of the following conditions are not

displayed:

-The CA port is used by another host affinity

-The CA port is used in the CA port group

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

438

7Select a LUN group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

→The display returns to the initial screen.

•The LUN range that can be recognized from a host is determined by which of the following settings

is used. A host does not recognize any LUNs that are not included within the following ranges.

-The "Host Specific Mode" setting of the host response that is applied to "Host" (specific host)

with the host affinity setting

-The "Host Specific Mode" setting of the host response that is applied to "All" (all of the hosts)

with the host affinity setting

-The "Host Specific Mode" setting of the host response that is newly applied to "All" (all of the

hosts) with the host affinity setting

•The following table shows the LUN range that can be recognized from a host for each "Host Specific

Mode".

When "All" is selected for "Host", the LUN groups in which LUNs are specified from LUN#512 onward

are not displayed.

Host Specific Mode LUN range that can be recognized from a host

For "Host" For "All"

Normal LUN#0 - LUN#255 LUN#0 - LUN#255

AIX Mode LUN#0 - LUN#511 LUN#0 - LUN#511

NR1000V Mode LUN#0 - LUN#511 LUN#0 - LUN#511

HP-UX Mode LUN#0 - LUN#1023 LUN#0 - LUN#511

BS2000 Mode LUN#0 - LUN#4095 LUN#0 - LUN#511

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

439

8After confirming the host affinity settings, click the [Modify] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

9Click the [OK] button.

→The modification of the host affinity starts.

10 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Connectivity] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the host interface type of the host and the CA type of the CA port do not match

Note that the CA types of "FCoE" and "FC" are regarded as the same CA type.

•When the number of hosts exceeds the maximum number per CA port

•When a host cannot recognize some LUNs

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

440

9.2.2 Host Group Management

Host group management provides the following functions:

•Add FC/FCoE Host Group

•Add iSCSI Host Group

•Add SAS Host Group

•Delete Host Group

•Modify Host Group

•Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)

•Modify Host Group (iSCSI)

•Modify Host Group (SAS)

•Add FC/FCoE Host

•Add iSCSI Host

•Add SAS Host

•Delete FC/FCoE Host

•Delete iSCSI Host

•Delete SAS Host

•Modify FC/FCoE Host

•Modify iSCSI Host

•Modify SAS Host

9.2.2.1 Add FC/FCoE Host Group

This function creates a new FC host group and registers which hosts are members of this group.

An FC host group uses FC or FCoE as the interface type, and groups the hosts (HBAs), which access the same

LUN group. This function configures Host Affinity settings for each FC host group.

The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered

*1: The total number of host groups irrespective of the interface types.

*2: The total number of hosts irrespective of the interface types.

Model Number of host

groups (*1) per

storage system

Number of hosts

(HBAs) (*2) per

storage system

Number of hosts

(HBAs)

per CA port

Number of hosts

(HBAs)

per host group

ETERNUS DX80 S2 128 1024 256 8

ETERNUS DX90 S2

ETERNUS DX410 S2

ETERNUS DX440 S2

ETERNUS DX8100 S2

ETERNUS DX8700 S2 512 8192 64

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

441

The procedure to create an FC host group is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Add FC/FCoE Host Group] in [Action].

•Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. Create a new host group when registering a

host with GUI by using this function.

•A host can be a member of several host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host

and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

•To assign an appropriate host response to a created host group, refer to "User's Guide -Server Connection-

" for each OS type. The host response configures the operation mode that is appropriate for the host.

If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched

correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

•The host response that is specified for a host group is applied all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups

to which the target host belongs. When a host that already belongs to an existing host group is added to

a newly created host group, the host response of the new host group is applied to the host. The host

response of the existing host group to which the target host belongs is also changed. Refer to "Example

of changing the host response when adding a host group" (page 447) for details.

•The name of the [Add FC/FCoE Host] function, which creates a new FC host group and registers the mem-

ber hosts, has changed with firmware version V10L50. The [Add FC/FCoE Host] function is now called the

[Add FC/FCoE Host Group] function.

•To change the settings of the host groups, use the procedure in "9.2.2.5 Modify Host Group" (page 463).

•To add a port to an existing host group, use the procedure in "9.2.2.5 Modify Host Group" (page 463).

•To change the host name or WWN, use the procedure in "9.2.2.15 Modify FC/FCoE Host" (page 507).

•An FC host and an FCoE host can be members of the same host group. Both "FC host" and "FCoE host" are

abbreviated as "FC host" in this section.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

442

2Input a host group name to be created, and select a host response to be assigned to the

host group.

•Host Group Name

Specify the host group name.

An existing host group name cannot be specified. Refer to "Naming conventions for adding hosts"

(page 994) for details.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

•Host Response

Select a host response to be assigned to a host group.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.

-Solaris MPxIO

-HP-UX

-AIX EMPD (*1)

-AIX VxVM

-AIX Single Path

-VS850/SVC

-Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-Default

*1: EMPD: ETERNUS Multipath Driver

The following modifications are applied for the host response settings with firmware version V10L15

or later.

•"Others" is changed to "Default".

•"Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are deleted from the "Host Response" value.

•The setting parameters for "Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are the same as

"Default".

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

443

3Register a host in a host group in the following procedures.

■When registering a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Now Connected] tab.

(2) Select a host that is to be registered from the FC host list, and click the [Add] button.

-Checkbox to select a host

Select the FC host checkbox to be registered in a host group.

→A confirmation screen appears.

Filter setting

Filter Description

WWN

Input the WWN that is to be displayed.

FC hosts matching or partially matching the input WWN are displayed.

When not using the WWN for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Group

Input the host group name that is to be displayed.

FC hosts which belong to any host groups that match or partially match the entered

name are displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Response Select the host response that is to be displayed.

Any FC hosts that are allocated to the selected host response are displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

444

■When registering a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

→The [Add FC/FCoE Host] screen appears.

•If the WWN is not displayed when clicking the [Rediscover] button, make sure that there is no error

in the connection environment, such as the connection between the host and the switch, and the

CA port settings of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. If there is no error in the connection

environment, contact the Support Department, or specify the WWN manually.

•An error screen appears in the following conditions:

-When the "Host Group Name" is not entered

-When the "Host Group Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

-When the "Host Group Name" overlaps with an existing host group name

(Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the

interface types.)

-When no hosts are registered in a host group, or when nine or more hosts are registered in a

host group (for ETERNUS DX8700 S2, 65 or more hosts are registered in a host group)

-When the total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS

DX Disk storage system

-When the total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

445

(3) Manually specify the WWN of the host that is to be registered, and click the [OK] button.

-WWN

Input the WWN for the FC host.

The following input conditions apply:

•16 hexadecimal numbers

•"F (f)" or "0" used in entire 16 characters are not allowed.

→Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

(4) Repeat Step (2) and Step (3) to set more WWNs.

(5) After adding the FC host is complete, click the [Add] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "WWN" is not input

•When the "WWN" does not satisfy the input conditions

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

446

4Click the [OK] button.

→Registration of the FC host group starts.

5Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

End of procedure

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Host Group Name" is not input

•When the "Host Group Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Host Group Name" overlaps with an existing host group name

(host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the interface

types)

•When the several FC hosts with the same WWNs have been registered

•When no hosts are registered in a host group, or when nine or more hosts are registered in a host

group (for ETERNUS DX8700 S2, 65 or more hosts are registered in a host group)

•When the total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

Disk storage system

•When the total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

Click the [Continue] button to continue adding FC hosts.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

447

■Example of changing the host response when adding a host group

When a host "Host_G3" (host response: HR_1) is created with "Host-3" and "Host-4" and added to the host

groups listed in the table above, the host response is changed as follows:

The following table shows the host response after new hosts are added.

■Example of changing the host response when adding a host to an existing host group

When a host "Host_3" is added to the existing host group "Host_G3" (host response: HR_1), the host response

is changed as follows:

Host group (Host response) Member host Host response that is allocated to the host

Host_G1 (Default) Host-1 Default

Host-2 Default

Host_G2 (Default) Host-2 Default

Host-3 Default

1. The host response for Host-3 is changed from "Default" to "HR_1" (the host response for Host_G3).

2. Since the host response for Host-3 is changed, the host response for Host_G2 to which Host-3 belongs is also

changed from "Default" to "HR_1".

(The host response for Host_2, which is the member host of Host_G2, is changed from "Default" to "HR_1".)

3. Since the host response for Host-2 is changed, the host response for Host_G1 to which Host-2 belongs is also

changed from "Default" to "HR_1".

(The host response for Host_1, which is the member host of Host_G1, is changed from "Default" to "HR_1".)

Host group (Host response) Member host Host response that is allocated to the host

Host_G1 (HR_1) Host-1 HR_1

Host-2 HR_1

Host_G2 (HR_1) Host-2 HR_1

Host-3 HR_1

Host_G3 (HR_1) Host-3 HR_1

Host-4 HR_1

Host group (Host response) Member host Host response that is allocated to the host

Host_G1 (Default) Host-1 Default

Host-2 Default

Host_G2 (Default) Host-2 Default

Host-3 Default

Host_G3 (HR_1) Host-4 HR_1

1. The host response for Host-3 is changed from "Default" to "HR_1" (the host response for Host_G3).

2. Since the host response for Host-3 is changed, the host response for Host_G2 to which Host-3 belongs is also

changed from "Default" to "HR_1".

(The host response for Host_2, which is the member host of Host_G2, is changed from "Default" to "HR_1".)

3. Since the host response for Host-2 is changed, the host response for Host_G1 to which Host-2 belongs is also

changed from "Default" to "HR_1".

(The host response for Host_1, which is the member host of Host_G1, is changed from "Default" to "HR_1".)

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

448

The following table shows the host response after new hosts are added.

9.2.2.2 Add iSCSI Host Group

This function creates a new iSCSI host group and registers which hosts are members of this group.

An iSCSI host group uses iSCSI as the interface type, and groups the hosts (HBAs), which access the same LUN

group. This function configures Host Affinity settings for each iSCSI host group.

The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered

*1: The total number of host groups irrespective of the interface types.

*2: The total number of hosts irrespective of the interface types.

Host group (Host response) Member host Host response that is allocated to the host

Host_G1 (HR_1) Host-1 HR_1

Host-2 HR_1

Host_G2 (HR_1) Host-2 HR_1

Host-3 HR_1

Host_G3 (HR_1) Host-3 HR_1

Host-4 HR_1

Model Number of host

groups (*1) per

storage system

Number of hosts

(HBAs) (*2) per

storage system

Number of hosts

(HBAs) per

CA port

Number of hosts

(HBAs) per

host group

ETERNUS DX80 S2 128 1024 256 8

ETERNUS DX90 S2

ETERNUS DX410 S2

ETERNUS DX440 S2

ETERNUS DX8100 S2

ETERNUS DX8700 S2 512 8192 64

•Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. Create a new host group when registering a

host with GUI by using this function.

•A host can be a member of several host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host

and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

•To assign an appropriate host response to a created host group, refer to "User's Guide -Server Connection-

" for each OS type. The host response configures the operation mode that is appropriate for the host.

If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched

correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

•The host response that is specified for a host group is applied all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups

to which the target host belongs. When a host that already belongs to an existing host group is added to

a newly created host group, the host response of the new host group is applied to the host. The host

response of the existing host group to which the target host belongs is also changed. Refer to "Example

of changing the host response when adding a host group" (page 447) for details.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

449

The procedure to create an iSCSI host group is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Add iSCSI Host Group] in [Action].

2Input a host group name to be created, and select a host response to be assigned to the

host group.

•Host Group Name

Specify the host group name.

An existing host group name cannot be specified. Refer to "Naming conventions for adding hosts"

(page 994) for details.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

•Host Response

Select a host response to be assigned to a host group.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.

-Solaris MPxIO

-HP-UX

-AIX EMPD (*1)

-AIX VxVM

-AIX Single Path

-VS850/SVC

-Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-Default

*1: EMPD: ETERNUS Multipath Driver

•Unlike GUI, CLI can register two iSCSI hosts that have the same iSCSI name by setting an IP address for one

of these iSCSI hosts and by not setting an IP address for the other iSCSI host. However, if iSCSI hosts are

registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system in this way, iSCSI hosts cannot be added using GUI.

Avoid this configuration when using GUI and CLI together. If both iSCSI hosts already exist, use CLI to

specify an IP address for the iSCSI host without the IP address.

•The name of the [Add iSCSI Host] function, which creates a new iSCSI host group and registers the mem-

ber hosts has changed with firmware version V10L50. The [Add iSCSI Host] function is now called the

[Add iSCSI Host Group] function.

•To change the settings of the host groups, use the procedure in "9.2.2.5 Modify Host Group" (page 463).

•To add a port to an existing host group, use the procedure in "9.2.2.5 Modify Host Group" (page 463).

•To change the iSCSI host information, use the procedure in "9.2.2.16 Modify iSCSI Host" (page 509).

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

450

3Register a host in a host group in the following procedures, and click the [Add] button.

■When registering a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Now Connected] tab.

The following hosts are displayed in the [Now Connected] tab:

-Hosts that are connected to an iSCSI-CA or an iSCSI-CA/RA but are not registered in the ETERNUS

DX Disk storage system (*1)

*1: "Host that is not registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system" indicates that a host with the

same iSCSI name, IP version, and Alias Name as the target host is not registered in the storage

system. The host is regarded as unregistered host even if a host with the same iSCSI name, IP version,

Alias Name, and different IP address is already registered. The obtained "iSCSI Name", "IP Version", "IP

Address", and "Alias Name" are displayed.

-Hosts that are connected to an iSCSI-CA or an iSCSI-CA/RA and registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

-Hosts that are not connected to an iSCSI-CA or an iSCSI-CA/RA but are registered in the ETERNUS

DX Disk storage system

Click the [Rediscover] button to update the iSCSI host list.

The following modifications are applied for the host response settings with firmware version V10L15

or later.

•"Others" is changed to "Default".

•"Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are deleted from the "Host Response" value.

•The setting parameters for "Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are the same as

"Default".

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

451

(2) Select a host to be registered from the iSCSI host list, register the iSCSI host information (the IP

address and the Alias name, etc.) to the selected host, and click the [Add] button.

-Checkbox to select a host

Select the iSCSI host checkbox to be registered in a host group.

-IP Version

Select the IP version of the iSCSI host from "IPv4" or "IPv6".

-IP Address

Specify the IP address of the member host.

There are two methods to specify an IP address; "IPv4" and "IPv6". The IP address must be

specified with the selected IP version (IPv4 or IPv6). The following IPv6 addresses can be used;

"link local address", "global address", "unique local address", and "6to4 address". Refer to

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 757) for details. When the current setting is displayed, the IPv6

address is displayed as an abbreviation.

It is not necessary to specify this item if IP address is not used.

The following input conditions apply:

•For IPv4 address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

•For IPv6 address

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 378) for details.

•If the iSNS server has not been configured in "9.2.3.8 Modify iSCSI Port Parameters" (page

541), the iSCSI host cannot be automatically acquired.

•The following restrictions in the environment that is described below apply for the

automatic acquirement of host information (*1) even when the iSNS server is specified.

*1: "iSCSI Name", "IP Version", "IP Address", and "Alias Name"

-When one of the following OSs is used and there are multiple hosts that have the same

iSCSI name but different IP addresses, only the information of one host can be acquired.

•Windows Server 2003

•Windows Server 2008

•Windows Server 2008 R2

•Oracle Solaris 10

-When the host OS is Oracle Solaris 11, "IP Version" and "IP Address" cannot be acquired.

•The following items can be specified only for the iSCSI hosts that are selected by

checkboxes; "IP Version", "IP Address", "Alias Name", "CHAP User ID", "Change CHAP

Password", "CHAP Password", and "Confirm CHAP Password".

To register an iSCSI host without using an IP address, perform IP version selection as follows:

•Select "IPv4" when the IP address format of the iSCSI host is IPv4 (when using an IPv4 host)

•Select "IPv6" when the IP address format of the iSCSI host is IPv6 (when using an IPv6 host)

•If the IP address format of the iSCSI host cannot be checked (when either an IPv4 host or an

IPv6 host is used), register two hosts. Select "IPv4" for one host, and select "IPv6" for the

other host. Specify the same iSCSI name, CHAP user ID, and CHAP password for each host.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

452

-Alias Name

Specify the Alias name of the iSCSI host.

If the iSCSI host has already been registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, the Alias

name is displayed.

It is not necessary to specify this item if Alias name is not used.

An existing Alias name cannot be specified.

The following input conditions apply:

•Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Space

-CHAP User ID

Specify the user ID for CHAP Authentication.

If the iSCSI host has already been registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, the user ID

is displayed.

It is not necessary to specify this item if CHAP Authentication is not used.

Configure the user ID and the password as a pair.

The following input conditions apply:

•Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Space

-Change CHAP Password

To register the CHAP Authentication password, select the checkbox.

-CHAP Password

Specify the password for CHAP Authentication.

It is not necessary to specify this item if CHAP Authentication is not used.

Configure the user ID and the password as a pair.

The password can be entered only when the "Change CHAP Password" checkbox is selected.

The following input conditions apply:

•12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Space

-Confirm CHAP Password

Input the CHAP password again for confirmation.

The password can be entered only when the "Change CHAP Password" checkbox is selected.

The following input conditions apply:

•12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Space

→A confirmation screen appears.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

453

Filter setting

Filter Description

iSCSI Name

Input the iSCSI name that is to be displayed.

iSCSI hosts matching or partially matching the input iSCSI name are displayed.

When not using the iSCSI name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Group

Input the host group name that is to be displayed.

iSCSI hosts which belong to any host groups that match or partially match the

entered name are displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Response Select the host response that is to be displayed.

Any iSCSI hosts that are allocated to the selected host response are displayed.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Host Group Name" is not entered

•When the "Host Group Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Host Group Name" overlaps with an existing host group name

(Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the interface

types.)

•When the "IP Address" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "IP Address" is specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Address" is

already registered

•When the "IP Address" is not specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Ver-

sion" is already registered

•When the "Alias Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Alias Name" overlaps the existing Alias name

•When the "CHAP User ID" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "CHAP Password" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Confirm CHAP Password" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "CHAP Password" and the "Confirm CHAP Password" do not match

•When either of the "CHAP User ID" or the "CHAP Password" has been specified

•When no hosts are registered in a host group, or when nine or more hosts are registered in a host

group (for ETERNUS DX8700 S2, 65 or more hosts are registered in a host group)

•When the total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

Disk storage system

•When the total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

454

■When registering a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

→ The [Add iSCSI Host] screen appears.

(3) Specify the iSCSI host information of the host to be registered, and click the [OK] button.

-iSCSI Name

Specify an iSCSI name of the iSCSI host (required).

The following input conditions apply:

•Alphabetic characters (lower case) and numeric characters

•Symbols "-" (hyphen), "." (period) and ":" (colon)

•The name starts with "iqn." or "eui."

•4 - 223 characters

→ Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

Refer to Step (2) (page 451) for other settings.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

455

(4) Repeat Step (2) and Step (3) to set more iSCSI hosts.

(5) After adding the iSCSI host is complete, click the [Add] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "iSCSI Name" is not input

•When the "iSCSI Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "IP Address" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Alias Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "CHAP User ID" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "CHAP Password" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Confirm CHAP Password" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "CHAP Password" and the "Confirm CHAP Password" do not match

•When either of the "CHAP User ID" or the "CHAP Password" has been specified

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Host Group Name" is not entered

•When the "Host Group Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Host Group Name" overlaps with an existing host group name

(Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the interface

types.)

•When the "IP Address" is specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Address" is

already registered

•When the "IP Address" is not specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP

Version" is already registered

•When the same iSCSI name is specified for multiple iSCSI hosts

•When the "Alias Name" overlaps the existing Alias name

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

456

4Click the [OK] button.

→Registration of the iSCSI host group starts.

5Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

End of procedure

9.2.2.3 Add SAS Host Group

This function creates a new SAS host group and registers which hosts are members of this group.

A SAS host group uses SAS as the interface type, and groups the hosts (HBAs), which access the same LUN

group. This function configures Host Affinity settings for each SAS host group.

The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered

*1: The total number of host groups irrespective of the interface types.

*2: The total number of hosts irrespective of the interface types.

•When no hosts are registered in a host group, or when nine or more hosts are registered in a host

group (for ETERNUS DX8700 S2, 65 or more hosts are registered in a host group)

•When the total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

Disk storage system

•When the total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

Click the [Continue] button to continue adding iSCSI hosts.

Model Number of host

groups (*1) per

storage system

Number of hosts

(HBAs) (*2) per

storage system

Number of hosts

(HBAs)

per CA port

Number of hosts

(HBAs)

per host group

ETERNUS DX80 S2 128 1024 256 8

ETERNUS DX90 S2

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

457

The procedure to create a SAS host group is as follows:

Procedure

1Click [Add SAS Host Group] in [Action].

2Input a host group name to be created, and select a host response to be assigned to the

host group.

•Host Group Name

Specify the host group name.

An existing host group name cannot be specified. Refer to "Naming conventions for adding hosts"

(page 994) for details.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

•Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. Create a new host group when registering a

host with GUI by using this function.

•A host can be a member of several host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host

and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

•To assign an appropriate host response to a created host group, refer to "User's Guide -Server Connection-

" for each OS type. The host response configures the operation mode that is appropriate for the host.

If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched

correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

•The host response that is specified for a host group is applied all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups

to which the target host belongs. When a host that already belongs to an existing host group is added to

a newly created host group, the host response of the new host group is applied to the host. The host

response of the existing host group to which the target host belongs is also changed. Refer to "Example

of changing the host response when adding a host group" (page 447) for details.

•The name of the [Add SAS Host] function, which creates a new SAS host group and registers the member

hosts has changed with firmware version V10L50. The [Add SAS Host] function is now called the [Add SAS

Host Group] function.

•To change the settings of the host groups, use the procedure in "9.2.2.5 Modify Host Group" (page 463).

•To add a port to an existing host group, use the procedure in "9.2.2.5 Modify Host Group" (page 463).

•To change the host name or the SAS address, use the procedure in "9.2.2.17 Modify SAS Host" (page 514).

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

458

•Host Response

Select a host response to be assigned to a host group.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.

-Solaris MPxIO

-HP-UX

-AIX EMPD (*1)

-AIX VxVM

-AIX Single Path

-VS850/SVC

-Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-Default

*1: EMPD: ETERNUS Multipath Driver

3Register a host in a host group in the following procedures.

The following modifications are applied for the host response settings with firmware version V10L15

or later.

•"Others" is changed to "Default".

•"Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are deleted from the "Host Response" value.

•The setting parameters for "Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are the same as

"Default".

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

459

■When registering a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Now Connected] tab.

(2) Select a host to be registered from the SAS host list, and click the [Add] button.

-Checkbox to select a host

Select the SAS host checkbox to be registered in a host group.

→A confirmation screen appears.

Filter setting

Filter Description

SAS Address

Input the SAS address to be displayed.

SAS hosts matching or partially matching the input SAS address are displayed.

When not using the SAS address for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Group

Input the host group name that is to be displayed.

SAS hosts which belong to any host groups that match or partially match the entered

name are displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Response Select the host response name that is to be displayed.

Any SAS hosts that are allocated to the selected host response are displayed.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Host Group Name" is not entered

•When the "Host Group Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Host Group Name" overlaps with an existing host group name

(Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the interface

types.)

•When no hosts are registered in a host group, or when nine or more hosts are registered in a host

group

•When the total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

Disk storage system

•When the total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

460

■When registering a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

→The [Add SAS Host] screen appears.

(3) Manually specify the SAS address of the host to be registered, and click the [OK] button.

-SAS Address

Specify the SAS address of the SAS host.

The following input conditions apply:

•16 hexadecimal numbers

•"F (f)" or "0" used in entire 16 characters are not allowed.

→Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

461

(4) Repeat Step (2) and Step (3) to set more SAS addresses.

(5) After adding the SAS host is complete, click the [Add] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "SAS Address" is not input

•When the "SAS Address" does not satisfy the input conditions

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Host Group Name" is not entered

•When the "Host Group Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Host Group Name" overlaps with an existing host group name

(Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the interface

types.)

•When the several SAS hosts with the same SAS addresses have been registered

•When no hosts are registered in a host group, or when nine or more hosts are registered in a host

group

•When the total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

Disk storage system

•When the total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

462

4Click the [OK] button.

→Registration of the SAS host group starts.

5Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

End of procedure

9.2.2.4 Delete Host Group

This function deletes a host group. When a host group is deleted, the hosts, which belong to the host group,

are also deleted.

The procedure to delete a host group is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the host group to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete Host

Group] in [Action].

→A confirmation screen appears.

Click the [Continue] button to continue adding SAS hosts.

The host group, of which host affinity settings have been configured, cannot be deleted.

The host group, of which host affinity settings have been configured (the status of the host group is

"Active"), cannot be deleted.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

463

2Click the [OK] button.

→Deletion of the host group starts.

3Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

End of procedure

9.2.2.5 Modify Host Group

This function performs the following modifications to the existing host group.

•Changing the "Host Group Name" settings

•Changing the "Host Response" settings

•Changing the "Host" settings (including addition and deletion of member hosts in a host group)

Operation screens for modifying host groups vary with the interface types.

•Refer to "9.2.2.6 Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)" (page 463) to edit FC/FCoE host groups.

•Refer to "9.2.2.7 Modify Host Group (iSCSI)" (page 470) to edit iSCSI host groups.

•Refer to "9.2.2.8 Modify Host Group (SAS)" (page 480) to edit SAS host groups.

9.2.2.6 Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)

This function performs the following modifications to the existing FC/FCoE host group.

•Changing the "Host Group Name" settings

•Changing the "Host Response" settings

•Changing the "Host" settings (including addition and deletion of member hosts in a host group)

Hosts can be added to host groups which the host affinity setting has been already configured, or deleted

from host groups.

If a host is added, the host affinity setting is automatically configured to the host, as a host group member.

If a host is deleted, the host affinity setting is cleared from the corresponding host.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

464

The number of hosts that can be registered

*1: The total number of hosts irrespective of the interface types.

Model Number of hosts (HBAs)

(*1) per storage system

Number of hosts (HBAs)

per CA port

Number of hosts (HBAs)

per host group

ETERNUS DX80 S2 1024 256 8

ETERNUS DX90 S2

ETERNUS DX410 S2

ETERNUS DX440 S2

ETERNUS DX8100 S2

ETERNUS DX8700 S2 8192 64

•Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. It is not possible to delete all hosts from a

host group.

•A host that has been registered with GUI by using this function belongs to one of the host groups.

•A host can be a member of several host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host

and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

•To assign an appropriate host response to a created host group, refer to "User's Guide -Server Connection-

" for each OS type. The host response configures the operation mode that is appropriate for the host. If an

appropriate host response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched correctly or

the volume may not be recognized correctly.

•The host response that is specified for a host group is applied all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups

to which the target host belongs. When a host that already belongs to an existing host group is added to

another host group, the host response of the target host is changed to the host response of the host

group to which the target host is added. The host response of the existing host group to which the target

host belongs is also changed. Refer to "Example of changing the host response when adding a host to an

existing host group" (page 447) for details.

•When changing the host response for the host group, the host responses of the other host groups to

which the target host belongs are also changed.

•When a host was added to a host group, of which the host affinity setting has been configured, paths

between all the ports with the host affinity setting and the added host will be configured. To modify the

path between a host and a port, refer to "9.2.1.3 Modify Host Affinity" (page 428).

•When a host in the host group for which the host affinity settings are already configured is deleted, the

path from the host to the port is also deleted.

•To change the host name or WWN, use the procedure in "9.2.2.15 Modify FC/FCoE Host" (page 507).

•To create a new host group and register hosts, use the procedure in "9.2.2.1 Add FC/FCoE Host Group"

(page 440).

•An FC host and an FCoE host can be members of the same host group. Both "FC host" and "FCoE host" are

abbreviated as "FC host" in this section.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

465

The procedure to edit an FC host group is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the FC host group to be changed, and click [Modify Host Group] in [Action].

2Input a new host group name, or re-select a host response to be assigned to the host group.

●Host Group Setting

•Host Group Name

Specify the host group name.

An existing host group name cannot be specified. Refer to "Naming conventions for adding hosts"

(page 994) for details.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

•Host Response

Select a host response to be assigned to a host group.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.

-Solaris MPxIO

-HP-UX

-AIX EMPD (*1)

-AIX VxVM

-AIX Single Path

-VS850/SVC

-Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-Default

*1: EMPD: ETERNUS Multipath Driver

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

466

•If the host response is changed for a host group that is configured with the host affinity setting,

the LUNs may not be able to be accessed from the host. Make sure to check the current LUN

settings and select a host response with an appropriate "Host Specific Mode" to change the

host response.

•The following modifications are applied for the host response settings with firmware version

V10L15 or later.

-"Others" is changed to "Default".

-"Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are deleted from the "Host Response"

value. However, these parameters are displayed if they are applied for host groups.

-The setting parameters for "Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are the

same as "Default". If one of the host responses that is described here is applied to a host

group, change the setting to "Default".

Available: The host can recognize LUNs

N/A: The host cannot recognize some LUNs

LUN settings for LUN groups

with host affinity settings

Host Specific Mode

Normal AIX Mode NR1000V

Mode

HP-UX

Mode

BS2000

Mode

LUN#0 – LUN#255 Available Available Available Available Available

LUN#0 - LUN#511 N/A Available Available Available Available

LUN#0 - LUN#1023 N/A N/A N/A Available Available

LUN#0 - LUN#4095 N/A N/A N/A N/A Available

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

467

3Add or delete a host in a host group in the following procedures.

■When adding or deleting a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Registered And Now Connected] tab.

(2) Add or delete hosts, and click the [Modify] button.

-Checkbox to select a host

Select the corresponding host checkbox in the FC host list, to add a host.

Clear the corresponding host checkbox in the FC host list, to delete a host.

→A confirmation screen appears.

Filter setting

Filter Description

WWN

Input the WWN that is to be displayed.

FC hosts matching or partially matching the input WWN are displayed.

When not using the WWN for filtering, leave this item blank.

Other Host Group

Input the other host group name that is to be displayed.

FC hosts which belong to any host groups that match or partially match the entered

name are displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Response Select the host response that is to be displayed.

Any FC hosts that are allocated to the selected host response are displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

468

■When adding a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

→The [Add FC/FCoE Host] screen appears.

•If the WWN is not displayed when clicking the [Rediscover] button, make sure that there is no error

in the connection environment, such as the connection between the host and the switch, and the

CA port settings of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. If there is no error in the connection

environment, contact the Support Department, or specify the WWN manually.

•An error screen appears in the following conditions:

-When the "Host Group Name" is not entered

-When the "Host Group Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

-When the "Host Group Name" overlaps with an existing host group name

(Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the

interface types.)

-When a host cannot recognize some LUNs

-When no hosts are registered in a host group, or when nine or more hosts are registered in a

host group (for ETERNUS DX8700 S2, 65 or more hosts are registered in a host group)

-When the total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

469

(3) Manually specify the WWN of the host to be added, and click the [OK] button.

-WWN

Input the WWN for the FC host.

The following input conditions apply:

•Hexadecimal numbers (0 - 9, A - F, a - f)

•16 characters

•"F (f)" or "0" used in entire 16 characters are not allowed.

→Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

(4) Repeat Step (2) and Step (3) to set more WWNs.

(5) After adding or deleting FC hosts is complete, click the [Modify] button.

→A confirmation screen appears.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "WWN" is not input

•When the "WWN" does not satisfy the input conditions

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

470

4Click the [OK] button.

→Modification of the FC host group starts.

5Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

End of procedure

9.2.2.7 Modify Host Group (iSCSI)

This function performs the following modifications to the existing iSCSI host group.

•Changing the "Host Group Name" settings

•Changing the "Host Response" settings

•Changing the "Host" settings (including addition and deletion of member hosts in a host group)

Hosts can be added to host groups which the host affinity setting has been already configured, or deleted

from host groups.

If a host is added, the host affinity setting is automatically configured to the host, as a host group member.

If a host is deleted, the host affinity setting is cleared from the corresponding host.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Host Group Name" is not entered

•When the "Host Group Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Host Group Name" overlaps with an existing host group name

(Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the interface

types.)

•When the several FC hosts with the same WWNs have been registered

•When a host cannot recognize some LUNs

•When no hosts are registered in a host group, or when nine or more hosts are registered in a host

group (for ETERNUS DX8700 S2, 65 or more hosts are registered in a host group)

•When the total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

471

The number of hosts that can be registered

*1: The total number of hosts irrespective of the interface types.

Model Number of hosts (HBAs)

(*1) per storage system

Number of hosts (HBAs)

per CA port

Number of hosts (HBAs)

per host group

ETERNUS DX80 S2 1024 256 8

ETERNUS DX90 S2

ETERNUS DX410 S2

ETERNUS DX440 S2

ETERNUS DX8100 S2

ETERNUS DX8700 S2 8192 64

•Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. It is not possible to delete all hosts from a

host group.

•A host that has been registered with GUI by using this function belongs to one of the host groups.

•A host can be a member of several host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host

and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

•To assign an appropriate host response to a created host group, refer to "User's Guide -Server Connection-

" for each OS type. The host response configures the operation mode that is appropriate for the host. If an

appropriate host response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched correctly or

the volume may not be recognized correctly.

•The host response that is specified for a host group is applied all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups

to which the target host belongs. When a host that already belongs to an existing host group is added to

another host group, the host response of the target host is changed to the host response of the host

group to which the target host is added. The host response of the existing host group to which the target

host belongs is also changed. Refer to "Example of changing the host response when adding a host to an

existing host group" (page 447) for details.

•When changing the host response for the host group, the host responses of the other host groups to

which the target host belongs are also changed.

•Unlike GUI, CLI can register two iSCSI hosts that have the same iSCSI name by setting an IP address for one

of these iSCSI hosts and by not setting an IP address for the other iSCSI host. However, if iSCSI hosts are

registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system in this way, iSCSI host settings cannot be changed

using GUI. Avoid this configuration when using GUI and CLI together. If both iSCSI hosts already exist, use

CLI to specify an IP address for the iSCSI host without the IP address.

•When a host was added to a host group, of which the host affinity setting has been configured, paths

between all the ports with the host affinity setting and the added host will be configured. To modify the

path between a host and a port, refer to "9.2.1.3 Modify Host Affinity" (page 428).

•When a host in the host group for which the host affinity settings are already configured is deleted, the

path from the host to the port is also deleted.

•To change the iSCSI host information, use the procedure in "9.2.2.16 Modify iSCSI Host" (page 509).

•To create a new host group and register hosts, use the procedure in "9.2.2.2 Add iSCSI Host Group" (page

448).

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

472

The procedure to edit an iSCSI host group is as follows:

Procedure

1Select the iSCSI host group to be changed, and click [Modify Host Group] in [Action].

2Input a new host group name, or re-select a host response to be assigned to the host group.

●Host Group Setting

•Host Group Name

Specify the host group name.

An existing host group name cannot be specified. Refer to "Naming conventions for adding hosts"

(page 994) for details.

The following input conditions apply:

-Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

-Space

•Host Response

Select a host response to be assigned to a host group.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.

-Solaris MPxIO

-HP-UX

-AIX EMPD (*1)

-AIX VxVM

-AIX Single Path

-VS850/SVC

-Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system

-Default

*1: EMPD: ETERNUS Multipath Driver

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

473

•If the host response is changed for a host group that is configured with the host affinity setting,

the LUNs may not be able to be accessed from the host. Make sure to check the current LUN

settings and select a host response with an appropriate "Host Specific Mode" to change the

host response.

•The following modifications are applied for the host response settings with firmware version

V10L15 or later.

-"Others" is changed to "Default".

-"Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are deleted from the "Host Response"

value. However, these parameters are displayed if they are applied for host groups.

-The setting parameters for "Windows EMPD", "Linux EMPD", and "Solaris EMPD" are the

same as "Default". If one of the host responses that is described here is applied to a host

group, change the setting to "Default".

Available: The host can recognize LUNs

N/A: The host cannot recognize some LUNs

LUN settings for LUN groups

with host affinity settings

Host Specific Mode

Normal AIX Mode NR1000V

Mode

HP-UX

Mode

BS2000

Mode

LUN#0 – LUN#255 Available Available Available Available Available

LUN#0 - LUN#511 N/A Available Available Available Available

LUN#0 - LUN#1023 N/A N/A N/A Available Available

LUN#0 - LUN#4095 N/A N/A N/A N/A Available

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

474

3Add or delete a host in a host group in the following procedures.

■When adding or deleting a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Registered And Now Connected] tab.

The following hosts are displayed in the [Registered And Now Connected] tab:

-Hosts that belong to the selected host group

-Hosts that are connected to an iSCSI-CA or an iSCSI-CA/RA but are not registered in the ETERNUS

DX Disk storage system (*1)

*1: "Host that is not registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system" indicates that a host with the

same iSCSI name, IP version, and Alias Name as the target host is not registered in the storage

system. The host is regarded as unregistered host even if a host with the same iSCSI name, IP version,

Alias Name, and different IP address is already registered. The obtained "iSCSI Name", "IP Version", "IP

Address", and "Alias Name" are displayed.

-Hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system but do not belong to the host

group

-Hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system and belong to the host group

Click the [Rediscover] button to update the iSCSI host list.

(2) Add or delete iSCSI hosts, register the iSCSI host information (the IP address and the Alias name,

etc.) to the added host, and click the [Modify] button.

-Checkbox to select a host

Select the corresponding host checkbox in the iSCSI host list, to add a host.

Clear the corresponding host checkbox in the iSCSI host list, to delete a host.

•If the iSNS server has not been configured in "9.2.3.8 Modify iSCSI Port Parameters" (page

541), the iSCSI host cannot be automatically acquired.

•The following restrictions in the environment that is described below apply for the automatic

acquirement of host information (*1) even when the iSNS server is specified.

*1: "iSCSI Name", "IP Version", "IP Address", and "Alias Name"

-When one of the following OSs is used and there are multiple hosts that have the same

iSCSI name but different IP addresses, only the information of one host can be acquired.

•Windows Server 2003

•Windows Server 2008

•Windows Server 2008 R2

•Oracle Solaris 10

-When the host OS is Oracle Solaris 11, "IP Version" and "IP Address" cannot be acquired.

•The following items can be specified only for the iSCSI hosts that are selected by checkboxes;

"IP Version", "IP Address", "Alias Name", "CHAP User ID", "Change CHAP Password", "CHAP

Password", and "Confirm CHAP Password".

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

475

-IP Version

Select the IP version of the iSCSI host from "IPv4" and "IPv6".

-IP Address

Specify the IP address of the iSCSI host.

There are two methods to specify an IP address; "IPv4" and "IPv6". The IP address must be

specified with the selected IP version (IPv4 or IPv6). The following IPv6 addresses can be used;

"link local address", "global address", "unique local address", and "6to4 address". Refer to

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 757) for details. When the current setting is displayed, the IPv6

address is displayed as an abbreviation.

It is not necessary to specify this item if IP address is not used.

The following input conditions apply:

•For IPv4 address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal)

xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

•For IPv6 address

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 378) for details.

-Alias Name

The Alias name of the member host is displayed.

To add an iSCSI host to a host group, select the checkbox of the iSCSI host to be added, and enter

the Alias name.

If the iSCSI host has already been registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, the Alias

name is displayed.

It is not necessary to specify this item if Alias name is not used.

An existing Alias name cannot be specified.

The following input conditions apply:

•Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Space

-CHAP User ID

The user ID of the member host, for which CHAP Authentication will be used, is displayed.

To use CHAP Authentication on the iSCSI host to be added, select the checkbox of the iSCSI host,

and enter the user ID.

If the iSCSI host has already been registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, the user ID

is displayed.

It is not necessary to specify this item if CHAP Authentication is not used.

Configure the user ID and the password as a pair.

The following input conditions apply:

•Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Space

To register an iSCSI host without using an IP address, perform IP version selection as follows:

•Select "IPv4" when the IP address format of the iSCSI host is IPv4 (when using an IPv4 host)

•Select "IPv6" when the IP address format of the iSCSI host is IPv6 (when using an IPv6 host)

•If the IP address format of the iSCSI host cannot be checked (when either an IPv4 host or an

IPv6 host is used), register two hosts. Select "IPv4" for one host, and select "IPv6" for the

other host. Specify the same iSCSI name, CHAP user ID, and CHAP password for each host.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

476

-Change CHAP Password

To register or change the CHAP Authentication password, select the checkbox.

-CHAP Password

The password for the member host, on which CHAP Authentication will be used, is displayed

with "*".

To use CHAP Authentication on the iSCSI host to be added, enter the password. It is not

necessary to specify this item if CHAP Authentication is not used.

The password can be entered only when the iSCSI host has been selected, and the "Change CHAP

Password" checkbox has been selected.

Configure the user ID and the password as a pair.

The following input conditions apply:

•12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Space

-Confirm CHAP Password

The confirmation password for the member host, on which CHAP Authentication will be used, is

displayed with "*".

To use CHAP Authentication on the iSCSI host to be added, re-enter the password for

confirmation. It is not necessary to specify this item if CHAP Authentication is not used.

The password can be entered only when the iSCSI host has been selected, and the "Change CHAP

Password" checkbox has been selected.

The following input conditions apply:

•12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

•Space

→A confirmation screen appears.

Filter setting

Filter Description

iSCSI Name

Input the iSCSI name that is to be displayed.

iSCSI hosts matching or partially matching the input iSCSI name are displayed.

When not using the iSCSI name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Other Host Group

Input the other host group name that is to be displayed.

iSCSI hosts which belong to any host groups that match or partially match the

entered name are displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Host Response Select the host response name that is to be displayed.

Any iSCSI hosts that are allocated to the selected host response are displayed.

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

477

■When adding a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

→The [Add iSCSI Host] screen appears.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "Host Group Name" is not entered

•When the "Host Group Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Host Group Name" overlaps with an existing host group name

(Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the

interface types.)

•When the "IP Address" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "IP Address" is specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP

Address" is already registered

•When the "IP Address" is not specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP

Version" is already registered

•When the "Alias Name" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Alias Name" overlaps the existing Alias name

•When the "CHAP User ID" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "CHAP Password" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "Confirm CHAP Password" does not satisfy the input conditions

•When the "CHAP Password" and the "Confirm CHAP Password" do not match

•When either of the "CHAP User ID" or the "CHAP Password" has been specified

•When a host cannot recognize some LUNs

•When no hosts are registered in a host group, or when nine or more hosts are registered in a

host group (for ETERNUS DX8700 S2, 65 or more hosts are registered in a host group)

•When the total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX Disk

storage system

Chapter 9 Connectivity Management

9.2 Functions in the Action Area for Connectivity

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

478

(3) Manually specify the iSCSI host information of the host to be added, and click the [OK] button.

-iSCSI Name

Specify an iSCSI name of the iSCSI host (required).

The following input conditions apply:

•Alphabetic characters (lower case) and numeric characters

•Symbols "-" (hyphen), "." (period), and ":" (colon)

•The name starts with "iqn." or "eui."

•4 - 223 characters

→Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

(4) Repeat Step (2) and Step (3) to set more iSCSI hosts.

Refer to Step (2) (page 474) for other settings.

An error screen appears in the following conditions:

•When the "iSCSI Name" is not entered